Publicity for Pet Businesses: Recent Episodes
Rachel Spencer
Hi I'm Rachel and I'm a crazy dog lady.
I love talking about pets and writing about pets as a freelance journalist and pet blogger.
With the pet industry booming and new and pawsome pet brands being created every day, I now offer tips for pet business owners on ways to promote their work.
That might be appearing in mainstream media, so newspapers, magazines, TV and Radio shows and websites.
It could be working with new media creators, so bloggers, podcasters or social media influencers.
Or creating a blog of your own.
As a journalist of 20 years I know what makes a story and what journalists want.
And as an award winning pet blogger at https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/, I know what pet owners love to see, read, watch and listen to.
On my podcast I'll be sharing how to best promote your business so you can get known, win clients and make money.
Tune in each week for tips and advice, interviews from petpreneurs who have been in the spotlight, plus experts in the industry.
And if there's a subject you'd like to cover, I'd love to hear from you.
Stay in touch on social media @rachelspenceruk on all platforms and thanks for listening!
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Helen ‘Scotty’ King is a cartoonist and illustrator supporting business owners in the pet industry by bringing their messages to life.
She works with all kinds of clients, including holiday cottage owners, product makers, coaches, and people providing pet services, capturing the essence of what they do.
Helen says she was ‘rubbish’ at drawing growing up, but loved the work of Walt Disney as a little girl and set herself a challenge to learn to create cartoons.
She studied for an online diploma in design, was supported by Steve Bright, the creator of the 1980s cartoon Bananaman, and started her own business creating cartoons.
With her late dog Jasper as her muse, Helen found a love of creating canine scenes, and after a few years, decided to specialise in working with dog businesses.
Helen has created hundreds of incredible stories for her clients, and her cartoons stop the scroll, create a lasting impression, and lead to sales and enquiries.
In this interview, we talk about how she started her business, the variety of services she offers for pet owners and businesses, and the challenges of running a small business.
Helen talks about dysautonomia, a nervous system disorder that began during her teens, and how she navigates this in life and business, plus the marketing systems that work for her, and ways she’s found support as a business owner.
Topics and timings in this episode:
0.20 - Introduction to the episode.
1.47 - Helen shares how her business started and that she was ‘rubbish at drawing’ but went on a mission to learn.
4.30 - What inspired Helen to niche into becoming The Dog Cartoonist.
6.45 - Ways Helen went about getting the word out about her work.
7.44 - How you can get 650% more engagement with an image than text.
9.21 - The different ways Helen works with pet owners and businesses.
11.40 - Examples of Helen’s visual storytelling.
15.59 - How the cartoons can impact on social media reach.
22.00 - Helen explains how dysautonomia affects her as a business owner and what dysautonomia means.
26.20 - Helen’s feelings on being visible and the frustrations of the ever-changing algorithms.
29.12 - What’s working on different platforms for Helen.
31.25 - What has helped Helen in terms of support in being visible.
32.25 - How being told to ‘Get Over Yourself’ by May King Tsang changed her approach and took away the fear.
35.29 - Helen talks about her blog and newsletter and how they fit into her marketing and inspire her social media.
39.31 - Why building relationships, the personal touch, and being consistent has helped Helen grow her business.
41.42 - Advice for business owners who feel overwhelmed with the information we’re bombarded with about all the things we’re meant to do!
44.00 - How Helen’s business is looking right now and the benefits of being in a community.
47.49 - Ways to find out more about Helen.
Connect with Helen:
Website: https://www.scottyscartoons.co.uk
Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/scottyscartoons
Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/scottyscartoons
Twitter/X: https://twitter.com/ScottysCartoons
LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/helenscottyking/
Links mentioned in this episode:
Check out Bananaman on YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nz8XTi4nc5Y
Listen to Nicki Cameron talk about learning to love LinkedIn
Further reading/listening
How building a community can help grow your pet business with Kerry Jordan
Creating FOMO for your pet business with May King Tsang
How to feel more comfortable and confident promoting your pet business
Having the confidence to step out of your comfort zone with Sarah Jones
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
In this bonus episode, I'm sharing key takeaways from the Business of Pets event organised by the Pet Industry Federation.
This covers range of topics including the importance of having a mentor, the value of a strong support network, the need for a business plan, and the significance of knowing your numbers.
Plus the power of storytelling, the impact of customer confidence on the pet industry, and the role of influencers in promoting pet brands.
You'll also learn about the innovative products and brands showcased at the event.
Key topics in this episode:
- Having a mentor is crucial for business success and personal growth.
- Building a strong support network is essential for overcoming challenges and avoiding loneliness.
- Creating a business plan and knowing your numbers are key to growth and profitability.
- Storytelling is a powerful tool for connecting with customers and building a brand.
- Customer confidence is growing in the pet industry, but affordability is still important.
- Influencers play a significant role in promoting pet brands and driving sales.
- Attending industry events and investing in them can lead to valuable insights and connections.
- Innovative pet products showcased at the event include bone broth, CBD-infused treats, and grooming tools.
- Investing in professional photography can enhance brand image and attract media coverage.
- The pet industry is constantly evolving, and staying informed and adaptable is crucial for success.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Be first to know of any future Pet Industry Federation events
I can't stress how valuable it is to attend events like this and meet like-minded people, if nothing else to realise that you're not on your own in experiencing challenges.
Going out and seeing other entrepreneurs will leave you feeling inspired, and you learn loads of things you can implement in your pet business.
To find out more, visit: https://petfederation.co.uk/
Finally, mentoring and coaching came up so many times and if you're reading this and you're looking to work with a qualified and accredited coach or mentor, hi, I'm here to help.
I have the ILM Level 5 Accreditation in Coaching and Mentoring and am currently studying for ILM Level 7 certification in coaching executive and senior leaders.
You can work with me one-to-one and I also run a VERY affordable membership, Pets Get Visible, where you can join two, one-hour, group coaching calls each month.
This is just £30 a month and you can get 50% off your first month.
Further reading
Why I trained as an accredited coach and what this means for your pet business
Is my Pets Get Visible pet business membership right for you?
How to choose the right pet business membership
The NatWest Accelerator and how it can help your pet business
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you like support in growing your pet business and to feel part of a community by joining a membership?
It can be lonely and overwhelming as a solo business owner, and there are always new skills and challenges to figure out.
Being part of a community of other people who are in your industry and are experiencing the same thing can be valuable and that’s where memberships come in.
Over the last ten years there has been a rise in online communities, and there are many different pet business ones you can be part of.
It might be solely for people who do the same as you, such as a membership for dog trainers, or a broader membership where people who offer products and services for pets come together.
When joining a pet business membership, it’s key to choose the one that’s right for you, and in this episode, I’m exploring the key things to consider.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.35 - Episode overview and what to expect
1.15 - Why be part of a membership
2.21 - Studies into the benefits of being in memberships
3.16 - How being in a pet business membership can help
4.40 - How to find the right membership and things to consider and expect
6.52 - Researching pet business memberships
8.30 - Checking the reputation of the membership owner
10.30 - Checking the coaching style of the membership owner
15.10 - Will the delivery style in the membership suit you?
16.15 - Is this a community you want to be part of?
18.23 - What to expect from my pet business membership Pets Get Visible.
Links mentioned in this episode:
The Pets Get Visible membership includes:
- Learning resources library with templates, worksheets and videos on marketing topics
- Monthly live workshops on visibility and publicity
- Monthly forward planning resources and content inspiration
- Bi-weekly coaching calls for personalised support
- 3 monthly co-working sessions to get content created
- Private community Facebook group for support and collaboration
- Directory listing on the top UK pet blog, The Paw Post
All for £30 per month, providing an affordable way to feel confident and consistent with their marketing.
You can get a 50% discount on your first month, meaning it's just £15 - join Pets Get Visible for just £15.
Plus, read or listen to Is my Pets Get Visible membership right for you?
Or if you’d prefer one-to-one support, book a call and let’s chat.
Related posts
Sarah Mills from Albie's Boutique interview
Why I trained as an accredited coach and what that means for your pet business
How to write a press release for your pet business
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Can playing to your strengths rather than focusing on your challenges help you feel more comfortable with self-promotion?
Sasha Louise Smith, a life coach supporting dog professionals, says embracing what makes you unique can help your business thrive, on your own terms.
Sasha has worked in the dog industry since 2015, as a walker, trainer and dog boarder.
She decided to train as a coach after experiencing burnout and benefiting from a mentor herself, Christina Cass from Epic Dog.
Now an accredited coach, Sasha specialises in supporting neurodivergent clients, both diagnosed and undiagnosed, to help them navigate the challenges they face.
From managing hyperfocus and loss of interest to dealing with Rejection Sensitivity Dysphoria, Sasha shares practical strategies to play to your strengths.
Whether you have an ADHD diagnosis or simply find yourself constantly starting new projects only to abandon them, this chat will help you see your differences can be your superpowers.
Sasha's approach is all about embracing your individuality, creating systems and processes that work for you, and tapping into the support you need to thrive.
In this episode, you'll gain lots of great advice about making life easier and being kinder to yourself as a business owner.
Listen in on the player link below and connect with Sasha on social media on the links at the bottom of this post and let her know your thoughts on this chat.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
1:53 - Sasha's background as a life coach and small business mentor in the dog industry since 2020.
2:31 - Why Sasha set up her own pet business in 2015 and how her rescue work, especially with border collies, developed her practical skills.
4:59 - How finding a mentor in 2018 after a breakdown impacted her business and led her to step away from the training aspect of her dog business.
5:57 - Why Sasha decided to focus on coaching and community support and joined Epic Dog as their community manager.
6:44 - Supporting trainers in the 2020 lockdown and how this shaped her decision to expand her skills and qualifications to help business owners.
11:23 - How Sasha's ADHD diagnosis in 2021 shaped her training experience and inspired her to seek out the right qualifications for her coaching and mentoring.
14:56 - Sasha's advice on how to go about finding the right coach or mentor.
10:25 - Sasha's personal experience of mental health challenges and how she went about gaining a formal ADHD diagnosis.
24:12 - The three different types of ADHD and Sasha's approach to working with neurodivergent clients.
29:57 - Common challenges Sasha's clients face, like starting and losing interest in projects, experiencing Rejection Sensitivity Dysphoria, and feeling overwhelmed.
34:36 - Sasha's perspective on the diverse qualities her clients bring to their businesses and why a neurodivergent diagnosis can be empowering.
37:05 - Sasha's advice on finding the right ways to take care of yourself and your emotional wellbeing, and why it's okay to ask for support, whether through coaching or therapy.
39:24 - Why you don't need a diagnosis to access educational resources if you're relatiing with some of the topics Sasha talks about.
43:06 - Why it's okay to not be firing on all cylinders all the time and how your mental health can impact your capacity.
44:35 - How to connect with Sasha on social media if you'd like to learn more.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Find Sasha on Facebook: www.facebook.com/Coachingbysashalouisesmith
Sign up for Sasha’s newsletter here: https://mailchi.mp/coachingbysashalouisesmith/stay-in-touch
And learn more about her services here:
https://store.adhduk.co.uk/product/coaching-by-sasha-life-coach-and-mentor
Further listening
Why I trained as an accredited coach and what that means for your pet business
What’s your pet business culture?
Jane Ardern on putting you first in your pet business
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you looking to approach content creators to feature your pet business?
In this podcast episode, I'm talking about why thinking 'What's in it for them,' rather than 'What's in it for me,' will drastically improve your pitch success rate.
One of the exercises I do with my clients is to ask them to create a ‘wishlist’ of publications where they’d like to be published.
Regularly, people will get in touch and say, ‘I want to be in this magazine or on this podcast or work with this blogger.’
It might be a brand they’d love to collaborate with and they want to know the best way to approach it.
And the key to success is to think, ‘What’s in it for them?’ What is in it for the journalist, content creator or brand in featuring or working with you?
In this episode you'll learn how 'What's in it for them' works as a pitching approach, and how you can use it to improve your success rate.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.10 - Intro
0.30 - Pets Get Visible sponsors this episode - find out more here: Is my Pets Get Visible membership right for you?
2.01 - What 'what's in it for them' means
3.26 - Building and nurturing relationships
7.07 - Respecting time and value exchange
9.29 - Why you shouldn't be surprised if you're asked for money
10.00 - What is a value exchange?
13.21 - Using the personal touch in pitching
14.49 - Rachel's pitching examples
18.35 - Pitching examples from pet business owners Wendy, Kerry and Louise
23.46 - Conclusion and next steps
Links mentioned in this episode:
If you’d like a pitch framework, you can download my free podcast pitching guide here.
And for further, personalised support on your ideas, come and join Pets Get Visible.
Your first month is only £15 and you can get started here.
Further reading on this topicIs my Pets Get Visible membership right for you?
How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest
How to be the perfect podcast guest
Working with bloggers and influencers with Vicky Gunn
Best podcasts for the pet industry
Visibility lessons from Sunnyside Cottage
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to secure press coverage for your pet business and need some story inspiration?
You’ll find plenty in this blog post and episode of the podcast where I’m sharing my top 20 favourite stories from five years of helping clients get in the press.
To celebrate the 200th episode of the Your Pet Business Content, Your Way podcast, I’ve rounded up a selection to show what journalists look for.
Since I began working with small businesses supporting them with approaching the media, there have been over 1,000 pieces of coverage.
From local outlets to the BBC Breakfast sofa and This Morning, I hope listening and reading these examples will show you what’s possible.
And if you’d like to chat about working together, head to the ‘work with me’ section for a range of options to suit all budgets.
Listen to this episode or head to my website to read many of the examples in the blog post here: https://rachelspencer.co.uk/top-20-pet-business-stories/
Key topics and timings in this episode:
2.28 - How this podcast started at Publicity for Pet Businesses.
3.53 - What made me train as a coach.
7.00 - How you can pitch to the press yourself and why I feel so passionately about showing business owners how to do this.
8.03 - Story number 20 ‘Meet Carla Finzel, the district nurse for pets.’
9.40 - Story number 19 ‘Kate Taylor on why dogs should be allowed everywhere like children.’
12.20 - Story number 18 ‘Karen Boyce the puppy queen of Wales.’
13.38 - Story number 17 ‘Doreen Potter, the Cumbrian dog trainer giving Romanian rescues a home.’
15.07 - Story number 16 ‘Supporting your cat coming out of lockdown with Wendy Thomson in the Warrington Guardian.’
16.14 - Story number 15 ‘Katie Gwilt The Kat Lady in Total Grooming.’
18.23 - Story number 14 - ‘Helen Motteram on the mental health crisis facing our dogs in the Daily Mirror.’
20.14 - Helen Motteram shares what it’s like to be on the BBC Breakfast sofa.
22.11 - Story number 13 - ‘Caroline Wilkinson as a doggy agony aunt in the Guardian.’
23.02 - Caroline on how publicity has helped her business.
24.09 - Story number 12 - ‘Not all breeders are Cruella De Vil with Rebecca Walters.’
25.23 - Rebecca talks about what it was like being in the press sharing her mission.
29.15 - Story number 11 - ‘How to train your dog for social media stardom with Kerry Jordan.’
30.15 - Kerry talks about being in her local lifestyle mag Cumbria Life.
31.33 - Story number 10 - ‘A crisis can bring out the best in us - Suzanne Gould.’
32.44 - Suzanne talks about how being in the spotlight has helped her stand out as a dog trainer.
36.16 - Story number 9 - ‘Meet lockdown hero and Menopaws story Louise Humphrey.’
37.31 - Louise shares how PR has positioned her as a pilates and canicross expert.
38.29 - Story number 8 - ‘Jo Sellers on being a prisoner in her home in Take a Break.’
39.52 - Jo on what it was like being in a real-life women’s magazine.
41.20 - Story number 7 - ‘Emily Thomas why more people are turning to canicross and lots more.’
42.56 - Emily on raising her profile as an authority in canicross.
44.52 - Story number 6 - ‘Meet Zoe Willingham - the animal lover who lives with over 100 pets in the Daily Mirror.’
47.38 - Zoe shares what it’s like to be in the press.
49.27 - Story number 5 - ‘Becky Baker on The One Show and post-puppy blues.’
50.54 - Becky on why you’ve just got to ‘go for it!’
52.09 - Story number 4 - ‘Sarah Jones and her mission for dogs in yellow to get the space they need in the Daily Mirror.’
55.23 - Sarah shares what being in the media has done for anxious dogs.
56.07 - Story number 3 - ‘Dog trainer Niki French on why you shouldn’t walk your dog every day.’
58.35 - Niki on what it’s like to go viral.
1.01.27 - Story number 2 - ‘Kerry Whitney on her sweary bow ties.’
1.03.25 - Kerry on being published in her favourite title.
1.04.20 - Story number 1 - ‘How I dressed the PM’s dog with Kim O’Donnell from Leo, Charley and Me.’
1.06.59 - Kim on the impact of being on the front of every paper in the world and how it led to orders globally.
1.10.23 - Thank you to everyone who has supported the podcast.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Head to my website to view the stories mentioned in this episode here: https://rachelspencer.co.uk/top-20-pet-business-stories/
If you'd like to work together, join my Pets Get Visible membership here: https://rachelspencer.co.uk/pets-get-visible-right-for-you/
To chat to discuss training for your pet business head here: https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/discovery-calls
Let's connect on social media:
https://www.instagram.com/rachelspenceruk
https://www.facebook.com/rachelspenceruk
https://twitter.com/rachelspenceruk
https://www.linkedin.com/in/rachelspenceruk/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you find yourself worrying around how much engagement you have on your social media accounts?
This is a topic I find comes up repeatedly on social media, in Facebook group conversations, and in the coaching calls I run in my membership.
Pet professionals who are doing a brilliant job of caring for animals and supporting their clients, making brilliant products that make a difference.
Yet they become tied up in knots with social media, trying to keep up with the ever changing demands of platforms run by billionaires.
Social media is an incredible free tool to get your work seen, but it can also cause a lot of stress and frustration.
One thing I wish wasn’t a cause of this is engagement.
In this podcast episode, I’m talking about why I would LOVE for you to let go of any concerns you have around this, so it doesn’t hold you back, and so you can show up as the brilliant pet pro you are.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
1:23 - The challenges pet professionals share about social media engagment
2:38 - What is social media engagement
5:24 - Why worrying about it can hold you back
7:10 - Why normal people don't care about social media engagement
8:35 - Would a lack of engagement stop you from buying?
9:24 - Even social media experts struggle to get engagement
10:13 - Remember, you're a pet pro, you are not a social media expert
11:51 - Worrying about a lack of engagement means you’re not getting seen
13:36 - People can discover you on social media and then come OFF social media to find out more about you
15:09 - It takes 10 to 15 touchpoints for people to decide to buy from you
16:42 - Pet parents need to know the available choices
19:08 - You want to dilute the aversive messages that are out there
20:25 - Social media is a little bit like quicksand
21:09 - Remember that people are lurking
22:24 - Engagement doesn't pay the bills and an engaging post may generate no money
24:29 - You're winning just by showing up as research shows many people don't even bother
25:22 - Be brave and post what you really want to say and you might surprise yourself
27:11 - Sometimes it's just having a little confidence boost
29:01 - Podcasts to listen to if you'd like to feel inspired
31:15 - Final thoughts on posting and feeling confident
31:40 - How I can support you in feeling more ok with self-promotion
Get 50% off your first month in Pets Get Visible here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/7Hvpvxzr/checkout?coupon_code=PGV50
Links mentioned in this episode:
Creating meaningful content with Aileen Stevenson
How to feel more comfortable and confident promoting your pet business
If you’re not visible who misses out?
Stuff the social media rules and do things your way with Colette Adwin
Putting your passion and personality into your marketing with Alex McCann
Why I trained as an accredited coach and what that means for your pet business
Get 50% off your first month in Pets Get Visible here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/7Hvpvxzr/checkout?coupon_code=PGV50
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you fed up with feeling awkward when selling your product or service?
If so, I think you’ll love this episode with sales expert Sara Dalrymple, author of More Sales Please, where we’re talking about letting go of the discomfort you feel around asking for money.
You started your business because you wanted to do good work and make a difference, and for this to happen, you need to earn a living.
You likely love doing your work, and Sara says that simply ‘developing a love of talking about what you do’ is the key to being a better salesperson.
Selling is like a muscle, you have to work on it, build it up and maintain it, and in this interview Sara shares a simple way to do this.
She talks through the journey your potential clients go through, from being cold and unfamiliar to warm and ready to make a decision to hot and ready to take action.
Whether you’re a confident salesperson already or looking to get more comfortable with the process, I think you’ll love Sara’s no-fluff advice.
*This post contains an affiliate link to Sara’s book, meaning if you buy a copy, I will be paid a small commission. This doesn’t affect your price and helps fund this podcast.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
2.36 - Sara’s background in corporate and how she came to specialise in sales training.
5.23 - Why it’s ok to feel vulnerable when presenting what we offer online.
6.19 - Sara’s thoughts on reframing sales as “talking about what you’re good at and asking for money.”
9.43 - Accepting that there will always be challenges in the world and economy and that you need to be consistently visible to thrive.
12.21 - Seeing our sales skills as a muscle we need to build and maintain.
16.35 - Ways to figure out what your potential clients are looking for so you’re able to lay the information they need to decide to buy from you.
20.16 - How to create content for the different stages of the journey, from a potential buyer being cold and unsure to warm and considering their options to hot and ready to buy.
27.03 - Posting little and often and why it’s the compound effect of seeing you regularly rather than a few perfectly crafted posts that will lead to more sales.
31.26 - Being strict with your time on social media and spending a maximum of 30 minutes a day on your posts.
35.17 - Handling rejection and using this as an opportunity to clarify your messaging.
37.25 - Having time and patience to let social media work with you and the compound effect to build.
41.52 - How running a pet business is a gift when it comes to content creation because of the emotional connection we have with our animals.
44.07 - Sara’s three steps to get started for sales phobics. Be clear on the value in what you offer, show up regularly, and get support.
46.36 - Where to learn more about Sara and the best places to connect.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Buy Sara’s book More Sales Please on Amazon * https://amzn.to/4cQjUHe
Learn more from Sara on her website: https://saradalrymple.co.uk/
Connect on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/saleswithsara/
Further reading
Creating meaningful social media content with Aileen Stevenson
Putting you first and creating a pet business that makes you happy with Jane Ardern
How to feel comfortable and confident talking about your pet business
Taking the fear out of putting up your prices with Sally Farrant
Why I trained as a coach and what this means for your pet business
Further reading
Creating meaningful social media content with Aileen Stevenson
Putting you first and creating a pet business that makes you happy with Jane Ardern
How to feel comfortable and confident talking about your pet business
Taking the fear out of putting up your prices with Sally Farrant
Why I trained as a coach and what this means for your pet business
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to be an award-winning pet business?
To gain recognition for the hard work you do and stand out from the competition?
Whether you own a grooming salon, a pet shop, training or dog walking service, or you make products that make a difference, being involved in industry awards will boost your credibility and attract new customers.
In this podcast episode, I'm sharing reasons you should aspire to be an award-winning pet business.
Plus tips on choosing the right award for you and using your win to secure media coverage.
Winning awards means you'll elevate your pet business, stand out from the crowd, and gain the recognition you deserve.
And you’ll hear from two pet businesses who have won awards to inspire you.
If this is something you'd like to work on, join my Pets Get Visible membership where the focus for April is awards and get 50% off your first month by clicking here.
Key topics and timings:
0.20 - Introduction
1.29 - What to expect from this episode
1.40 - Getting over the cringing feeling of looking for recognition
3.48 - How you can get support with your awards process and applications
5.50 - It's acceptable to self-nominate for awards
6.30 - Consider the purpose of winning an award
7.37 - Choose the right awards
8.49 - How applying will refine your business messaging
9.42 - Recognition demonstrates professionalism
10.49 - Case study - Niki French
12.10 - Awards boost confidence
12.54 - Winning gives third party validation of business impact
13.51 - Stand out from competitors
15.42 - Social media buzz and engagement
16.00 - Case study - Louise Humphrey
17.54 - Opportunities for public relations
20.45 - What to do if you’d like to work on applying for awards - come and join my workshop!
Further reading on this topic
How winning the SBS award with Theo Paphitis can raise your profile
10 takeaways from Theo Paphitis’ SBS event 2024
Kirsty Skeates shares why you SHOULD be applying for awards for your pet business
How to feel more comfortable and confident promoting your pet business
Is my Pets Get Visible membership right for you
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
What do you do when something happens in your life, and it means you have to stop everything in your business to deal with it?
We live in an uncertain world, and the 2020 Coronavirus pandemic has shown that you don’t know what might be coming around the corner to turn your life upside down.
And while your business is a huge part of your life, there are inevitable things that happen with your family and loved ones which, at times, mean they need to come first.
Running a business is challenging during these times. You don’t have the usual time, energy, and resources to keep the plates spinning.
So what can you do? In this podcast episode, I’m sharing some thoughts on how to navigate the day-to-day running of your business and taking care of yourself too.
The last 12 months have been a stop-start time for me.
And I’m talking about some of the lessons I’ve learned along the way in the hope it will be helpful for you if you’re experiencing the same.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
00:00 - Introduction
1:29 - Defining a stop-start period
4.44 - My own stop-start experience from the last 12 months
7.46 - The difference between going through tough times as a business owner compared with an employee
9.20 - Seven thoughts on how to navigate stop-start times.
9:36 - 1. Accept that you can't do all the things
10:36 - 2. Take the pressure off yourself
13:29 - 3. Work out how much time you can dedicate to work
15:22 - 4. Prioritise cash-generating activity
17.30 - 5. Step away from things that will make you feel rubbish
21:03 - 6. Accept that things will take longer than usual
25:11 - 7. Be kind to yourself
27:19 - Coaching exercise: Prioritising tasks
30:13 - Final thoughts
34:22 - How to keep in touch
Links mentioned in this episode:
Further reading
Navigating the rollercoaster of running a business
The power of taking a pause in your pet business content
Why I trained as an accredited coach and what this means for your pet business
How to navigate controversy in your pet business
Buy Emotional Agility by Susan David here on Amazon.
Listen to The Hit Factory playlist on Spotify
https://www.instagram.com/rachelspenceruk
https://www.facebook.com/rachelspenceruk
https://www.linkedin.com/in/rachelspenceruk/
For more mindset musings, register for my newsletter which you can sign up to here:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Optin
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Each year Theo Paphitis puts on his Small Business Sunday winner's event in Birmingham to celebrate small businesses and give them a boost.
It's a brilliantly inspiring day where Theo and his panel of experts give so much encouragement and line up fabulous speakers to educate and inspire you.
This year, we had talks on using AI in your marketing from Google and a spotlight session from Susan Bonnar, founder of The British Craft House and a former SBS winner.
NatWest chaired a panel discussion with success stories from their Accelerator program Maxine Laceby, founder of Absolute Collagen, Sanjay Agarwal, founder of Spice Kitchen and Shalom Lloyd from Naturally Tiwa skincare.
The fireside chat this year was Stacey Solomon who brought the house down, and was mobbed by fans bringing her gifts and sharing how she'd transformed their businesses with her endorsements.
In this podcast episode, I'm sharing my ten takeaways from the event.
Key topics and timings:
0.20 - What to expect from this episode.
2.00 - Why the SBS community is such a special place to be a part of and how Theo gives you the reassurance we all need.
2.30 - What is SBS and how it started.
4.45 - How the SBS network can help you and provide support.
5.34 - Takeaway 1 - Keep getting up - there will always be setbacks.
7.30 - Takeaway 2 - Stop and sense-check your activities.
9.05 - Takeaway 3 - Don’t be afraid to change.
10.35 - Takeaway 4 - Why it's important to plan and look forward.
12.20 - Takeaway 5 - Use AI as inspiration and a helpful assistant and not to do everything for you!
16.11 - Takeaway 6 - You have to make money.
20.11 - Takeaway 7 - Say yes to things even when it feels huge and scary.
23.45 - Takeaway 8 - Let yourself off the hook with social media and be social put your community first.
26.57 - Takeaway 9 - You need to be seen and the impact of a shout-out from Stacey Solomon - leading to £100,000 of sales for Stamptastic.
29.41 - Takeaway 10 - Why it's ok ask for help.
Links mentioned in this episode:
How Theo Paphitis' Small Business Sunday award can raise your pet business profile
Theo Paphitis launches SBS invest
How the NatWest accelerator can help your pet business
Finding support for your pet business in Pets Get Visible
The rollercoaster that is running a small business
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
After three and a half years, I’ve made the decision to stop the Publicity for Pet Businesses podcast and give it a makeover.
I have loved every moment of chatting to over 100 guests and putting out nearly 200 episodes, through the pandemic and the cost of living crisis that followed.
The advice I’ve shared here, along with the brilliant insights from guests, has helped get pet businesses in the press, on the telly, and has led to huge boosts in sales and visibility.
I’ve moved away from focusing solely on press coverage, I’ve trained to be a coach, I’ve swotted up on marketing and invested in tonnes of training.
And it’s time for the podcast to evolve.
In this short episode, I’m sharing the reasons why, and what’s next with this podcast and the exciting new ways we can work together.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.19 - The final publicity for pet businesses podcast.
2.19 - The challenges I've experienced over the past few months.
3.27 - Why I’m changing the podcast.
4.39 - Why I'm passionate about helping you with building strong foundations for your content marketing.
7.06 - How to get help on a budget.
9.03 - The importance of building confidence when it comes to marketing your pet business.
12.01 - Why you'll make life a lot easier if you stop doing things that aren’t working for you.
14.23 - What’s next for the Publicity for Pet Businesses podcast?
16.21 - My new done with you and done for you content campaigns.
18.32 - How to get in touch if you'd like to chat about working together.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Find out more about my Pets Get Visible membership: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/pets-get-visible-right-for-you/
Listen to the podcast with Aileen Stevenson: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/aileen-stevenson/
Learn why I decided to train to be a coach: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/why-i-trained-as-an-accredited-coach-and-what-it-means-for-your-pet-business/
Get my free downloadable resources to help you raise your pet business profile: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/freebies/
Let's connect on social media:
On Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/rachelspenceruk
On Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/rachelspenceruk
On Twitter: https://twitter.com/rachelspenceruk
On LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/rachelspenceruk/
My free Facebook group:
This is a bonus episode of the podcast where I'm talking about why I'm taking a break for a couple of weeks due to family commitments.
These are the key topics and timings in this episode:
0.04 - Introduction of this episode.
0.20 - What to normally expect from the podcast.
1.02 - Why I'm explaining myself in this episode.
1.47 - What's happening in my personal life that's impacted on my business.
3.34 - My eye condition and how that's impacted on my business.
5.42 - What happens when someone sticks a needle in your eye?
7.54 - What happens if you can’t go on your computer?
8.20 - My work commitments while taking the two weeks off.
9.36 - What I'm going to be doing during the time off.
10.02 - You build an online business you think it’s easy.
11.17 - Why we need to put our health and family over business.
Links mentioned in this episode:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/evergreen-content-pet-business/
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/work-with-me/
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/freebies/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Can you imagine what it would be like to be able to dip into a bucket of ready to go social media posts about your pet business every time you’re stuck for what to say.
Material that you’ve created, so it’s not something you’ll see other businesses sharing, that’s unique to you, personalised for your clients?
Having a bank of content can take away the ‘aghhhh’ and the demands we feel are put on us to constantly feed social media and content platforms.
And ultimately make life easier for ourselves.
In this podcast I’m sharing why a bank of content can help you, when you can use it, how to go about creating one, how it can make your life less stressful.
Plus ways I can support you in going about creating one.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.20 - Introduction to what to expect from this episode
4.15 - The idea of having a bank of content you can dip into any time
4.50 - What evergreen or anytime content is
6.20 - Why it's helpful to have one
8.45 - When you'd use your 'anytime' content
11.48 - How to create your bank of 'anytime' content
19.19 - How to use it once you've created it
22.53 - Always be thinking, 'What can I repurpose?'
24.09 - How to make your bank of anytime content work hard for you
26.56 - What to do if you’d like some support with creating a bank of anytime content
Links mentioned in this episode:
Is my Pets Get Visible membership right for you: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/pets-get-visible-right-for-you/
Learn how to work with me: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/work-with-me/
Amy Mitchell and Asana: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/systems-amy-mitchell/
How to give brilliant radio interviews with Anna Webb: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-give-awesome-radio-interviews-with-anna-webb/
How to create meaningful content with Aileen Stevenson: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/aileen-stevenson/
Letheringham Water Mill review: https://thepawpost.co.uk/daisys-diary/dog-friendly-things-to-do-in-suffolk/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Can Imposter Syndrome be something that is helpful for your pet business?
According to Nicola Kinnard-Comedie, my guest on the podcast this week, it can.
Nicola is a business and mindset coach for equine and canine practitioners.
She helps clients change their mental programming and develop business strategies to grow their horse or dog focused business.
Self doubt, feeling as if you’re not good enough, worrying about your capabilities and being your own worst critic are issues I see all the time.
Usually termed as ’Imposter Syndrome,’ in this podcast episode, Nicola shares how to identify these feelings, how to over come them and how it can be your friend. Really!
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.20 - episode overview.
2.26 - How Nicola works with horse and dog businesses.
2.56 - Nicola’s background and how she designed her dream job.
6.11 - Why working on herself led her to where she is today.
8.40 - Nicola’s experience with ME and how that shaped her career.
10.48 - What imposter syndrome is.
16.32 - Why we should celebrate imposter syndrome and see it as a friend who has helped you.
19.51 - Why working on yourself can help build your confidence.
21.05 - Two simple strategies to get over imposter syndrome.
26.11 - Nicola’s advice on getting through wobbly moments and being brave.
32.14 - Why the BS-ers don’t show imposter syndrome but may experience these feelings.
40.20 - How your mission and connecting with your why can empower you when you’re feeling worried about being seen.
42.24 - Nicola’s Mantra - Your work changes lives. So if you’re not posting and promoting, you’re doing your clients a disservice because what you do is lifesaving.
44.45 - Where to find out more about Nicola.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Head to Nicola's website, https://www.nkcequestrian.com/
Find her on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/nkcbusinesscoaching
On Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/nkcequestriantraining/
And LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/nicola-kinnard-comedie-01611693
Looking for more support in your pet business?Visit my Free Facebook Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
Check out my pet blog and directory at www.thepawpost.co.uk
Join my mini membership here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/pets-get-visible
If you enjoyed this post, you might like to read Why every pet business needs a win folder, Five things that stop you being bold in your pet business, How to stop comparisonitis holding you back with Kate Hoyle or How to deal with criticism from people in your industry.
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Trust is so important when a pet owner is considering a business to take care of their pet or provide a product for their pet.
So how do you go about building it? There’s a formula you can follow called The Trust Equation and I’m exploring it on this week’s podcast.
Created by management consultant David Maister in the 1990s, it’s made up of four components.
The first three are credibility, reliability and intimacy, three things that will help people feel confident about working with you or using your product.
The final is self-orientation, or how self interested you appear to be, and this can undo all the good work in creating credibility, reliability and intimacy.
Listen on the player link below to see how this applies to your pet business, with real examples from people using the different components.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0:20 - Introduction to the trust equation, what is is and how it relates to pet businesses.
3.12 - How Google's zero moments of truth study fits into the trust equation in relation to creating trust, credibility and reliability.
4.26 - The three parts of Google’s ZMOT and how we have to spend 7 hours with a person or brand, with 11 interactions and in four places.
5.40 - How the Credibility element of the Trust Equation works with an example of Zoe Willingham from Best Behaviour Dog Training.
7.42 - How the Reliability element of the Trust Equation works with an example from Sandra Emmons from Happipup.
9.52 - How the Intimacy element of the Trust Equation works with examples from Kim O’Donnell from Leo, Charley and Me, Sarah Mills from Albie’s Boutique and Aileen Stevenson from the Perfect Puppy company.
13.30 - How the Self Orientation element of the Trust Equation works and how we can undo all the good work by coming over as being self interested.
15.00 - Case study from my experience of working with Janet Murray and how the Trust Equation works in action.
20.07 - Case study number 2 - Sarah from Albie’s Boutique.
24.40 - How the content you put out there builds your credibility with an example from Niki French from Pup Talk.
26.27 - Recap over Case Studies Zoe, Sandra, Aileen, Sarah, Kim and Niki.
27.31 - Why we have to be visible and how the ‘rule of seven’ where customers need seven interactions to buy (this is from the 1930s) has changed.
28.02 - What to do if you’d like to work together on this in my Pets Get Visible membership
Links mentioned in this episode:
Is my Pets Get Visible membership right for you.
See my interview with Zoe from Best Behaviour Dog Training
Read Sandra from Happipup’s story
Learn how Aileen from The Perfect Puppy Company creates meaningful content
Check out the chat with Niki from Pup Talk
Learn more about Kim from Leo, Charley and Me
And see Sarah from Albie’s Boutique share her story here
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Colette Adwin is a graphic designer, Instagram expert and founder of content branding system Postagrid.
She works with businesses showing them how to ensure their brands stand out on social media, with a seamless and memorable feed.
We chat about what it was like when Instagram made significant changes, doubling down on video and how this impacted her work.
Plus, falling in love with the challenges you face, building resilience, how important it is to keep looking backwards at what you’ve accomplished, and do things your way.
Colette has so many fascinating views and insights to share, I loved doing this interview and I hope you enjoy it too.
Key topics and timings:
0.20 - What to expect.
1.52 - About Colette.
2.45 - What content branding is and Postagrid.
7.31 - Why it's important to stand out on social media.
10.42 - How Postagrid works.
17.23 - How it works with video and reels.
20.34 - Why we need to take the pressure of ourselves to get engagement and links on social media.
24.36 - How Colette adapted when Instagram moved to being focused on video.
28.55 - Why it's important to embrace challenge as it can help us to grow.
34.35 - Accepting that things will go wrong and picking yourself up.
36.11 - Being brave when it comes to being yourself online and why Colette chopped off her hair.
41.17 - Trusting your own judgement and doing what feels right rather than what you're told you should be doing.
43.50 - How Colette stays resilient by checking in with how thinks feel and whether they feel right for her.
48.50 - Where to find more about Colette.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Postagrid Website: https://postagrid.com/
Follow on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/postagrid/
Think Wonky on Youtube: https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCM89KymBlqciqN29ZRaAntw
Like on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/coletteadwin/
Follow on LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/colettestevenson/
Enjoyed this episode? Then check out Postagrid user Kate Hoyle talking about how to overcome comparisonitis, Putting your passion and personality into your marketing with Alex McCann from Altrincham HQ or Building a community on Instagram with Helen Perry.
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you been reading about ChatGPT and other ai tools and wondering if they might be helpful in your pet business?
When I first tried ChatGPT in January, I’ll be honest, I wasn’t sure, and my mind was totally blown by it.
Chat GPT is OpenAI’s Generative Pre-trained Transformer.
It describes itself as an ‘AI-based chatbot that uses natural language processing to interact with humans and provide relevant information or responses.
‘As a large language model, it has been trained on vast amounts of text data and can generate human-like responses to a wide range of questions or prompts.’
So how does that work for your pet business? Can a bot really help with the endless demands for content?
In this podcast episode, I’m sharing 10 ways you can use it, plus the and some of the pitfalls you might experience.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.20 - Introduction and why I'm talking about this topic and how I am NOT an expert!
2.35 - How to use ChatGPT to create an outline for a blog post or podcast.
5.05 - How to use ChatGPT to come up with titles for webinars.
6.35 - Using ChatGPT to write list posts for social media
7.07 - How the tool can cover your blind spots and offer different perspectives.
8.42 - Using ChatGPT for research but ensure you know your topic really well.
10.44 - How ChatGPT can help you repurpose your website content.
12.24 - Why the tool gets rid of the blank page.
13.42 - How you could use it to write challenging emails
14.51 - Using the tool for writing product descriptions.
15.51 - How it can help you put on your big girl or big boy pants and sell your stuff.
17.13 - Final thoughts, it is not a magic wand, but it can make life easier for you!
Links mentioned in this episode:
https://www.instagram.com/geokao/ - Authentic Business Coach
https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCP9hI9kIV01ob89GzVjNWhA - Vicki Jakes and Sam Jackson
https://open.spotify.com/show/55sPhJUBdsOBIwNVbaHGoj - Chief Optimisation Officers podcast
Find me in my Facebook group here: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
On Facebook here: https://www.facebook.com/rachelspenceruk
On Instagram here: https://www.instagram.com/rachelspenceruk
On LinkedIn here: https://www.linkedin.com/in/rachelspenceruk/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you considering setting up a Facebook group for your pet business?
They’re a brilliant way to raise your profile, build a community, learn what your customers and clients need and make friends.
It’s a place where you can share your knowledge and expertise, find people to collaborate with and build your network and connections.
Nearly five years ago I started a Facebook group, Publicity Tips for Pet Businesses, named after the title of my book.
Since then it’s grown to over 2000 members and I’ve supported many clients with starting their groups.
In this podcast I’m sharing 21 things to consider if you’re thinking of starting a group based on my experience and the lessons from my clients.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.20 - Introduction to the episode
1.43 - Define the purpose of the group and what you hope to achieve with it.
3.24 - Provide a compelling reason for people to join the group.
5.40 - Consider the benefits that the group will offer for your business.
6.55 - Choose a name that's easy to remember and reflects what goes on inside the group.
7.46 - Check out your competitors to see what they're offering and provide something different.
8.18 - Consider your target audience and what you can offer to them.
10.42 - Be clear about what you won't offer, such as medical advice or copyrighted material.
12.17 - Decide on the privacy settings that will make members feel safe and comfortable.
13.41 - Set rules for the group, such as being respectful and staying on topic.
15.19 - Be mindful of the law and monitor content for potential issues or conflicts.
17.02 - Plan your content strategy, such as regular discussion threads.
19.35 - Promote the group using your existing channels, such as social media and newsletters.
21.35 - Determine how much time you can realistically commit to moderating the group and engaging with members.
21.45 - Create a safe space by checking threads for issues or arguments.
22.25 - Consider having someone help with moderating if budget allows.
22.51 - Be sensitive to world events and ensure your content is appropriate.
24.31 - Decide on your stance for removing members who break the rules.
25.18 - Determine if you will allow people who leave to return to the group.
25.55 - Decide if you will use the @everyone tag and communicate this in the group rules.
27.55 - Enjoy the benefits of running a Facebook group for your pet business.
28.35 - What I love about having a group.
29.12 - The secret tool I used in this episode.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Here’s the link to my Facebook community if you’d like to be part of it: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
And if you’ve enjoyed this podcast, and are interested in working together, I also have a private, smaller group for my Pets Get Visible members.
This is where you get more personalised advice, plus we have monthly coaching and forward planning calls and lots more.
Find out more and save your space here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/pets-get-visible
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Zoe Willingham is the founder of Best Behaviour Dog Training in Suffolk and started her business after leaving behind a corporate career.
If you’ve ever wondered what it takes to grow a large dog training academy, build a team to support you and live with nearly 100 animals, this podcast is for you.
Zoe decided to learn more about dog training after getting her first dog Millie, a Cavalier King Charles Spaniel.
She studied to become a dog trainer alongside her corporate job, then qualified as a behaviourist, and in time she was ready to leave her old work behind.
Starting out as a one woman band, her business grew as did her doggy family.
Zoe now has 23 rescue dogs (at the time of writing) and a selection of cats, small furries and even a one-eyed tortoise.
She shares how she grew her business and the lessons she learned along the way.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
2.05 - Zoe’s background before joining the pet industry.
3.05 - How having her own dog led her to learn about training and study to be a trainer.
5.06 - Making the transition from corporate to having a business of her own.
7.00 - Her aim to make dog training more professional and use skills from her old role.
10.02 - What it was like starting her own business.
12.39 - Taking she learned in corporate life to setting up her business and transferring her skills
14.58 - How she went about spreading the word about what she had to offer.
18.16 - How Zoe found a market to go after.
20.23 - Why she decided not to niche.
25.24 - How Zoe built her business and grew a team.
28.36 - How she keeps up the momentum to support a team.
33.50 - Why community and showing people you care is so important.
36.28 - What life is like behind the scenes with her animals.
41.59 - How Zoe gets the word out about her work.
44.23 - Navigating the challenges of running a business.
47.34 - Why it’s important to have contingency planning
49.24 - What’s next for Zoe.
52.14 - Why making life better for pets is at the heart of all she does.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Best Behaviour Dog Training
Website: https://www.bestbehaviourdogtraining.co.uk/
Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/BestBehaviourDogTraining/
Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/best_behaviour_dog_training/
Twitter: https://twitter.com/BBD0G1
Zoe Willingham Dog Behaviourist
Website: https://www.zoewillinghamdogbehaviourist.co.uk/
Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/ZWdogbehaviourist
If you enjoyed learning about how dog trainers grow their businesses, you might like to read Using the power of community to grow your business with Sandra Emmons from Happipup, In the spotlight with Niki French from PupTalk or Creating meaningful social media with Aileen Stevenson
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
When you’re looking for a pet business coach or mentor, is it important that they are certified?
That they’ve followed a training programme, are affiliated with a professional body, and follow a code of ethics?
The coaching industry is unregulated, similar to the dog training industry, and anyone can say they are a coach.
I know this causes frustration in the pet professional world, as it’s important to follow an industry standard.
And it’s why I decided to train to be a coach and studied for the ILM Level 5 Certification in Coaching and Mentoring which I completed in December 2022.
I thought qualifying as a coach would simply mean I felt more comfortable describing myself as one, but what happened on the course helped my business evolve.
In this podcast I’m sharing why I trained, what I learned and what that means for you as a client or a podcast listener.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.20 - Why I decided to record an episode about my decision to become a coach.
2.06 - Why I started my own pet blog as a platform to tell stories.
3.11 - How the blog led to me working with pet businesses.
4.50 - How I’m a bit of a Girl Guide and why it was important to have coaching accreditation.
6.08 - What coaching is.
6.47 - My definition of coaching and how I blend coaching and mentoring.
7.05 - Client example - Sarah Jones.
8.44 - What coaching isn’t.
10.37 - What I learned when I studied to be a coach and how my approach has changed.
12.29 - Providing the bridge or stepping stones to get you to where you want to be.
13.34 - Why it’s important to have a supportive structure when you’re trying to grow your business.
14.09 - The lightbulb moments that made me step away from focusing solely on press coverage.
16.09 - Why I went on a mission to make visibility accessible for people who don’t have a big budget for PR and marketing.
16.55 - The Be Bold Bootcamp and how that change the direction of my business.
18.42 - Why coaching is now part of all of my offers.
19.44 - Bringing coaching into my mini-membership Pets Get Visible.
20.40 - What you get inside Pets Get Visible for £20 a month.
21.30 - How to get in touch if you’d like to chat about working together.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Check out my pet blog and directory at www.thepawpost.co.uk
Join my Pets Get Visible mini-membership: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/pets-get-visible
Learn more about Claire Bradshaw coaching: https://www.clairembradshaw.co.uk/
Listen to Sarah Jones talk about growing her My Anxious Dog business: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/in-the-spotlight-sarah-jones-from-my-anxious-dog/
Listen to Sarah Mills from Albie's Boutique talk about putting on her Big Girl Pants: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/spotlight-sarah-mills-albies-boutique/
Keep in touch!
Find me in my Facebook group here: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
On Facebook here: https://www.facebook.com/rachelspenceruk
On Instagram here: https://www.instagram.com/rachelspenceruk
On LinkedIn here: https://www.linkedin.com/in/rachelspenceruk/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Note this is a recording of a workshop I did for Product Guru in March 2023.
If you’d like to chat about working together, click here to head to my Calendly page here: https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/discovery-calls
In this podcast, I’m talking about the two types of publicity you can use for your pet product business and you can listen in on the player link or read the key points covered as a blog.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.02 - Introduction.
2.44 - The different types of publicity you need for a product business overview.
4.05 - What publicity used to look like and what it is now.
5.22 - Example of a strategic partnership - Barking Bags and Adios Plastic.
6.01 - Why content marketing is important and how we are all publishers.
8.38 - Why it’s brilliant to be able to be nimble and reactive with your content.
9.45 - Tools you can use to find your ideal customer.
10.40 - Case study - Ben Dodd, Adios Plastic.
12.18 - The types of publicity you can create on other people’s platforms.
13.59 - Ways to ensure you’re PR ready.
16.30 - How being in the media can help you reach millions!
17.32 - Case study Claire Bradshaw and her coaching cards.
18.42 - Capitalising on your press coverage by capturing the interest via social media and your email marketing.
20.02 - Case study Ben from Adios Plastic and the second type of publicity and how it’s worked for him.
21.42 - How you can balance the two types of publicity.
22.36 - How to access my free resources and ways we can work together (see the links below)
24.05 - Ways to get in touch.
Links mentioned in this episode:
If you’d like support with this, my Pets Get Visible mini-membership is a place where we can chat about both types of publicity.
Find out more here:https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/pets-get-visible
I don’t offer done for you PR services but if you’re a pet business and you’d like to learn how to approach journalists yourself, I do offer coaching.
You can book in for a chat here:https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/discovery-calls
Plus find plenty of resources to help you with pitching on my freebies page: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/freebies/
Find out more about how to come up with a story idea on the links below.
How to find stories in your pet business
Three moments you can use for story ideas
Learn more about Adios Plastic here:https://adiosplastic.co.uk/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Of all the platforms, LinkedIn is the least popular for pet businesses but Nicki Cameron has embraced it with gusto.
In just over 18 months, she’s styled herself as the dog lady of LinkedIn and it’s bringing in leads and inquiries for her photography business.
Nicki also did a 31 day ‘Brighten up your January’ challenge, lighting up LinkedIn AND all the other social platforms.
And it helped to take her email list from zero to over 300 subscribers in just a month.
In this chat, Nicki shares how she learned to love LinkedIn plus loads of other fab tips on how to get eyes on your work with breathtaking photography.
Key topics and timings:
1:43 - About Nicki and what she does in her pet business.
2:30 - Moving from being a full time dog walker to following her passion for photography.
5:25 - Why Nicki chose LinkedIn as her platform to focus on even.
6:02 - Why LinkedIn isn’t BORING!
7:03 - Making the move from chatting to client.
8:10 - Why dogs beat business chat on LinkedIn every time!
11.27 - Why Nicki decided to do a ‘Brighten Up My January Challenge!’
13:16 - Her goals at the start of the challenge.
15:04 - The kind of people who took part.
17:45 - How Nicki used the challenge to build her audience.
18:35 - Nicki’s advice to anyone thinking of doing a challenge.
20:53 - How Nicki used the challenge as content.
22:43 - Content tips from Nicki - just be you and talk as you!
25:10 - Nicki’s new eBook on how to take fab photos of your dog.
25.59 - How you can have a one to one walk with Nicki if you live in Manchester or Cheshire.
27:28 - Where to find Nicki online (all links at the bottom of this post)
Links mentioned in this episode:
Art of Dog Website: https://theartofdog.co.uk/
Connect on LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/nickicameron/
Follow on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/the_artofdog_photography/
Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/www.theartofdog.co.uk
Twitter: https://twitter.com/ArtofDogPhoto
Listen to the inteview with Alex McCann from Altrincham HQ which was mentioned in this episode: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/personality-into-marketing-alex-mccann/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to see your pet business in the press but you're not sure how to go about it?
In this podcast I'm sharing three ways I can help you get your pet business featured in newspapers, magazines, radio and even on the telly.
Whether you have NO budget at all or you'd like to invest in spending a day together learning everything you need to know to pitch stories to journalists, there's an option to suit.
You'll learn why getting press coverage can help you.
Plus what makes a story idea.
And how to go about choosing the right path for you.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.30 - Why I’ve moved away solely from helping people with press coverage.
0.40 - How I still support people in this area and why I wanted to share the three ways I can help you with this.
1.22 - The reasons why people want to be in the press - four of them. They are to raise brand awareness, to gain visibility on a larger scale than social media, to make sales and to build authority with case studies from Sarah Jones at My Anxious Dog, Zoe Willingham at Best Behaviour Dog Training and Rebecca Walters at Pupstarts Breeders.
6.50 - What makes an interesting story? Community and charity, something new, a lightbulb moment, awards and achievements, inspiring animal, news hacking or news jacking.
The three ways I can help you…
11.20 - No 1. How I can help you get in the press for FREE with my free resources you can download on my website, my press release template and five steps to get in the press guide.
13.15 - No 2. Gain support and get personalised advice for your pet business in my Pets Get Visible mini-membership. This is just £20 a month.
16.03 - No 3. Work with me one to one, and chose from a 90 minute or half day one to one, or learn how to do your own PR in a DAY with my Get Your Pet Business in the Press in one day package.
19.51 - How to get in touch to learn more, join my FB group and find me on social media.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Download my Press Release Template and Five Steps to Get In the Press Guide for FREE: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release
Find out more about Pets Get Visible, my mini-membership: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/pets-get-visible
Book in for a one to one: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/one-to-one-coaching/
Learn more about how to get in the press in just one DAY: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/publicity-programme/
Find me in my Facebook group here: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
On Facebook here: https://www.facebook.com/rachelspenceruk
On Instagram here: https://www.instagram.com/rachelspenceruk
On LinkedIn here: https://www.linkedin.com/in/rachelspenceruk/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Sarah Mills started designing cute bow ties for her Cockapoo Albie so he looked sweet when he accompanied her to her art studio.
And when other people remarked on how gorgeous they were it inspired her to start a pet accessory business.
Since starting as a bit of fun back in 2017, Albie's Boutique has grown and Sarah has created more than 13,000 products for dog lovers.
Now, Sarah has her dream pet brand and her products are featured on Not On The High Street.
She's created another brand, Oh Mabel, after her second Cockapoo Mabel, and in this episode Sarah talks about the lessons she's learned.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
1.40 - How Sarah came to launch Albie’s Boutique by accident.
4.37 - Going to the National Pet Show and seeing the love for her products from pet parents.
5.13 - Sarah’s business timeline from starting in 2017 and growing from a part time hobby business.
9.13 - Making the decision to go with her dog business and leaving the art business behind.
11.22 - Getting support at a crossroads moment in her business and following her heart.
13.33 - Exploring wholesale options for her creations and gaining belief in her work and talents, while staying true to being handmade and growing her business.
18.26 - Starting 2022 with a mission, a set of big girl pants and going for it with her business.
21.04 - How Sarah went about figuring out what she wanted for her business.
28.31 - How making connections and letting go of some of the things to other experts has helped Sarah grow.
30.01 - Letting go of the things she doesn't enjoy doing and hiring help.
31.33 - The range of products Sarah provides.
36.47 - Sarah’s advice to anyone who wants to be true to their vision and goals.
44.52 - What it’s like to apply to Not On The High Street.
48.51 - What’s next for Sarah and Albie’s Boutique.
52.18 - Sarah’s advice to anyone starting out and wanting to be brave.
55.08 - Taking things one step at a time and looking at what you’ve achieved.
57.13 - How to find out more about Sarah and Albie’s Boutique.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Shop Albie’s Boutique Website: https://www.albiesboutique.com/
Like on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/albiesboutique
Follow on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/albiesboutique/
Get Inspired on Pinterest: https://www.pinterest.co.uk/albiesboutique/
Extra resources
How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PodcastPitch
How to write a press release for your pet business:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release
27 ideas to promote your pet business:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/27ideas
Five steps to get your pet business in the press:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/five-steps
Join my free Facebook Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
Check out my pet blog and directory at www.thepawpost.co.uk
Sign up: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/pets-get-visible
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you fed up of seeing the same old dog trainers spouting advice in the media and want a slice of the action?
It can be frustrating seeing the same names crop up over and over, particularly if you feel they use methods which are out of date.
Or aversive, or that leave pet owners feeling stressed and upset as it’s not the way they want to train their dog.
There IS something you can do about it - pitch to the press yourself.
I’ve worked with HUNDREDS of dog trainers and helped them to put their advice in the media, reaching millions of owners.
And this podcast episode shares everything you need to know if you want to work with journalists, whether you’re a dog trainer or whatever you do in your pet business.
If you’d like to chat about working together and you’re a dog trainer who’d love to learn about getting in the press, you can book a chat here.
Book a call if you'd like to chat about working together: https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/discovery-calls
Key topics and timings:
0.20 - The discussion about journalists in dog training communities and why I decided to record this episode.
1.20 - Why it’s essential to listen if you’d love to have your name in the media and you’re sick of seeing the same people over and over.
2.55 - How to get in touch if you’d like support with getting your name out there as a dog trainer.
3.12 - The free resources available to you to support you in pitching to the press.
3.56 - Journalists want to hear from you.
4.52 - Why you need to have a story and some prompts to help.
7.01 - You need to be charming, like Graeme Hall.
8.54 - Remember, you’re speaking to dog owners, not other trainers.
10.54 - Why it’s best to expect that other pet professionals will have a pop at you then you can only be surprised if they don’t.
12.23 - PLEASE don’t cut off ‘those’ newspapers.
15.05 - You CAN clarify important or complicated points.
16.29 - You can’t dictate what the headline will be.
18.39 - Being in the press is a good thing for you.
19.37 - The options you have if you’d like to work together.
Links mentioned in the episode:
Book a call if you'd like to chat about working together: https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/discovery-calls
Find out what happens on the one to one sessions:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-your-pet-business-in-the-press/
Book your session here:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/one-to-one-coaching/
Five steps to get your pet business in the press:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/five-steps
How to write a press release for your pet business:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release
Keep in touch
Find me in my Facebook group here: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
On Facebook here: https://www.facebook.com/rachelspenceruk
On Instagram here: https://www.instagram.com/rachelspenceruk
On LinkedIn here: https://www.linkedin.com/in/rachelspenceruk/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of taking part in the NatWest Entrepreneur Accelerator programme which supports businesses looking to grow?
If so, this podcast interview with Sophie Gowling, Enterprise Acceleration Manager for NatWest will give you all the information you need.
You’ll learn what the programme is, the four pillars of support, who it’s for, what coaching is, how it can support your pet business and more.
For the last six months, I’ve been part of the Accelerator and I share my personal experience of how it’s helped me launch my Pets Get Visible membership and work on other areas in my business and life too.
Applications for the current round are open until Febraury 27th but it is an ongoing programme that opens every six months, so head to the NatWest website to learn when the next cohort begins.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.20 - Introduction to the episode.
2.46 - Sophie’s background and how she became part of the accelerator team.
5.46 - What the programme is and the four pillars of support.
9.01 - How members of the programme support one another and the benefits of peer support.
9.36 - Why it’s not all scary men in suits and top hats and what to expect if you join.
12.27 - Access to funding and how this is possible.
16.08 - What coaching is and how having a sounding board helps when growing your pet business.
16.48- The difference between peer to peer coaching and group coaching.
18.32 - My experience of coaching and how it’s like a game of snakes and ladders.
20.41 - The benefit in taking time to pause and talk about where you are in your business, the plates you have spinning and why you do what you do.
22.17 - Why I joined the programme and how it helped me launch my Pets Get Visible programme.
25.40 - The power of coaching and accountability.
29.51 - Sophie’s advice for pet business owners considering taking part.
31.23 - How to apply for the programme.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Applications are open for the latest round until February 27th, and the programme runs twice each year, starting in March and September.
To apply, visit: https://www.natwest.com/business/business-services/entrepreneur-accelerator.html
Connect with Sophie Gowling on LinkedIn
Learn more about Pets Get Visible, my Accelerator project and mini-membership: Is my Pets Get Visible membership right for you?
Connect with me in my free Facebook Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
Check out my pet blog and soon to be directory at www.thepawpost.co.uk
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you shy away from sharing you and your world in your marketing? If so, this chat with Alex McCann is for you.
Alex is a former journalist turned marketer and has been working in social media for 13 years at Altrincham HQ.
From MySpace to TikTok, he’s had to get his head round every platform for his own business and that of his clients.
He’s figured out what works and what doesn’t, and what he shares here is a really simple way to feel comfortable putting yourself out there.
It’s as easy as sharing what you’re passionate about and your personality, letting people into your world so the right people connect with you.
Your day to day life, behind the scenes, what you do each week, and the message is that it’s ok to talk about you!
If you’re looking to simplify your marketing and feel more confident sharing an insight into you, this episode is for you.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
2.30 - How I came to work with Alex in the first place and how he helped me back in 2016.
3.00 - Alex's background and how he came to start Altrincham HQ, a social media agency and training business.
4.00 - Alex’s mission to get people out and about and how he uses social media to do this.
5.33 - How the popularity of platforms has changed over the years, and how Alex has to adapt to what’s trendy!
7.45 - What it’s like for Alex as an introvert and switching to ‘putting myself out there’ mode.
8.12 - Creating boundaries around what you talk about and bringing the things you feel passionately about and your personality into your content.
12.43 - How to use your day to day life to feed your marketing, like Adrian Mole’s diary.
15.11 - Keeping your social media and marketing simple and why it doesn’t have to be hard work and regimented.
17.34 - Alex’s weekly round up post and how this can be a simple way to inspire people to want to work with you.
20.46 - The impact of sharing the behind the scenes on Alex and how it leads to inquiries for his business.
23.03 - How Alex is always mining ideas for social media by keeping a track of the questions that come up in conversation.
25.41 - Ways to keep up with the news and changes on social media.
28.03 - What to do if a platform you enjoy using changes the way it works and why you don’t have to do what everyone else is!
30.28 - Remembering that people buy from people and the fundamentals of marketing never really change.
32.17 - Alex’s thoughts on blogging and how having a bank of content can serve your clients.
35.37 - How to choose topics and the impact of blogging around what your audience is interested in.
38.25 - Why it’s important to just go for it and not worry about things!
40.30 - Where to find out more about Alex.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Head to Alex's website: Altrincham HQ Website
Read Alex’s Blog
Check out the book: They Ask, You Answer by Marcus Sheridan on Audible
Listen to Aileen's episode on Creating meaningful social media
Resources
How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PodcastPitch
How to write a press release for your pet business:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release
27 ideas to promote your pet business:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/27ideas
Five steps to get your pet business in the press:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/five-steps
Keep in touch
Find me in my Facebook group here: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
On Facebook here: https://www.facebook.com/rachelspenceruk
On Instagram here: https://www.instagram.com/rachelspenceruk
On LinkedIn here: https://www.linkedin.com/in/rachelspenceruk/
Work with me
Check out my pet blog and soon to be directory at www.thepawpost.co.uk
Join my £20 a month membership : https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/pets-get-visible
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
This week on podcast I'm talking about whether my PGV mini membership, what’s involved, what you get, how it can help you, what impact being part of it will have on your pet business.
You’ll hear some examples from members on the impact it’s had for them, and I’m going to share who the programme is for and who it’s not for.
When you run your own business you do the work on the business and the work in the business, working with the animals and people, making the product, delivering the service.
As self employed folk, you enjoy what you do in your business as opposed to when you might have had a regular job, and it’s important to enjoy working on your business too.
But this ‘on the business’ stuff can feel overwhelming, and that’s what the PGV membership is here to help with.
I wanted to create a space for business owners to get support when it comes to putting their business out there, have tools to help them be consistent with marketing and a community of people to support them.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
2.15 - What Pets Get Visible is
3.40 - How the learning resources work
4.33 - How the planning calls work
6.41- How the coaching calls work
8.25 - Examples of success stories from the coaching calls
15.58 - How the community element works
16.12 - How the directory works
20.19 - Who the mini-membership is NOT a good fit for
22.43 - Who the mini-membership is a good fit for
25.43 - Testimonials from Nicki, Catherine and Hayley
28.26 - What to do if you want to join
Links mentioned in this episode:
Facebook Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
Check out my pet blog and soon to be directory at www.thepawpost.co.uk
Listen to Aileen's podcast on Meaningful social media
Listen to Sandra talk about the Power of community
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
She’s never done a Facebook live, her referrals come from her hairdresser and she’s gone from struggling to fill classes to causing so much FOMO she has a waitlist.
Meet Sandra Emmons from Happipup, my guest on the podcast this week who is throwing the rules out of the window and doing things her way.
Sandra runs an award winning dog and puppy training business in Berkshire and is talking about using the power of community to grow your pet business.
She LOVES getting out and about in her local area with her clients and their pups and dogs, and the adorable pups get tongues wagging as fast as their tails.
People approach her in the pub, the park, the coffee shops to see how they can join in the fun and it’s helped her grow her business in a way that feels right for her.
No cringing about doing things she doesn’t want to do on social media
No hustling round in Facebook groups looking for clients.
Instead she’s caused such a buzz about how she works that people flock to her!
Sandra and I have worked closely for the last year, she was one of my coaching course coachees and I have LOVED seeing her thrive.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.20 - Sandra shares what she focuses on in her pet business and the kind of services she offers.
4.21 - Working as a primary school teacher and in building maintenence before finding her dream job as a dog trainer.
5.00 - Building up Happipup as a part time job as she set up her business and how scary it was at first.
6.22 - The shock of having to learn about marketing and outsourcing social media at the start and why you don't have to do it all!
8.00 - My background of working with Sandra as a client.
09.06 - Having faith that when times are hard, good times are around the corner.
11.36 - How Sandra gets seen in her local community and what's worked for her and why her real life training generates FOMO.
13.14 - Getting out and about and how this has really skyrocketed her business.
14.10 - How TALKING to people instead of Facebook lives have helped her grow.
18.00 - A typical customer journey for one of Sandra's clients.
19.09 - Sandra shares her experiences she has in her classes from skateboarding dogs to Danny De Vito cutouts.
21.46 - Working with the community and bringing people together.
24.05 - Why it's key to promote responsible dog ownership and being a considerate dog owner.
26.19 - Having a laugh and being a supportive ear to her clients.
29.30 - Sandra's advice to shy pet professionals who want to build strong relationships in their community.
30.24 - Don't feel like you have to do the same as everyone else and do what you feel confident with.
32.00 - What's next, training new staff and rolling out her Swap and Share boxes.
34.30 - Where to find out more about Sandra and Happipup.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Head to the Happipup Website: https://happipup.co.uk/
Give her page a like on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/HappipupDogTraining
And you can follow her on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/happipupuk/
Find out more about my one to one coaching: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/q6UPFN9P/checkout
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is your pet business marketing in need of some tender loving care?
I’d love to invite you to my ‘Show your pet business some love’ challenge.
It’s a free five day challenge taking place from January 30th to February 3rd 2023 where you shake things up in your pet business and remember why you fell in love in the first place!
With Valentine’s Day coming soon, I decided to create a free event around showing the love and you can learn what to expect in this episode.
SAVE YOUR SPACE HERE: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/show-some-love-challenge
Key topics and timings:
0.20 - Introducing the challenge and the idea behind showing some love.
4.46 - Why your pet business might need showing some love
6.36 - What’s the impact of this?
9.25 - Why I’m joining in the challenge with you
13.28 - What to expect from the challenge
14.56 - How to register for the challenge
Links mentioned in this episode:
Register for the challenge: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/show-some-love-challenge
Join my free Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you have a review of your year? What you did? What worked? What didn’t? What brought you joy? What made you want to howl with rage?
This week on the podcast I’m talking through what happened in my business in 2022.
You’ll find the episode interesting if you’re nosey like me and if you’re looking for a framework to do a review of your own.
I’m sharing a warts and all account including the launch where no-one bought, what happened when I put my big girl pants on, the coaching course that changed my life and what’s new for 2023.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.20 - Intro to what the episode covers and why I'm sharing this.
1.50 - What happened in my business in 2021.
6.27 - Be Bold and how Anna Webb inspired my words for the year for 2022.
7.36 - Why I did the ILM Level 5 course in coaching and mentoring.
10.51 - Launching the Get In the Press course in January and having lower sign ups.
12.49 - Launching the Be Bold Bootcamp.
15.33 - Launching the Get In the Press course in June and no-one buying it.
16.54 - Recouping what I'd missed out by selling Power Hours.
17.44 - Why I decided to take August off.
19.03 - Running a five day challenge and what happened when the Queen died in the middle of it.
21.34 - Coming up with the skeleton outline for the Pets Get Visible mini membership.
24.06 - Launching Pets Get Visible to current clients.
26.44 - Using the period between Christmas and New Year to grow the mini membership by nearly a third!
28.10 - My 2023 offers - coaching, Pets Get Visible and one to one.
34.18 - Why it's ok to talk about failures and the lessons I learned.
36.16 - Looking back at what you've achieved as well as forwards.
32.14 - Adopting a more 'coaching' approach rather than thinking I have to provide the answers all the time.
41.07 - Ways to work with me in 2023 - Book a call. here
Links mentioned in this episode:
Find out more about my Power Hours and Half Days one to one,
Listen to In the spotlight with Niki French from Pup Talk.
Learn about my Be Bold Bootcamp
Read about how to navigate emotional events in your marketing
Find out more about the NatWest Entrepreneur Accelerator,
Check out my pet blog www.thepawpost.co.uk
AFFILIATE LINK - read The Gap and the Gain by Dan Sullivan.*
Fancy chatting about 1-1 or my Mastermind: Book a call.
Grab my free resources:
27 ideas to promote your pet business
How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest
How to write a press release - free template
Five steps to get your pet business in the press
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Goals - does it make you want to weep when you hear the word? Or are you a goal getter?
This week’s podcast is about setting goals and sticking to them.
In it I talk about how to decide on a goal that’s achievable and also something that you actually want.
Plus considering WHY you want to achieve it and what it will mean to you.
And why I DON’T want to have a six figure business.
Plus four examples of different goals to help you with you own.
If you’d like to chat about working together on your goals, you can book a chat here.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.20 - Setting goals that are realistic.
1.20 - What to expect from this episode and examples of different goals.
1.54 - Why goals don’t have to be about work.
3.50 - Why it’s key to consider WHY you want a goal.
5.23 - How often what we think sounds appealing might not be when we really dig into what you’d need to sacrifice to have that goal.
6.54 - Goal setting example 1 - online course.
11.48 - Goal setting example 2 - fully booked for the summer as a cat sitter.
14.58 - Goal setting example 3 - being on a big retailer like Not on the High Street.
18.51 - Goal setting example 4 - running a sub 2 hour half marathon.
24.21 - Finding someone to support you and keep you accountable with your goal.
27.16 - How we can work together if you’d like support with your goals.
28.07 - Coaching example - Jo Sellers from Pippin Pets and her book launch goal.
29.34 - Wishing you every success with your 2023 goals.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Learn more about the Pets Get Visible mini-membership: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/invitation-pets-get-visible/
Book a call if you’d like to chat about working together one to one: https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/friday-drop-in
Check out Sarah at Albie’s Boutique: https://www.albiesboutique.com/
Check out Wendy at My Three Cats: https://www.mythreecats.co.uk/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you kicking yourself for missing out on Christmas advent calendar or 12 days of Christmas countdown?
If so this podcast episode is for you.
It’s all about forward planning for 2023 so you can get ahead of yourself and make sure you’re maximising every opportunity.
So you can link the product or service you offer to seasonal content and bring more sales to your business.
It’s a really simple method, and it will mean you go into 2023 feeling ahead of the game.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
1:02 - Why this episode is for you if you’re one of those people who is kicking themselves for missing out on a Christmas advent calendar or a 12 day of Christmas countdown.
2.19 - What you get if you join my Plan your publicity class on January 4th at 1pm.
3.17 - How to get started with planning ahead - write down all of the products and services you sell in your pet business.
5.12 - Consider when are the key times people need your thing and create campaigns around them. For example, cat sitting in summer holidays.
8.04 - Campaign example - Sarah Jones from My Anxious Dog and her Dogs in yellow day.
7.19 - Making the most of awareness days that are linked to what you do.
9.44 - How to find out about awareness days.
12.06 - Case study - Jo Sellers - Adore Your Adolescent Dog book.
14.20 - Why you need to be thinking 90 days ahead when it comes to your marketing, especially for a new product or something big in your business.
15.11 - How you can prepare a campaign if you’ve been nominated or shortlisted for an award to make sure you shout about it!
16.35 - Working with My Pets Get visible members on their Q1 goals.
17.49 - How the mini membership works.
19.28 - How the Plan your publicity for 2023 workshop works. (Sign up link is below)
20.18 - Thanks for supporting the podcast in 2022.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Sarah Jones from My Anxious Dog on her Dogs in Yellow campaign.
Fancy planning your marketing live every month?
My Pets Get Visible mini membership is just what you need.
It's at a no brainer price of £20 a month or £220 for the whole YEAR.
Head to the link below to pay monthly:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/7Hvpvxzr
Or here to pay in full.
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/RHWVfmqU
OR…
Get the replay of my Plan Your Publicity for 2023 class.
You get ideas for the whole year, and a workbook to put them in plus a guide on creating campaigns and what to include.
This is £37 and you can get the recording and all you need to plan your year on the link below.
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/zNwRX65e
Pets Get Visible members get this as part of the package, so if you’re already in the mini-membership, please don’t buy it!
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you ready for a rest this Christmas? I know I am!
AS we wind down to the holidays it’s a time to reflect on the year and this week’s podcast is looking at 12 C’s which will help your pet business thrive.
Each word beginning with C is something to consider when you’re marketing your pet business, in your interactions with your customers and also, when taking care of YOU.
Every word has been chosen with the intention of it helping you when it comes to putting yourself out there and to give you things to consider that can help you grow.
And to help ensure your customers feel special, feel part of something, feel that you care about them, so they remain loyal and rave about you to others.
I hope you’re tuning in with a hot chocolate, maybe winding down with a mince pie or a glass of Baileys ahead of a wonderful Christmas.
Key topics and timings:
0.20 - Explaining the 12 C’s of Christmas for your pet business
2.21 - Care - How do you show your people that you care?
3.16 - Community - How to build a community around your pet business.
5.35 - Clarity - Is it clear what you do and why you do it?
9.04 - Creativity - In what ways are you creative so you stand out?
11.03 - Confidence - What gives you confidence in your pet training business?
9.26 - Crap - Accept you’re going to be crap when you first start something new.
10.57 - Confidence - How do you instill this in others and what gives you confidence?
13.48 - Compassion - Showing this to animals and also to ourselves.
16.01 - Communication - How do you communicate? What’s best for you?
17.52 - Control - Do you feel in control of your business? And do you show your customers you’re in control?
20.56 - Compare - Don’t compare yourself to others as you don’t know their story. It’s You versus You.
24:14 - Collaborate - How can you work with other people in the industry to raise standards and make an impact?
26.41 - Coaching - A coach could be a friend, family member, peer or an accredited coach who supports you in accomplishing your goals.
28.53 - How you can work with me in 2023.
If you’ve liked the 12 C’s of Christmas and you’d like to work together, my Pets Get Visible mini-membership is all about content, coaching and community.
And it’s just £15 a month or £170 for the year for founder members.
Head here to find out more: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/invitation-pets-get-visible/
Links mentioned in this episode:
Listen to this chat with Ant McGinley, chat with Ant McGinley, king of podcasting on how to start a podcast
If it’s a blog, try How to start a pet blog.
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Does your to-do list feel like it’s running away with you?
Having your own business means you’re juggling so many different tasks and keeping on top of them and prioritising is a job in itself.
Keeping on top of things can cause stress and overwhelm and this week on the podcast I’m chatting to Amy Mitchell, a systems expert, on how to overcome this.
Amy specialises in helping small businesses use Asana, a project management tool or ‘second brain’ which can help you manage your work so you have more time to do the things you love.
If you want to get ahead and organised for 2023, this is the episode for you!
Key topics and timings in this episode:
2.04 - How Amy helps businesses with tech and systems.
2.50 - How Amy waved her old life as a copywriter goodbye after realising it was systems that lit her up!
6.53 - Why people find it challenging getting their content in front of people.
9.18 - Why it’s key to keep your systems simple when you start out.
12.53 - How Amy relates to her clients and leads by sharing her own experiences.
14.04 - Asana and why Amy chose that as a tool.
18.03 - Ways to choose your tasks and allocate them in Asana to ensure they get done!
22.59 - A visibility board and how that can help raise your profile.
26.37 - Keeping your wins in Asana and other SOS material to help you through the wobbles.
27.44 - The emotional impact of having systems that work and taming the to-do list.
35.31 - Amy shares a client story about Jen and how she used Asana in creating a path for a group programme.
39.57 - Being relaxed about your systems - they don’t have to be perfect.
43.02 - Where to find out more about Amy and you will definitely want to get her emails!
Links mentioned in this episode:
Access Amy’s Free Mini training here: www.amymitchell.ca/amt
Visit her website: www.amymitchell.ca/
Find her on Instagram @amyr_mitchell: https://www.instagram.com/amyr_mitchell/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you considering starting a podcast for your pet business?
Having your own show is a way for you to let people get a glimpse of what it’s like to work with you and build trust and a feeling of familiarity fast.
Because you’re in your listener’s ears, there’s a real intimacy about the relationship.
You have their attention much more so than you might on social media or other communication channels where other distractions can take over.
And if people like what you do, the ripple effect means they tell people about you, meaning your podcast and your potential customer base grows.
In this episode I’m sharing things to consider if you’re thinking of starting a podcast.
While I’ve had a podcast for nearly three years, I’m by no means an expert, but I’m linking to several people here who are.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
3.20 - My experience of launching my podcast.
6.01 - What if I run out of ideas? (You won’t)
8.10 - Using the podcast to sell courses and programs.
13.10 - Things to consider - Do you want it to bring in money or is it a passion project?
15.54 - Sense checking your podcast - is it on a topic you’re already known for?
18.25- How to publish your podcast on your website.
23.13 - Podcast workflow example from last week’s podcast episode with Aileen Stevenson.
25.02 - How to do your timestamps and blog post to go with your episode.
26.57 - How to promote your podcast on social media.
Links mentioned in this episode:
If you’d like to join my Pets Get Visible mini-membership which I mention in this episode for content marketing inspiration, support, coaching and accountability so you stay consistent, head here.
It's a year long commitment and the investment will be £170 for the year or £15 a month.
You can sign up here:
Pay monthly:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/7Hvpvxzr
Pay in full:
https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/RHWVfmqU
Listen to Greg talk about the impact on his business Greg Pattison from Great Outpaws
How to start a blog for your pet business
How to start a podcast for your pet business with Ant McGinley.
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Dog trainer Aileen Stevenson’s social media posts are regularly shared dozens of times, often attract over a hundred comments and power her business.
She creates meaningful content that people connect with, written from the heart, sharing observations from her own dog Charlie and the dogs she supports.
Only five years ago, Aileen was working as an accountant then retrained as a dog trainer and fulfilled her dream of building a successful business.
She’s written a book, Dogs, Bumps and Babies and works one to one in person with families, children and dogs in Glasgow and supports clients online too.
In this episode Aileen shares the story behind her business and how she goes about creating meaningful content to inspire pet parents to think differently about their relationship with their dogs.
And how using Facebook in particular has helped her to grow her business.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
2:25 - Introduction to Aileen and her work at The Perfect Puppy Company
5:09 - Aileen’s experience of making the leap from corporate account to full-time dog training.
12:27 - The importance of being consistent with your posts.
15.42 - Creating meaningful content for social media and how Aileen does this.
21:09 - Aileen on planning her content.
23.57 - Why sometimes you just have to share things that just happen.
31:02 - Aileen’s advice for people who might be feeling a bit nervous posting on social media.
34:12 - You’re not talking to other dog trainers, you are talking to people who need to know how to train their dog.
35:55 - How things we can assume everyone knows already make for great content.
40:09 - Why it’s so important to talk about kind ways to train a dog because not all owners know this and they are looking to train with kindness.
43:05 - Why you don’t need to be bashing other people - just share how you do things.
48:50 - How long Aileen spends on her marketing every week.
51:18 - The importance of listening to other people’s experiences and using your own imagery.
56:46 - The fine line between taking inspiration and copying.
1:01:00 - Why you SHOULD invest time in your content because it powers your business.
1:03:52 - How to find out more about Aileen and the Perfect Puppy Company.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Visit Aileen's website: https://www.theperfectpuppycompany.co.uk/
Follow her on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/theperfectpuppycompany
Connect on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/theperfectpuppycompany/
Check out her book on Amazon: https://www.amazon.co.uk/dp/B092PGCXHT
Listen to the Just Bloody Post It podcast with Helen Perry: https://www.helen-perry.co.uk/the-just-bloody-post-it-podcast/
Listen to the chat with Kennedy from Email Marketing Heroes: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/email-marketing-rob-and-kennedy/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to go into the Christmas holidays knowing that you had all of your marketing for January done?
You need my Plan Your Jan three day challenge.
It’s happening from November 28th - 30th and it’s to get you thinking about what you’re going to be promoting in 2023.
You’ll come away bursting with ideas for different ways to talk about your offer.
And you can relax over Christmas knowing your marketing for the first and most miserable month of the year is already done.
Learn what to expect in this short podcast.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
0.19 - What the Plan Your January challenge is - a three day event happening November 28th - 30th 2022.
1.10 - Examples of pet businesses who have planned ahead and the impact it’s had on their sales. Sarah Jones, My Anxious Dog, Kim O’Donnell, Leo Charley and Me, Zoe Willingham, Best Behaviour Dog Training, Steph Galloway from Swoopsy Art and Niki French from Pup Talk.
6.17 - Joining in the free training in my Facebook group and the resources you’ll get to take part.
7.14 - My 31 ideas you can use any time download - grab it in the link below.
8.49 - How the challenge will help you get focused for January.
9.17 - How by the end you’ll have your January planned and can relax over Christmas.
10.02 - Where to sign up to take part (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/plan-jan)
Links mentioned in this episode:
Save your place in the Plan Your Jan challenge here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/plan-jan
Join my new Pets Get Visible mini membership here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/invitation-pets-get-visible/
Book a one to one for £199 - these go up to £299 in 2023 - here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/mnhF2itF
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Whether you are an aspiring or established breeder, looking for a new furry family member, or simply a pet parent who wants to learn, you’ll love this inspirational, informative podcast with expert dog breeder Rebecca Walters from Pupstarts Breeders.
Rebecca has worked with dogs for over two decades.
She started out working for councils in London, picking up stray dogs from the streets.
While some found new homes, but ultimately it led to many dogs being put to sleep and Rebecca had to deal with this heartbreaking process.
Rebecca is on a mission to make a difference when it comes to animal welfare.
She now runs a breeding community - Pupstarts Breeders - that supports dog breeders and she’s also the founder of the UK’s first nationally recognized training program for breeders.
She's passionate about shaking up the industry with a focus on healthy puppies with healthy mums, matched with the right families to go on to live happy and fulfilling lives.
Next week is her National Dog Breeder Convention from 21st - 24th November and you can sign up here: https://pupstartsbreeders.com/celebrate-national-dog-breeder-day/
And on November 25th, it's National Dog Breeder Day, aiming to shine a spotlight on breeders who want to do right.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
2.04 - About Rebecca Walters and Pupstarts Breeders.
3.19 - How Rebecca found herself being a puppy welfare campaigner.
6.49 - What it was like working in the council pound 25 years ago, before the internet was as it is now, and social media.
8.26 - How Rebecca found herself running a community supporting breeders.
11.55 - Using her own experience as an ethical breeder to grow a supportive community for people wanting to do the right thing for dogs and pups.
14.18 - The reality of stopping breeding puppies.
20.00 - Why dog breeding SHOULD be treated as a profession to raise standards.
22.54 - Rebecca’s mission to support breeders.
24.53 - How the pandemic has impacted on breeding and the puppy population.
26.26 - The different programmes Rebecca creates to support breeders and pet parents.
29.37 - How Rebecca gets the message out there about her mission.
32.11 - Her welfare message and how it’s reached far and wide.
38.16 - Her hopes for ethical breeders to be proud to be a dog breeder.
40.37 - What to expect from Rebecca’s Dog Breeder Conference.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Find out more about her work and Pupstarts Breeders with the links below.
Pupstarts Breeders https://pupstartsbreeders.com/
Dog Breeding Courses https://pupstartsbreeders.com/dog-breeding-courses/
The Pupstarts Blog https://pupstartsbreeders.com/blog/
National Dog Breeder Convention & National Dog Breeder Day https://pupstartsbreeders.com/national-dog-breeder-day/
Dog Breeding, Whelping, and Puppy Raising Advice Group https://www.facebook.com/groups/225831035682369
If you enjoyed this episode and want to hear about people making a difference, you might like Why Jade Statt co-founded...
When you’re creating content for your pet business, you may have been told it’s key to attract your ideal client.
And what if you could send your nightmare clients running to the hills too? You can with a Content Fortress - where you create a Kingdom of Happiness for your business.
It’s a concept created by Martin Huntbach and Lyndsay Cambridge, founders of Jammy Digital, a content marketing and website company and authors of The Content Fortress.
In this podcast episode they share everything you need to know to attract the clients and customers you love and repel the ones who aren’t a good fit.
Martin and Lyndsay explain how Pricing Content, Sales Content, Repelling Content, Attracting Content, Process Content and Story Content works and how to use it in your pet business.
Key topics and timings in this episode:
2.03 - About Martin and Lyndsay from Jammy Digital.
3.46 - Where the idea for the Content Fortress book came from.
6.45 - How we can use content marketing to set boundaries in our businesses when it comes to who we do and don’t want to work with.
8.46 - Tackling tricky topics like why you charge more than your competitors.
12.33 - How pricing content can work as sales content and help you stand out from the competition.
15.46 - Why you should consider putting content on your website first then repurposing for social media due to you owning your website and having control over it.
20.09 - How ‘process’ content can reassure pet owners that you’re the right person to help them.
26.43 - Overcoming the fear of being copied in your content marketing and why you should prioritise your customers over your competitors.
31.44 - Sharing story based content - client stories, case studies and testimonials.
38.11 - Why it’s ok to write as you speak and NOT worry about things being perfect.
40.40 - Repurposing your blog and website content to fuel the rest of your marketing.
46.17 - How often should you publish content?
48.20 - Why taking time to write ‘Fortress’ content for your website will SAVE you time in the long run.
51.35 - Creating a kingdom of happiness with your content and where to find out more about Jammy.
Links mentioned in this episode:
Martin and Lyndsay’s website and blog: https://jammydigital.com/
Follow them on social media:
On Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/JammyDigital/
Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/jammydigital
LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/martin-huntbach/
Buy The Content Fortress on Amazon - https://amzn.to/3h8Oh3q * affiliate link
Katie Gwilt at The Kat Lady - https://thekatlady.co.uk/
Listen to Katie in this episode - In the Spotlight with Katie Gwilt from the Kat Lady
Building a Story Brand by Donald Miller on Amazon - https://amzn.to/3FOxFIu * affiliate link
If you'd like some support with your content marketing, doors are open to my new mini-membership, Pets Get Visible, and you can find out more about it here
When you run your own business, promoting what you do is one of the many tasks you need to learn fast and get on with. You’re grappling with what to post on social media, what platforms are best for you, whether you should have a blog, what your audience likes and much more. That’s why I’m creating the Pets Get Visible mini-membership as a place for you to go to get the support and resources you need to figure this stuff out. It’s a simple toolkit with the essentials you need to market your business, plus a friendly community and coaching when you need it. You get to have your pet business on an award winning pet blog and directory where thousands of pet parents head each month in search of advice and things to help their pets. It’s not full of MORE stuff you need to learn. There’s not MORE experts coming to tell you what you should be doing and how to hop on the latest trend and give them money. You won’t have to turn up to loads of calls or give up hours of your life. And it’s £15 a month if you’d like to be a founder member. In this podcast I’m sharing all you need to know about my new mini-membership and if you'd like to be a founder member, email me, rachel@rachelspencerwrites.com. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.20 - Why you shouldn’t listen to this episode if it’s the first time you’ve listened to the podcast! 1.06 - Introducing my new mini-membership which is £15 a month for founder members and includes content, community, coaching and a listing on my pet business directory. 2.00 - Why my new mini-membership is like slimming world for your pet business. 3.49. - The importance of having a structure and accountability. 6.07. - Why having support, someone to celebrate the highs and be there to keep you going on the lows and community will help your pet business. 6.46 - What the Pets Get Visible membership is. 8.45 - The learning resources that will be inside. 9.20 - The coaching calls. 11.45 - Why there won’t be templates. 12.01 - How the coaching will work. 12.58 - How the directory will work. 15.34 - The cost - £15/month or £170 for the year. 16.08 - How my old membership worked. 18.23 - Why I want to offer more than press coverage. Links mentioned in this episode: Links mentioned in this episode: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/cost-of-living-crisis-bella-vasta/ (Conquer the cost of living crisis with Bella Vasta) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/future-proof-pet-business-lucy-rennie/ (How to future proof your pet business with Lucy Rennie) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/freebies/ (Download my FREE press release guide) Join the Facebook community: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Bella Vasta is a pet sitter turned marketing coach and she has over two decades experience in running a thriving business. She’s weathered several recessions and economic crashes, the Coronavirus pandemic, political upheaval and much more in her own business and supporting others. In this episode she’s sharing her no fluff advice on how you can weather the storm of the cost of living crisis. And how actually, we should always be prepared for something to come along and throw a spanner in the works. Running a business is a rollercoaster but there are things you can do to make sure you can enjoy the highs and keep going in the lows. Topics and timings in this episode: 1.53 - Bella's background in the pet industry and how she got through challenging times. 6.23 - Why it’s the people that fail that are looking at the news that are the problem. 9.33 - What’s going to get you through the economic downturn. 14.52 - Working from home and virtual consultation as an example. 18.07 - The importance of listening to your clients. 24.45 - What would you say to people who are getting clients who are saying they can’t afford you anymore? 27.38 - The importance of knowing your numbers. 33.36 - Why you have to stay connected to your why and your business plan. 36.04 - How to stand out from the competition and come out stronger. Links mentioned in this episode: Want to find out more about Bella? Check out her website where you’ll find her podcast, Better Business with Bella: https://jumpconsulting.net/ (https://jumpconsulting.net/) Follow her on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/bellavasta (https://www.instagram.com/bellavasta) On Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/jumpconsulting (https://www.facebook.com/jumpconsulting)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
If you’ve got a pet product business you’ll love this episode with Jo Milnes where she’s sharing the marketing activities that have worked for Distinctive Pets. Including what goes on behind the scenes of her awareness day, Muddy Dog Day, which is happening on October 29th. Jo has three pet businesses, a horse stud, a dog friendly holiday cottage and she set up Distinctive Pets, selling products for pets, pet parents and the home in 2016. In that time she’s tried all kinds of things, starting with a self built website, then getting her products in front of people at shows. She’s progressed to a Shopify site, won awards, had tonnes of publicity, used her skills to find three stolen Spaniels, launched a newsletter and a product range for her day. You’ll learn tonnes on the reality of growing your business in this straight talking chat with Jo. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.17 - How Jo set up her business to keep busy after her daughter went to uni in 2016. 4.16 - Being inspired by Slimming World to create a place where dog owners could get healthy and natural treats. 5.29 - Jo's feelings about being naive starting out and trying to figure things out on her own. 6.50 - Why investing in your website makes you more confident in showing it off. 7.15 - How shows and online work together. 9.08 - Email marketing and how that's helped Jo's business. 12.21 - Jo's Muddy Dog Day awareness day, what it is and how to get involved. 15.42 - How Jo created her day and what it's done for her business. 20.37 - How you can help Jo on the day. 22.33 - Jo's advice for people who want to grow their pet businesses. 24.18 - The importance of supporting each other in the pet business space. 26.40 - Where to find out more about Jo. Links mentioned in this episode: Learn about Muddy Dog Day: https://distinctivepets.co.uk/pages/muddy-dog-day (https://distinctivepets.co.uk/pages/muddy-dog-day) Check out the Muddy Dog Clean Up range: https://distinctivepets.co.uk/collections/muddy-dog-products (https://distinctivepets.co.uk/collections/muddy-dog-products) Follow Jo and Distinctive Pets on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/distinctivepets/ (https://www.facebook.com/distinctivepets/) Follow the day on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/muddydogday (https://www.facebook.com/muddydogday) Connect on Twitter: https://twitter.com/distinctivepets (https://twitter.com/distinctivepets) Keep in touch on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/distinctivepets/ (https://www.instagram.com/distinctivepets/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
The words ‘Future Proof’ are everywhere at the minute especially with the cost of living crisis. And this week's podcast guest is here to share with you how to do this for your pet business. I'm chatting to Lucy Rennie, she’s a communications expert and she’s been talking about Future Proofing your business for years and shares everything you need to know. From making your clients feel special to launching special products or services in line with what is happening in the world and turning uncertainty into opportunity. You'll get loads of awesome advice from Lucy who lives for small business. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.08 - Lucy’s background. 4.05 - What is future-proofing? 5.54 - The emotional impact of what’s going on in the world on small businesses. 8.31 - Three clear steps to future-proof your business. 13:14 - Why we should be encouraging our clients to write great reviews, case studies, and testimonials. 15.52 - Challenging assumptions about what the Cost of Living crisis really means. 18:26 - The types of things people ARE spending money on during a recession. 24.53 - Gift ideas for your clients. 27.23 - How focusing on the changing needs of your clients can help your business thrive and present opportunities. 29.26 - The importance of being honest with yourself and your clients. 31.31 - Lucy’s belief that small businesses will help turn around the economic crisis and why now IS the time to believe in what you do. 33.57 - Embracing grit and resilience. 35.25 - The importance of recognising and enjoying your success. 37.37 - Lucy’s book and podcast and where to find out more. Links mentioned in this episode: Learn more about Lucy on her website: https://lrcomms.co.uk/ (https://lrcomms.co.uk/) Buy her NEW BOOK on her https://www.iamlucyrennie.com/book (website here!) And on https://amzn.to/3RVC52A (Amazon here) * Affiliate Link * Follow her on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/iamlucyrennie/ (https://www.instagram.com/iamlucyrennie/) Join her free https://www.facebook.com/groups/1398727320295549 (Communicate with Purpose Facebook Group) Listen to https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-get-more-pet-business-reviews/ (How to get more review for your pet business)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you see other pet businesses talking about awareness days and national days and feel like it’s something you’d like to start doing? But you’re not sure how, or maybe you’re worried it might seem a bit random or cheesy or that it has to be your day? Here are some common questions around awareness days and how best to use them in your pet business content. Plus examples from pet business owners who've created their own days and how they've boosted their business. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.00 - What are awareness days 3.42 - How you can use them in your pet business marketing 6.15 - Why use awareness days 8.50 - How to avoid sounding cheesy 10.20 - Different kinds of content you can share 13.17 - Does it have to be my day? 14.44 - How to pick what days to use? 16.48 - How to find out about the days? Links mentioned in this episode: Thinking of creating your own day or would you like support planning a campaign around one? Visit my https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/work-with-me/ (Work With Me page) to see the packages on offer. Ruffle Snuffle list of pet holidays here: https://www.rufflesnuffle.co.uk/the-best-list-of-pet-national-days-holidays-calendar/ (https://www.rufflesnuffle.co.uk/the-best-list-of-pet-national-days-holidays-calendar/) Learn more about https://www.pippinpetsdogtraining.co.uk/dog-separation-anxiety-awareness-day/ (Dog Separation Anxiety Day) on September 30th, created by Jo Sellers. Kate Taylor’s https://www.caninecompanionday.co.uk/ (Canine Companion Day) on October 2nd. Jo Milnes has https://distinctivepets.co.uk/pages/muddy-dog-day (Muddy Dog Day on October 29th). Niki French, creator of https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/spotlight-niki-french/ (Don’t Walk Your Dog Day (April 2nd) has a book, Stop Walking Your Dog). Kim O’Donnell, creator of https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-kim-odonnell-went-from-invisible-to-global-pet-business/ (Twin With Your Dog Day (December 1st)) Learn abouthttps://www.bellascollars.co.uk/pages/national-dogsinyellow ( Dogs in Yellow Day) on March 20th created by Sarah Jones from My Anxious Dog. And Kerry Jordan's https://www.furandfables.com/national-dog-photography-day/ (National Dog Photography Day on July 26th).
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to be able to magic 30 social media posts from a video you’ve already recorded or an article you’ve written? If so you will love this podcast with Skarlett Rockwood, a pet business content marketing expert and the creator of the Pawprint Method. It’s a system where you turn one piece of core content, so a blog, podcast or video or a live into up to 30 posts. Rather than sharing it once, you use it over and over - without it sounding tired or boring! Skarlett and I chat about how to make it happen in this episode, and if you listen in and you have a vault of material already, you’ll never be stuck for what to say again! In fact, you'll have so many ideas you won't know what to do with them. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.32 - How Scarlett found herself working in the pet industry. 3.33 - Challenges for service businesses. 5.54 - Challenges for Product-based businesses who often feel like the product is the only thing they can post about. 12.57 = The importance of repetition and follow-up. 17.54 - If you want to be known for something, you have to keep talking about it. 22.01 - Skarlet's advice for anyone who finds posting lots overwhelming. 24.14 - How to repurpose old content for new content. 27.43 - Looking at holidays and awareness days to see if they are relevant to you. 30.35 - Using common questions as content. 32.05 - How to find out more about Skarlet. Links mentioned in this episode: How to find out more about Skarlet. Website: https://skarletrockwood.com/ (https://skarletrockwood.com/) Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/skarletrockwood/ (https://www.instagram.com/skarletrockwood/) Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/SkarletRockwood (https://www.facebook.com/SkarletRockwood) LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/skarletrockwood/ (https://www.linkedin.com/in/skarletrockwood/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Looking for some inspiration for your pet business marketing this winter? As the dark nights draw in and the temperatures drop, the needs of pets and pet parents can change and so does the way you talk about your product or service. Key holidays like Bonfire night, Halloween, Thanksgiving, Christmas and New Year are opportunities for you to pitch to the press too. And the sooner you get your ideas together and sent off, the more likely it is that your story will be picked up. The same for social media, content and email marketing. Planning ahead means it gets done and you can create products and packages for the winter too. Whether it’s health and safety advice or a fun pitch about a product, this podcast episode will give you loads of ideas from now until January. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.51 - why it's important to get ahead with your planning so you can make more sales in your pet business! 1.50 - how far ahead you need to be to pitch to the press. 3.45 - Examples of two clients Sarah Jones and Niki French and how they plan ahead. 6.32 - When to start promoting your Christmas products. 7.25 - Adapting your current offers to fit in with New Year 9.50 - Key awareness days for October 18.01 - Key awareness days for November 24.33 - Key awareness days for December Links mentioned in this episode: List of pet awareness days: https://www.rufflesnuffle.co.uk/the-best-list-of-pet-national-days-holidays-calendar/ (https://www.rufflesnuffle.co.uk/the-best-list-of-pet-national-days-holidays-calendar/) Black dog awareness https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/news/black-dog-syndrome-why-fur-colour-stops-pets-finding-homes/ (blog post on why pets with dark fur stay in rescue) Muddy Dog Day on https://distinctivepets.co.uk/pages/muddy-dog-day (Distinctive Pets Website) Canine Companion Day on https://www.caninecompanionday.co.uk/ (Dotty4Paws website) World Animal Enrichment Day on https://www.rufflesnuffle.co.uk/world-animal-enrichment-day-november-12 (Ruffle Snuffle website) Twin With Your Dog Day on https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/pages/twin-with-your-dog-day (Leo, Charley and Me website) Carl Cunard on https://www.instagram.com/carlcunard (Instagram)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Want to know what it takes to build a sustainable and profitable pet product business? Listen in to this episode with Debbie Humphreys from Redhound for Dogs who has 12 years experience in the pet industry. Starting out designing outfits for her whippet to writing a book on Dogs In Jumpers to surviving and thriving in the pandemic and raising thousands for charity. Debbie has tested out so many things when it comes to growing her business and shares so much wisdom in this episode. It’s a must listen whether you’ve an established business or are at the beginning of your journey. Listen in on the player link or carry on reading the key points as a blog post. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.22 - Introduction to this week’s episode:. 1.57 - How Debbie got started in the pet industry. 8.14 - How Debbie ditched wedding dressed for making dog jumpers. 14.06 - Ditching all the different breeds and sizes to specialise in clothing for Whippets. 19.56 - How Debbie got through the Christmas of 2020 with the business. 25.26 - The upshot of having a bigger premises. 30.42 - How to use Facebook groups to get more engagement. 36.19 - Debbie’s advice for anyone looking to start a business. Links mentioned in this episode: Listen to Debbie's interview about how to deal with copycats: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/debbie-humphreys-copycats (https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/debbie-humphreys-copycats) Find out more about Debbie’s work: https://www.redhoundfordogs.com/ (https://www.redhoundfordogs.com/) Follow her on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/redhoundfordogs/ Join the Redhounders Facebook Community: https://www.facebook.com/groups/2912568292301801 (https://www.facebook.com/groups/2912568292301801) Learn more about copying and protecting your business on the Anti Copying in Design Website: https://www.acid.uk.com/ (https://www.acid.uk.com/) Debbie also recommends the Make it British community: https://makeitbritish.co.uk/ (https://makeitbritish.co.uk/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
This podcast is following the sad news about Queen Elizabeth II passing away in September 2022. The aim of the episode is to share some thoughts on how to navigate this sad news as a small business owner. It's thoughts, not advice, and I'm sharing it as it can feel challenging knowing what to do (if anything) in these situations. Here are the key points covered and timings: 0.58 - Why people have such fondness for the Queen. 1.21 - Protocols, the impact and the loss of a figurehead being played out on social media. 3.27 - Why I'm talking about this. (this podcast is from a live in my Publicity for Pet Businesses Facebook community where I offer support with visibility) 5.00 - Is now the right time to be selling? 5.22 - Acknowledging what's happened in a way that feels right for you. 6.47 - Read the room when it comes to deciding when to return to 'normal.' 7.07 - If you don't have anything nice to say, don't say anything. 7.29 - Consider whether to respond to posts that feel insensitive, is this a good use of your emotional energy. 7.50 - Remember people will remember how you made them feel. 8.12 - Remember your work is honouring the Queen's memory as a huge animal lover. 9.02 - Keep calm and carry on, and show the grit and resilience she did right until the end. 9.15 - Quotes from the Queen. Links mentioned in this episode: Join my free pubilicity for pet businesses community on Facebook here: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to feel more comfortable sharing what you do in your pet business? Telling your potential clients and customers about the product or service you offer and how it can help them? Without sounding pushy, selly or desperate. If so, the Be Bold Bootcamp for pet businesses is for you. It’s a short course designed to give you a gentle nudge when it comes to marketing your business. Over four weeks you’ll learn to feel more at ease sharing the passion that inspired your business, identify who your dream clients are, share stories to inspire people to want to work with or buy from you and much more. In this podcast episode you’ll hear from two petpreneurs who have taken part and the impact it had for them. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.37 - What is the Be Bold Bootcamp 3.31 - How taking part can help your pet business 4.13 - The challenge of marketing your pet business 5.06 - What's included in the programme 7.01 - Breakdown of each module What kind of results can you expect 8.24 - Client story - Kim O'Donnell - Leo, Charley and Me 26.27 - Client story - Fiona Pedley - VA to the pet industry 43.58 - How much the course costs 44.48 - Dates of the sessions Links mentioned in this episode: Save your place on the Be Bold Bootcamp: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/beboldbootcamp Find out more about Kim on her website: http://www.leocharleyandme.co.uk (www.leocharleyandme.co.uk) Find out more about Fiona on her website: http://www.fiona-yourva.co.uk/ (https://www.fiona-yourva.co.uk/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you feel like you’re forever being told about what you’ll miss out on if you don’t ‘put yourself out there?’ You know that being seen more will bring more inquires, sales and customers, but it doesn’t stop it feeling daunting and overwhelming. So how about you reframe it and look at who will miss out if you’re not visible? There will be people searching for what you do on Google, asking for recommendations from friends and family on social media, asking in person. And if no-one knows who you are and what you do, what happens? They miss out as well as you. In this podcast episode I’m exploring this topic, and I hope it will inspire you when you’re feeling wobbly about being visible. You can also join in a free training I'm doing from September 5th - 9th 2022, the Be Bold Challenge and you https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/be-bold-bootcamp (can register here). Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19 - The inspiration for this episode. 0.59 - About the Be Bold Challenge that's taking place 5th - 9th September. 2.38 - Reframing your fear around being visible and thinking about who misses out if you can't be found easily online. 3.24 - Why 'famous' dog trainers and big brands can intimidate us when it comes to showing up and why we have to overcome this. 4.55 - Why being visible isn't just for celebs and John Lewis. 6.22 - Ethics and why it's hard to see people who don't share your ethics and values standing out online. 8.17 - The struggle around putting yourself out there. 10.51 - Is Marketing really a dirty word - how to reframe it to be positive. 11.48 - Example - how your customers search online. 13.10 - Thinking about what your customers are searching for so they find you. 14.17 - How we 'check out' the brands we consider buying from or working with looking for reassurance that they're right for us. 16.10 - My experience with an aversive trainer. 21.24 - Five suggestions to ensure people who need your product or service can find you. 23.00 - Get in touch, rachel@publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk for the free training or to work with me. Links mentioned in this episode: Join the free Be Bold challenge by signing up here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/be-bold-bootcamp (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/be-bold-bootcamp ) Join my Facebook group: Comparisonitis and how to overcome it with Kate Hoyle: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/comparisonitis-pet-business-kate-hoyle/ (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/comparisonitis-pet-business-kate-hoyle/) How to create FOMO for your pet business with May King Tsang: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/getting-started-with-fomo-creation-with-may-king-tsang/ (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/getting-started-with-fomo-creation-with-may-king-tsang/) Grab my free resources: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/freebies/ (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/freebies/) And you can sign up for my weekly newsletter here. https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Optin (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Optin)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is it ok to press pause on your business for a month? This summer you might have heard business owners talking about taking big chunks of time off, or taking August off, or even the entire summer. When you work for yourself it can take over your life. You can’t turn off your work phone at 5pm on a Friday and walk away from your computer. You worry whether your clients might be upset if you don’t respond on a weekend, and you live, sleep and breathe your business. Being in the thick of it 24/7, 365 days a year can be exhausting though, and if you’re burnt out, it’s not helping you or your clients. In this podcast episode I’m exploring the whole ‘pressing pause’ topic, why we can find it hard, and what can happen if we do. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19 - Intro to the episode 1.20 - The conversation around taking time off this year after two and a half years of lockdown 2.44 - Why I’m pressing pause for a month this summer 5.44 - The science behind pressing pause and the benefits it can bring 11.13 - Choosing the right time to press pause 12.38 - Full transparency on my time off and what I'll be pressing pause on 13.39 - Where to find my free resources in August and 200 hours of support 14.00 - What I’m doing on my month off Links mentioned in this episode: Read the full article on Attention Restoration Theory here: https://positivepsychology.com/attention-restoration-theory/ (https://positivepsychology.com/attention-restoration-theory/) Rebecca Daniel’s thesis https://libres.uncg.edu/ir/asu/f/Daniel,%20Rebecca_2014_Thesis.pdf (here)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to have more reviews for your pet product or service? You go above and beyond for your clients and wouldn’t it be lovely if they would shout about you from the rooftops? People are busy going about their day, they’re not thinking about raving about you on the internet, so how do you make it happen? Keep going and don’t feel disheartened because reviews have clout. A huge 49 per cent of people in a recent study said they trust a review as much as a recommendation from a friend or family member. That’s powerful. And in the same study, 17 per cent of people said they had NEVER been prompted to give a review. In this episode learn why reviews matter, easy ways to ask for them so you can attract more of the people you love to work with. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.20 - Pet businesses, reviews and research on why they matter 2.42 - Why ask for reviews for your pet business? 9.21 - What if you’re a new business and you don’t have reviews? 9.36 - Ideas for getting reviews when you have just started your business (or need reviews!) 11.00 - How I got my first review by working for free 14.08 - What stops people asking for reviews? 19.29 - What compels people to leave a review? 21.10 - How to get more reviews 26.01 - How to keep in touch and show off your awesome reviews Links mentioned in this episode: Here’s the link to my group and it would be great to see you there:https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses ( https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses) Read the full Brightlocal study results here: https://www.brightlocal.com/research/local-consumer-review-survey/ (www.brightlocal.com/research/local-consumer-review-survey/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you find you get loads of engagement on your social media, and people love your stuff, but they’re not hitting the ‘buy’ button? It can be frustrating, and with a lack in customer confidence thanks to the state of the economy and upheaval in Government, small businesses are feeling the pinch. This week on the podcast I’m chatting to my friend and marketing expert Niki Hutchison on the topic of converting browsers to buyers. She’s sharing so many tips and strategies you can follow to turn those lurkers into lovers - people who rave about your thing and PAY YOU MONEY! And we all need some of that right now don’t we! Niki is a dog mum herself to Cavachon Rosie so she has an understanding of what pet parents need herself and what compels them to buy. Key topics and timings in this episode:0.19 - Intro and about Niki 1.59 - Niki’s background in marketing and helping business owners 3.25 - Why it’s vital to turn browsers into buyers 4.45 - Why it’s important to understand browsers and how they impact our businesses 5.33 - How to motivate browsers to get their hand in their pocket! 8.45 - Creating a moment where people admire and relate and buy 10.34 - Ways to show browsers we have what they need 14.37 - Using our content to reassure browsers that we can help them 17.48 - Why we want stories not sales pages to convince us to buy 22.26 - What to do if you have a ‘nice to have’ product rather than a ‘must have.’ 25.14 - Using community to stand out and be memorable 29.28 - What’s working in online communities right now 32.47 - Using real life meet ups to build community 36.42 - How your geographical community can help your business 38.49 - Final thoughts on browsers to buyers for people who are worn out with browsers! 41.26 - Where to find out more about Niki Links mentioned in this episode:Head to her website: http://www.nikihutchison.com/ (www.nikihutchison.com) Follow her on Instagram: http://www.instagram.com/nikihutchison (www.instagram.com/nikihutchison) Connect on Facebook: http://www.facebook.com/nikihutchisonltd (www.facebook.com/nikihutchisonltd) Check Niki out on LinkedIn: http://www.linkedin.com/in/nikihutchison (www.linkedin.com/in/nikihutchison)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to get more engagement on your social media posts from your potential clients rather than people in your industry? If so, you’ll love this chat with dog trainer coach Erin Moore about how create content for pet parents rather than pet professionals. It’s for you if you feel like your social media is an echo chamber. Where you get more interest on posts from other pet professionals - who won’t ever need to buy your services. When it’s actually pet owners who you want to attract. Erin and I chat about how to navigate this, and why it’s key for you to market to potential clients rather than squabble with other pet pros. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.40 - About Erin and what she does in the pet industry 2.00 - Erin’s background and how she got to be where she is now 5.30 - Erin talks me through the steps she followed to get where she is now 8.30 - Why Erin became a coach 10.00 - Erin shares what dog trainers find most challenging when marketing their businesses 13.30 - Erin shares why dog trainers shouldn’t slag other trainers off online 18:00 - We talk about how blowing out someone else's candles doesn’t make yours burn any brighter 22:00 - The impact of getting into spats with other dog trainers 25.00 - Erin shares what dog trainers need to be posting to attract clients 27.55 - What’s the most helpful advice for dog trainers 37.00 - Erin’s advice to people who want to take the first step in marketing their pet business 38.23 - Why it’s important to come out and admit you’re wrong if you’ve made a mistake 43:40 - Where you can find more about Erin Links mentioned in this episode: Head to Erin's website: http://www.dogbizcoach.com (www.dogbizcoach.com) Check out her podcast: https://www.dogbizcoach.com/podcast (https://www.dogbizcoach.com/podcast) Find her on Facebook: http://www.facebook.com/erinmoorebel (www.facebook.com/erinmoorebel)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you looking for inspiration for ideas for your pet business this summer? The hot weather presents so many content and media opportunities. From safety messages pet parents need to hear over and over again about not leaving their dogs in cars, to fun games and products pets can enjoy. Having your content planned out means you can be consistent with marketing for your social media, newsletter, email marketing and press pitches. Then you’re front of mind for your existing customers, plus if you’re pitching to the press, you’re attracting new ones too. In this podcast episode you’ll find loads of profile raising ideas for the summer months, covering July, August and September. Plus learn how we can work together on your ideas with a special workshop and consultancy call offer too. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.22 - the summer bundle and how we can work together. 3.43 - Why plan your summer content for your pet business? 7.22 - Why create content for your pet business around the seasons? 10.00 - Key July dates for 2022 14.26 - Key August dates 18.39 - Key September dates 23.14 - How we can work together this summer Links mentioned in this episode: Buy the workshop and 1-1 bundle for £179 here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/yrk3wWnk (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/yrk3wWnk) Buy the workshop for £40 here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/XLt7qTda (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/XLt7qTda)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is getting in the press something a focus for you and your pet business? Perhaps you’re thinking of hiring a PR company to do this for you? Or considering learning how to do it yourself? If you see the value in being seen in newspapers, news websites, magazines, TV and on the radio and you have a pet business, my Get Your Pet Business in the Press is a way for you to learn how to go about it. In this podcast episode I'm sharing all you need to know if you're considering taking part. The next cohort begins in July 2022, so if you'd like to find out more, e mail me, rachel@publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.20 - Introduction to the episode. 2.20 - Who the programme is for. 4.20 - How getting in the press will make you feel. 5.00 - What kind of impact is it going to have on your business. 7.07 - What the options are if you want to get in the press. 9.10 - How being part of a group programme can benefit you and how it works. 10.50 - Is it the right time for you to be in the press. 12.17 - How the programme works. 15.16 - How much it costs. 16.20 - Why I do this programme rather than done for you PR. 22.25 - How being in the press can help you and why I believe it shouldn't just be for dog trainers on the telly and big brands. 23.02 - What to do if you'd like to come and join. Links mentioned in this episode: Read about the course on my website: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/is-my-get-your-pet-business-in-the-press-programme-right-for-you (https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/is-my-get-your-pet-business-in-the-press-programme-right-for-you) Click here to book a call: https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/discovery-calls (https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/discovery-calls) Sign up and pay in installments here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/GITPJune2022 (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/GITPJune2022) Hear from pet businesses who have done this and the impact it's had for them!https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/suzanne-gould-edinburgh-holistic-dogs/ (Suzanne Gould - from shy dog walker to trainer to the stars) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/julie-maxted-pr-success/ (Julie Maxted and how she secured 12 pieces of coverage for DogG8 in THREE MONTHS) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/karen-boyce/ (PR superstar Karen Boyce on winning 30 pieces of press in a year) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-kim-odonnell-went-from-invisible-to-global-pet-business/ (How Kim O'Donnell went from feeling invisible to selling her products worldwide) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/becky-baker-k9nation-app/ (How Becky Baker turned her puppy mum struggles into the K9Nation app) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/spotlight-katie-gwilt-the-kat-lady/ (In the spotlight with Katie Gwilt The Kat Lady) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/spotlight-niki-french/ (In the spotlight with Niki French from Puptalk) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/in-the-spotlight-sarah-jones-from-my-anxious-dog/ (In the spotlight with Sarah Jones from My Anxious Dog) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/spotlight-louise-humphrey/ (In the spotlight with Louise Humphreys from Paws4Running) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/spotlight-karen-rhodes-luxury-dog-hampers/ (In the spotlight with Karen Rhodes from Luxury Dog Hampers)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
What happens if your pet business goes VIRAL? Niki French from Puptalk knows all about it. Earlier this year she launched her first #Dontwalkyourdogday and it reached millions of people all over the world.. Niki, a dog trainer from Twickenham in London, is author of the book Stop Walking Your Dog and created the awareness day to shine the spotlight on her book. She pitched it to the press and her story was picked up by over a dozen outlets, leading to hundreds of thousands of posts and discussions on social media. Niki has featured in the Times, Mail on Sunday, Daily Express, Mirror, Sun, Daily Star, LadBible and on the radio and TV in Australia! In this episode, Niki shares her advice on how to put your pet business out there, the impact of being in the press and how to cope with being in the limelight. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.22 - How Niki became a dog trainer aged 50! 5.07 - Fulfilling her lifelong dream of having a dog when she adopted Bodie from Battersea. 10.04 - Starting out her new career as a dog walker and how this helped her develop as a trainer. 11.24 - Coping with the pandemic just a year after she started her business and how Niki was able to take her training online. 13.51 - Starting a membership to support her clients in lockdown and how she adapted to online. 17.54 - What helped Niki to grow her business fast. 19.19 - Niki's book Stop Walking Your Dog and how she came to write it. 22.31 - What inspired Niki's book and encouraged her to go against the grain and the impact writing it had on her business. 29.16 - Going viral with her awareness day, Don't walk your dog day on March 27th. 34.21 - How that led to selling 700 copies in just one month. 36.08 - Support Niki has had from other pet professionals. 40.01 - How her exposure has helped her slay imposter syndrome. 43.01 - The impact of consistent press coverage on her business. 45.17 - Niki's PR tips for pet businesses who want to approach the press. Links mentioned in this episode: Check out Niki's work and her podcast on her website: http://www.puptalk.co.uk (www.puptalk.co.uk) Buy her book: https://go.puptalk.co.uk/stopwalkingyourdog/ (https://go.puptalk.co.uk/stopwalkingyourdog/) Follow her on social media Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/puptalk101 (https://www.facebook.com/puptalk101) Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/puptalk101 (https://www.instagram.com/puptalk101) Twitter: https://twitter.com/puptalk101 (https://twitter.com/puptalk101) Tiktok: https://www.tiktok.com/@puptalk101 (https://www.tiktok.com/@puptalk101)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Can you get your pet business in the press for free? Yes you absolutely can. Would you love to see your pet business in your favourite magazine, your local newspaper, or to be invited to talk on the radio or even the telly? So you can reach more of the pet parents who need what you offer, make an impact and more sales too? Learn how to Get Your Pet Business in the Press in this free five day challenge that has seen hundreds of pet businesses land awesome media coverage. Getting in the press isn’t just for big brands and TV dog trainers, you can do it too with simple steps to follow each day of the challenge. You’ll walk away with a plan you can follow over and over again each time you want to contact a journalist about a story about your pet business. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.23 - Four reasons why getting in the press can help you. 5.55 - What are your options if you want to get in the press? 7.32 - Having accountability with pitching to the press and how the support in the group can help you. 8.48 - How the challenge works. 10.24 - Free resources you can use if you’ve missed the June challenge - my Press Release Template and Five Steps to Get In the Press ebook. 13.57 - What kind of results can you expect from joining. 16.35 - Why I help people get in the press for free. Links mentioned in this episode: Join the next Get Your Pet Business in the Press challenge: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge) Download my free Press Release Template and Five steps to get in the press guide: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/freebies/ (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/freebies/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
What would you do if someone copied your pet business? That’s what happened to Debbie Humphreys from Redhound for Dogs, not once but TWICE. The first time was a department store who copied knitting kits she’d made for dog jumpers. The second was someone who ripped off her entire product, buying her designs, and using the exact pattern. In this episode Debbie shares what it’s like to find out you’ve been copied, and how to take action to protect yourself. She talks about the emotional impact and what she’s doing to take on the copycats, campaigning to the Government to support businesses. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.24 - Introduction to Debbie and her pet business. 2.30 - Debbie's first experience of copying. 7.06 - How she took action and had the copying by a HUGE department store stopped. 12.02 - What happened when her designs for coats were spotted on Etsy. 13.09 - Taking action and getting abuse from the person who copied her. 17.04 - The legalities around copying. 21.55 - How the copying has affected Debbie emotionally. 26.10 - Why the copycats will never win. 27.39 - Her thoughts on why people copy and how it's been made acceptable. 34.06 - Debbie's advice for any pet businesses who want to protect their work. 42.24 - How Debbie is calling for the Government to do more. 43.32 - What's next for Debbie and where to find out more. Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about Debbie’s work: https://www.redhoundfordogs.com/ (https://www.redhoundfordogs.com/) Follow her on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/redhoundfordogs/ Join the Redhounders Facebook Community: https://www.facebook.com/groups/2912568292301801 (https://www.facebook.com/groups/2912568292301801) Learn more about copying and protecting your business on the Anti Copying in Design Website: https://www.acid.uk.com/ (https://www.acid.uk.com/) Debbie also recommends the Make it British community: https://makeitbritish.co.uk/ (https://makeitbritish.co.uk/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to feel comfortable and confident when you send an e mail out to your subscribers? And not worry about being ‘annoying’ or ‘pushy’ because you know they’ll be so chuffed seeing your name pop up in their inbox? If so, you’re going to love this chat with the brilliant Rob and Kennedy from Email Marketing Heroes. Sending e mails can be stressful and overwhelming at first but it doesn’t need to be. These guys will show you how to put your big girl or big boy pants on and just hit send on your e mails over and over again. Discover what to include in your messages and how to come up with ideas to bring you closer to your audience with ease. And most importantly, how email marketing can make you between 10 to 50 times more sales than social media. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.50 - Rob and Kennedy and their background as a hypnotist (Rob) and a mind reader (Kennedy). 4.00 - How they stand out from the crowd of other email marketing experts. 5.51 - How pet businesses can harness emotional connection in communicating via email. 8.17 - How pet businesses can build a subscriber list. 13.41 - Tips for pet businesses who feel they can’t send emails. 16.59 - How frequently should you be emailing your list. 21.03 - What structure to follow when writing your emails. 29.38 - How many words your emails should be. 31.14 - Advice for repurposing content. 35.22 - Where you can find content for your mailing list. 38.29 - Where you can find more about Rob and Kennedy and their free Click Tricks resource Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about Rob and Kennedy: https://www.emailmarketingheroes.com/about/ (https://www.emailmarketingheroes.com/about/) Join their free Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/498160730852208 (https://www.facebook.com/groups/498160730852208) Download Click Tricks here: https://emailmarketingheroes.com/publicity (https://emailmarketingheroes.com/publicity)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of starting a pet blog or a blog for your pet business? Having a blog gives you a creative outlet to share whatever you like, whether it’s showing off your pet or putting something you feel passionate in the spotlight. It’s a platform you control, where you’re not at the mercy of ever changing social platform trends and algorthityms. Particularly with the changes happening on social media right now where you might feel like you don't know if you're coming or going! You can publish what you want, when you want and it’s your own little part of the internet where you can express yourself. It might be that you want to start a pet blog, or a blog for your pet business, and in this this episode will show you how. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.40 - My background starting out as a blogger and featuring in the Vuelio Top 10 Pet blogs for five years running. 3.20 - Why I started a blog in 2017. 8.20 - How having a blog inspired me to write a book Publicity for Pet Businesses which led to a Facebook community, a course, a podcast, and a membership. 9.50 - What it’s like to lose your pet when you write a blog about them. 10.50 - Getting started, choosing a name, deciding what your blog will be about, choosing a domain name, hosting, building a website, creating your key pages on your website. 11.50 - Consider using a professional for all the above, particularly branding and logo. 12.20 - Choosing your social media account names and platforms and setting up your email platform. 14.10 - Deciding on topics for your blog. 16.26 - How often will you share content? 18.55 - Monetising your blog. 22.00 - Recommendations for people to help you if you’re starting a blog. (See links) 22.32 - Having a blog for your pet service business, ideas for content and how to use your content to help your clients. 26.39 - Having a blog for your product business, ideas for content and how to use your content to help your clients. 32.04 - Seven awesome things about having a blog. 34.24 - Book recommendations for blogging. Links mentioned in this episode: The Vuelio Top 10 UK Pet Blogs: https://www.vuelio.com/uk/social-media-index/pet-blogs-uk-top-10/ (https://www.vuelio.com/uk/social-media-index/pet-blogs-uk-top-10/) How Vuelio decides on their rankings: https://www.vuelio.com/uk/blog/how-does-vuelio-decide-its-top-10-blog-ranking/ (https://www.vuelio.com/uk/blog/how-does-vuelio-decide-its-top-10-blog-ranking/) Alison from https://www.houseofhenry.uk/ (House of Henry) graphic design: Rosie at https://www.wufdesign.co.uk/ (Wuf Design) (who does this website): Roz and Sophy at Beech Web Services who look after my pet blog: https://www.beechwebservices.co.uk/ (https://www.beechwebservices.co.uk/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Promoting your business can feel like a full time job along with creating your product or delivering your service. And imagine what it might be like if you had TWO businesses to think about? This week’s podcast guest is Louise Humphrey from Paws4Running and Studio 44 Pilates and that’s exactly what she does. Two sets of social media, newsletter subscribers, websites and communities, plus a podcast and lots more. Louise takes it all in her stride and in this episode we chat about how she juggles this, and the impact of raising her profile on both of her businesses. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.20 - What it's like having to promote TWO businesses and what you'll learn in this episode. 1.40 - About Louise and what she does in the pet industry. 2.45 - Louise tells me about her podcast. 3:00 - Louise explains how she ended up in the pet industry 5:30 - Louise shares how her business works 7:45 - Louise tells me how she gets the word out about her pet business 12:00 - Louise shares about the case studies she’s had 15.20 - Louise tells me how getting press coverage has impacted her business 19.00 - Louise shares the other opportunities she’s had recently for her pet business 21.00 - Louise tells me what’s helped with her confidence when approaching the press 25.15 - Louise gives me her tips for people who want to make a start with speaking to the press Links mentioned in this episode: Learn about Louise and Canicross: http://www.paws4running.co.uk/ (www.paws4running.co.uk) Find out about her Pilates business: https://studio44pilates.com/ (www.studio44pilates.com) Tune in to her Canicross podcast: https://www.canicrossconversations.co.uk/ (www.canicrossconversations.co.uk)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
In this episode I'm talking about a topic that comes up a lot. Why I DON'T do done for you PR. Deciding to set up a coaching business rather than offering done for you PR has meant it has taken me a LOT longer to be able to bring in enough income to have this as my sole revenue stream. And it is still a work in progress. In this episode I'm talking about why I made this decision, and how learning to do your own PR can empower you as a small business owner. Plus, how you can work with me and learn to do your own PR too. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.20 - Introduction to the episode and the topic of why I chose to offer coaching instead of done for you PR. 0.56 - How my coaching business happened by accident. 2.55 - Making the decision to show people how to get PR themselves. 4.39 - My PR experience at Marco Richards in Manchester. 5.18 - Doing done for you PR as a freelance for small businesses and a pet sitting app. 5.46 - Writing my book and deciding to offer coaching. 6.41 - Reason Number 1 - I didn’t feel comfortable charging lots of money for something I couldn’t guarantee and how meeting a couple who spent their savings on PR shaped my decision to offer coaching. 8.08 - WHY PR companies charge so much. 9.22 - What happens if a news event kicks your story out of the paper. 10.26 - Reason Number 2 - I’m passionate about supporting small businesses who don’t have huge budgets. 12.49 - Reason Number 3 - I can be honest about whether people have a story. 15.06 - Reason Number 4 - Because I don’t have to get rejected over and over again. 17.16 - Reason Number 5 - Journalists would rather speak to the person directly. 18.59 - How PR is like training a puppy. Done for you is where the pup lives with the trainer and they pick up the poo and make them look lovely. Coaching is where you learn to do it yourself. 21.08 - The five reasons recap and conclusion. 21.46 - Why learning to do your own PR will give you skills for the rest of your life. Links mentioned in this episode: Get regular tips by signing up to my newsletter: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Optin (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Optin) Book a call to discuss coaching for your pet business: https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/discovery-calls (https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/discovery-calls) Come and join my Free Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses) Learn about Kim at Leo, Charley and Me: https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/ (https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/) Learn about Louise at Paws4Running and Studio44 pilates: https://studio44pilates.com/ (https://studio44pilates.com/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is improving your Instagram on your to-do list? Then you will LOVE this episode with Helen Perry from the ‘Just Bloody Post It’ podcast. Helen has grown a huge, engaged following on the platform and shows how small businesses can do the same on her own Instagram account, her podcast and online courses and workshops. In this chat, Helen shares loads of brilliant marketing advice that can be applied no matter what platform you’re on! And as a former BBC Radio One journalist, she gives some bonus tips if you want to be on the radio too. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.41 - About Helen and her background 5.03 - Helen explains how she ended up niching in Instagram 7.04 - Helen shares how responding to comments helped her understand what her audience wants and how pet businesses can do the same 10.12 - How what’s going on in the news can change what products / services you’re selling and your marketing approach 12.49 - Helen shares a simple overview of how Instagram works 16.05 - Helen explains why community and relationships are the forefront of Instagram 18.15 - Why Instagram is about having conversations and understanding people 22.07 - Helen shares why it’s important to tell people what you do and put yourself out there 24.05 - Helen explains how you can start off creating content even if you’re shy 26.01 - Why Instagram works differently for all people and pet businesses 29.34 - Helen shares how to use hashtags and find people in your community 31.52 - What tools you can use on Instagram to find out what’s working 35.51 - Why Instagram is a place where pet businesses can thrive 38.47 - Helen gives her tips for using Instagram 40.56 - What to do if your pet business gets on the radio 45.30 - Where to find out more about Helen Links mentioned in this episode: Helen has a new course out now called Newsletter Launchpad and it’s on offer for £99 until 1st June. Use the code EARLYLAUNCHPAD to get £50 off. Here’s the link: https://www.helen-perry.co.uk/newsletter-launchpad/%C2%A0 (https://www.helen-perry.co.uk/newsletter-launchpad/ ) https://www.instagram.com/_helen_perry_/ (Instagram @_helen_perry_) https://www.helen-perry.co.uk/the-just-bloody-post-it-podcast/ (The-just-bloody-post-it-podcast) After speaking to Helen I wanted to share some of the pet business accounts I follow for you to go and check out: https://www.instagram.com/maherandhounddogtraining/ (Karen Maher from Maher and Hound @maherandhounddogtraining) https://instagram.com/frankysbowtique/ (Kerry Whitney from Frankys Bowtique @FrankysBowtique ) https://www.instagram.com/k_thekatlady/ (Katie the Kat Lady @K_thekatlady) https://www.instagram.com/scruffylittleterrier/ (Michelle at Scruffy Little Terrier @scruffylittleterrier ) https://www.instagram.com/blackwhite.gold/ (Liz Gregg from Black White Gold @Blackwhite.gold)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to feel more bold when it comes to sharing what you do in your pet business? This week I’ve been doing a Be Bold Bootcamp five day challenge working with people who want to do this. Who know they have an awesome product or service that is really going to make a difference for pet parents. Who want to share the value they bring to pets and pet parents and do it in a way that feels right for them. Often we can feel nervous, and worry what people might think when we talking about what we do. And when we’re so busy in our business, it can be difficult to step out and articulate what makes us special. That’s what the challenge has been about, being able to be bold and be proud about talking about our work. The next step is the Be Bold group programme, which is a coaching programme going through the steps to follow to be bold and be more visible. If you feel like you’re stuck in a hole and you want to be seen and heard and get a framework to follow and support, this programme is for you. In this podcast I'm sharing everything you need to know if you're thinking of taking part. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.50 - Where the whole Be Bold thing came from in the first place - thanks Anna Webb! 1.44 - The next step after the free training for anyone who wants to continue working on being bold and being supported. 2.45 - What the coaching programme is. 3.19 - Who the Be Bold programme is for. 6.19 - Who it is not for - anyone who is into negative marketing. 7.12 - What’s the transformation? 8.57 - My background and experience and how this can help you be bold. 10.05 - Why it took me so long to be bold. 12.52 - What’s included in the programme and the four modules. The fear of being visible Your pet business message The best way to get your message to your ideal community How to be bold and stay bold.
20.28 - The Be Bold interviews with Sarah Jones, Niki French, Kerry Whitney and Nadia Leguel which are part of the course to inspire you. 24.09 - How much is the investment (£197 early bird/£247 or a payment plan of £99 a month for two months/£125 for two months) 25.46 - Where to learn more http://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/beboldbootcamp (www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/beboldbootcamp) Links mentioned in this episode: Sign up to the programme https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/beboldbootcamp (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/beboldbootcamp)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
In just four years Stephanie Zikmann has gone from being a local dog groomer to an authority worldwide as The Holistic Dog Groomer. She’s written a book that led to a series of children’s books, has a regular column in Edition Dog magazine, runs the Holistic Grooming Academy and has spoken at events all over the world. Stephanie’s passion is the emotional and physical needs of her canine clients, bringing pet professionals from all backgrounds together to make their lives better. She’s revolutionised grooming and through her academy she’s changed the lives of hundreds of groomers and how thousands of dogs are cared for. By being bold and putting opinions out there that not everyone agrees with has meant Stephanie has seen the dark side of what happens when you’re in the public eye. After sharing her thoughts on Pooch Perfect, she experienced death threats which caused huge distress. Stephanie took time out, built herself up and bounced back much stronger. Now she incorporates the emotional toolkit she built for herself into her training to support her students. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.28 - Who Stephanie is and what she does. 2.15 - Stephanie talks about how she got into the pet industry. 3.25 - What life is like living with four dogs including two Tibetan Mastiffs! 5.09 - Stephanie explains what holistic dog grooming is. 7.22 - How Stephanie developed her holistic dog grooming education and business. 10.45 - The holistic grooming approach. 14.11 - What steps Stephanie took to get her business out there. 18.48 - We talk about Stepahnie’s book, the Magic of Holistic Grooming. 20.21 - How her community has helped to boost Stephanie's business. 23.16 - The impact media opportunities have had on Stephanie’s business. 25.31 - How Stephanie started the coaching programme that's now helped people all over the world. 29.35 - Stephanie's advice for overcoming challenges from other people who have different opinions. 31.26 - What happened when Stephanie shared an opinion about Pooch Perfect and was attacked online. 35.14 - How Stephanie picked herself up. 37.45 - She shares how self employed people can overcome the highs and lows and build resilience. 44.53 - What’s next for Stephanie? 46.33 - Where to find out more about Stephanie and the Holistic Grooming Academy. Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about Stephanie at https://www.stephaniezikmann.com/ (https://www.stephaniezikmann.com/) Learn about Holistic Grooming at https://courses.holisticgroomingacademy.com/ (https://courses.holisticgroomingacademy.com/) Read Stephanie’s article in Entrepreneur: https://www.entrepreneur.com/article/380502 (https://www.entrepreneur.com/article/380502) Check out her profile on the Edition Dog website: https://editiondog.com/pages/stephanie-zikmann (https://editiondog.com/pages/stephanie-zikmann)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to be more bold when it comes to promoting your pet business? Perhaps you’ve felt frustrated because people less experienced or qualified than you, or who use outdated and questionable methods are everywhere? Or if you’ve a product, you might feel invisible while competitors are sharing endless posts about how they’re ‘smashing it.’ If you can relate, I imagine it’s not that these people or products are in any way superior. More likely the people behind them are more bold, and it’s the voices that shout the loudest who get heard. In this podcast episode I’m talking about five things that can stand in the way of your being bold in your pet business. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.20 - Why I’m being bold by talking about being bold. 1.15 - Working with pet businesses on telling their stories in my first online course in 2019, Create Content With Confidence. 2.20 - The Be Bold Bootcamp and how you can get support on putting yourself out there, what to expect and how to get involved. 3.15 - The dreaded words ‘Put yourself out there.’ 05.58 - Why being bold isn’t just for the BS-ers. Five things that can stand in the way of your being bold. 6.34 - 1. Feeling like you’re not able to put yourself out there. 10.35 - 2. Feeling unsure where to start. 13.20 - 3. What will people think? 19.21 - 4. What if people criticise me? 24.07 - 5. Thinking we need to be polished and perfect. 29.29 - Why even taking a leap of faith and setting up on your own is far more bold than you give yourself credit for. Links mentioned in this episode: If something big you’ve been wanting to do and you’d like some support, a bit of a nudge to do it and some accountability? If so, the Be Bold Bootcamp is for you and it's starting April 25th. Register for the https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/be-bold-bootcamp (Be Bold Bootcamp here) Read https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/pet-business-win-folder/ (Why every pet business should have a win folder) Read https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/deal-with-criticism-pet-professionals/ (How to deal with criticism from people in your industry). If you enjoyed this post, you might like to read https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-out-your-way-osmaan-sharif/ (Osmaan Sharif on how to get out your way and put your pet business out there) or https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/comparisonitis-pet-business-kate-hoyle/ (How to overcome comparisonitis with Kate Hoyle)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you looking to make more of an impact with your pet business? Would you love to elevate yourself as THE expert in your field or shine the spotlight on your pet products? Then you’re going to love my podcast with pet business marketing coach Dom Hodgson. We talk about how to make an impact with your pet business and Dom shares some really simple steps to follow to make this happen. Discover the different ways to get your service or products to stand out and what will make a difference when it comes to moving your pet business forward. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.02 - About Dom and what he does with pet business marketing 3.54 - Dom explains how he ended up in the pet industry 7.44 - How learning to do stuff for your own pet business is vital 13.20 - Dom explains what to do if you have a fear of selling 17.24 - Dom shares about his upcoming Impact pet business event 19.56 - Dom tells me what activities can make an impact for pet businesses 30.15 - Dom explains how pet businesses can keep the momentum 36.48 - How you won’t push away people by regularly keeping in contact over email 39.00 - The importance of keeping your own contacts and mailing lists 40.31 - Dom tells me what’s going on at Impact and what people can expect 47.01 - How to find Dom and more about the Impact event Links mentioned in this episode: Impact is taking place in Sunderland Friday 6th - Sunday 8th May. Grab your ticket at http://www.petbusinessmarketing.com/impact (www.petbusinessmarketing.com/impact)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Looking for ways to get publicity for your pet business as we go into Spring? Spring is in the air which means lighter mornings and evenings, no need to wrap up and some much needed sunshine. And we can spend more time outdoors enjoying life with our pets. After a dreary winter, it’s time to lift our spirits, and think of ways to connect with our customers and potential clients through our content. Whether it’s for your website, social media or a press campaign, there’s plenty of hooks and angles you can use. In this podcast episode are ideas to keep your product or service front of mind. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19 - Tips on how to plan your spring content 0.38 - World events and why we need to carry on marketing our pet businesses. 3.41 - How Kerry Whitney from Frankys Boutique, Hayley Bonwick from Handmade by Hayley and Sarah Mills from Albie’s Boutique are raising money for pets in Ukraine. 5.43 - The Underdog International appeal and how to donate. 6.16 - What spring means for your pet business content. 7.15 - Putting value Into your content. 8.54 - Content ideas based around the seasons. 11.25 - Planning around the Bank Holidays and the Queen’s Platinum Jubilee in June. 12.10 - Easter publicity ideas. 14.43 - Key awareness days for April, May and June. 27.51 - Why you should be bold and pitch to the press! 28.10 - My press release and awareness day bundles. Work with me If you’d like further support, perhaps you’re thinking of creating a campaign or would like to put together a press release, do get in touch. I’ve two new packages - a Press Release Bundle and an Awareness Day Bundle. With the Press Release Bundle, I help you write a press release, we find places to send it to, we find ways to repurpose it so you get maximum value. With the Awareness Day Bundle, I’ll show you how to put together an awareness day campaign, so we create a press release, and plan your social media, e mail marketing, website content and everything you need for your day. I've helped dozens of businesses create their Awareness Days and content to go with them, plus written hundreds of stories as a journalist about Awareness Days. Both packages are £497 and you can https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/work-with-me/ (book yours here.) Links mentioned in this episode: At the start of the episode I talked about three ladies who are supporting charities helping people and their pets in Ukraine following the Russian invasion in February 2022. They are Kerry, Hayley and Sarah and you can find out more on their websites. Visit Kerry Whitney’s Franky’s Bowtique here: https://www.frankysbowtique.com/ (https://www.frankysbowtique.com/) Visit Hayley Bonwick’s Handmade By Hayley here: https://www.handmadebyhayleyb.co.uk/ (https://www.handmadebyhayleyb.co.uk/) Visit Sarah Mills' Albie’s Boutique on Facebook here: https://www.facebook.com/albiesboutique/ (https://www.facebook.com/albiesboutique/) Donate to the Underdog International appeal here: https://www.justgiving.com/fundraising/rachelspencerpfpb (https://www.justgiving.com/fundraising/rachelspencerpfpb)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you seen news stories about awareness days and wondered how they come about? There are hundreds of awareness days taking place every week and you CAN use them as a way to get press coverage. As long as the awareness day relates to you and what you do, and you're able to create something relevant, you can use them to generate story ideas. In this podcast learn how to use key dates to pitch to the press and everything you need to make your campaign take off. It DOESN'T have to be your own awareness day. You can be your own PR and plan your own campaign and get tonnes of press. Learn how in this episode. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19 - How to keep in touch in the free Facebook group. 1.32 - Introduction to the episode and what awareness days are. 3.33 - Examples of the variety of awareness days. 5.23 - Having your own awareness day and examples Dogs In Yellow day on March 20th and National Terrier Day on March 27th. 6.11 - How Sarah secured 11 pieces of press in three days around her awareness day. 7.17 - Why you don’t have to have your own day. 9.20 - What makes a good awareness day campaign. 11.47 - Things to consider around creating an awareness day campaign. 13.22 - How to find dates to use. 14.20 - Examples of how existing awareness days can be used. 16.56 - Why it’s essential to plan ahead. 20.56 - How to maximise the impact of your day and carry on the conversation. 24.26 - Going the extra mile to make an impact. 25.02 - Repurposing your awareness day content to make it work hard for you. 26.07 - What to do to get journalists attention on the actual day. 27.09 - Measuring the success of your day. 30.30 - How to get support for your awareness day. (E. Mail me Rachel@publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk) Links mentioned in this episode: Click to read: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/dog-photographer-kerry-jordan-on-her-viral-national-dog-photography-day/ (How Kerry Jordan's National Dog Photography Day went viral) Learn more about Michelle Burgess from Scruffy Little Terrier's https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/national-terrier-day/ ( National Terrier Day) Learn more about Sarah Jones' https://www.bellascollars.co.uk/pages/national-dogsinyellow (Dogs In Yellow Day ) Check out planners online like https://www.awarenessdays.com/ (https://www.awarenessdays.com/) and on https://www.animalscharities.co.uk/ (www.animalscharities.co.uk/) This list from Sarah Jane White from https://www.rufflesnuffle.co.uk/the-best-list-of-pet-national-days-holidays-calendar/ (Ruffle Snuffle) is great and I also use https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/what-to-expect-from-the-courageous-content-planner-and-live-event-with-janet-murray/ (Janet Murray’s Courageous Content planner.) Find out more about Caroline the Slim Pet Vet here: https://www.facebook.com/DrCaroline.Vet (https://www.facebook.com/DrCaroline.Vet) Hire a copywriter if you’re feeling overwhelmed like https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/rikkisullivan/ (Rikki Sullivan at The Canine Copywriter.) Alison Price can help with graphic design at https://www.houseofhenry.uk/ (https://www.houseofhenry.uk/) And Rosie Robinson with websites at https://www.wufdesign.co.uk/ (https://www.wufdesign.co.uk/) If you enjoyed this episode, you might like https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/in-the-spotlight-sarah-jones-from-my-anxious-dog/ (In the spotlight with Sarah Jones from My Anxious Dog) or https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-create-an-awareness-day-with-kerry-jordan/ (Kerry Jordan on how to create your own awareness day. )
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you have an anxious dog and get frustrated when other dogs approach them, jump on them and stress them out? When owners say, 'It's ok, they're friendly,' or, 'They just want to play,' or 'They need telling off.' If so, Sarah Jones' story is one you will want to hear. When her Cocker Spaniel Bella became anxious and reactive, Sarah went on a mission not just to help her own dog but thousands of others and their owners. She set up My Anxious Dog, creating products ranging from stickers to go on wheeliebins to hoodies, harnesses and leads. Emblazoned with the words Anxious and Keep Away, Sarah's products spell it out loud and clear that anxious dogs need space. This weekend, Sunday March 20th 2022, she's launching the first National Dogs In Yellow day to spread the message far and wide. Her mission is for people to have consideration for others and take the stress away for anxious dogs and their pet parents. In this episode, you can learn all about Sarah and her work with My Anxious Dog. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.00 - Introduction to Sarah and how she found herself running a pet business. 2.40 - How did Sarah come to settle on My Anxious Dog. 4.05 - How Sarah discovered Bella was anxious. 7.25 - Where Sarah heard about dogs wearing yellow and discovered it was a way to tell people Bella was anxious. 9.10 - How her business first started with her putting stickers on bins. 11.05 - She shares how her business grew from this to creating products and much more. 15.22 - What’s been the ripple effect for other anxious dogs and their owners. 20.51 - Why Sarah created her yellow army and community of other anxious dog owners. 26.15 - What has worked for Sarah best when it comes to reaching people far and wide? 27.05 - How working on raising her profile in the press has helped Sarah with her mission on getting dogs in yellow out there. 34:00 - Sarah shares the press coverage that she’s had for My Anxious Dog. 41.03 - Sarah’s advice to newcomers in the pet industry. 37.55 - She shares the comparisons from her previous role in electronics to working in the pet industry. 43.50 - Sarah’s National Dogs In Yellow Day and her goals for March 20th. 46.15 - Where to find out more about Sarah and My Anxious Dog. Links mentioned in this episode: Visit Sarah's website: https://www.bellascollars.co.uk/ (www.myanxiousdog.co.uk) Follow My Anxious Dog on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/myanxiousdog (https://www.facebook.com/myanxiousdog) Join the Yellow Army Facebook Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/215979409295118 (https://www.facebook.com/groups/215979409295118)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Looking to raise the profile of your pet business by entering Theo Paphitis’ Small Business Sunday? It’s a community award where you get the paws up from the multi-millionaire entrepreneur and star of BBC’s Dragon’s Den. It is amazing for your pet business profile, a brilliant and super easy way to get press coverage, and you become part of Theo’s supportive community too. Last month, February 2022, was the Small Business Sunday Winner’s Event in Birmingham where Theo celebrated the people who toil away. And on February 14th 2022, after 12 attempts, I was picked as a SBS winner! So this podcast is all about the impact it has. As well as hints and tips, you’ll hear from SBS superstar Kim O’Donnell about how it’s helped her pet accessory business, Leo, Charley and Me. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.21 - Introduction to what SBS is and how can it help your pet business. 21.54 - How Twitter helped Kim win SBS and the first results she started to see 25.06 - The press coverage that Kim received from SBS 27.34 - How Kim won a place at Theo’s Autumn fair 33.36 - What the show did for Kim’s business - how she made a quarter of her annual profit in just two days 36.01 - How Kim got over her imposter syndrome at the wholesale fair 37.15 - What it was like for Kim to meet Theo 42.15 - Advice from Kim on taking part in SBS Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about taking part, https://www.theopaphitissbs.com/ (https://www.theopaphitissbs.com/) Learn more about Kim on her website, https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/ (https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you ever thought about approaching large retailers like John Lewis or Pets at Home to work with you? In this podcast episode I'm speaking to Chris Costello from Product Guru about how you can do this through their pet huddles. The Pet Huddle takes place in Birmingham on March 31st and there are a few spaces remaining. It's a recording from an interview in my Facebook group, and you can watch the live here. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19 - What Product Guru is and what to expect from this episode. 1.59 - Chris explains who he is and what Product Guru is. 3.13 - The various ways you can use Product Guru from a free listing to pitching live at their events. 4.26 - What to expect from the Pet Huddle event on March 31st. 6.54. - The three different ways products can pitch to retailers at the event. 8.42 - How the round table process works. 10.17 - How the virtual pitch works. 11.29 - How the sampling box works. 12.36 - The range of brands taking part. 14.43 - How the huddles have worked for other types of brands including how one small business landed a spot in Harrods and Selfridges. 19.24 - Pricing for the three options. 21.48 - Question and Answer session. Links mentioned in this episode: Learn more about the Pet Huddles here: https://www.productguru.co.uk/huddles-events/pet (https://www.productguru.co.uk/huddles-events/pet)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you ever suffered from comparisonitis? You might have found yourself looking at other pet businesses or in a similar space and thinking ‘oh my gosh they do so much more than me?’ Fretting as you see them chat about their waiting list, client base, even their media wins, and spiral yourself into self-doubt? Whilst it’s healthy to be inspired by others, comparisonitis can have a huge impact on self-esteem. That’s why this week I’m talking to therapist Kate Hoyle. She deals with lots of people who struggle with comparing themselves, we talk about what it is, how to spot it and simple steps you can follow to nip it in the bud and feel good about yourself! Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.56 - About Kate and how she used hypnotherapy to support clients. 5.05 - Kate explains what comparisonitis is. 8.45 - How we become affected by comparisonitis through social media. 12.26 - Why it's hard it is not to compare yourself to others when you're feeling low. 16.20 - Kate shares how comparisonitis can be used in a positive way. 17.24 - Why studying can sometimes be a form of procrastination. 21.34 - What lessons we can learn from our dogs. 24.06 - Kate explains how when we compare ourselves, we lose track of our own uniqueness. 28.30 - The importance of not letting opinions get you down and doing your own thing with your business. 32.10 - Kate shares practical steps to stop comparing your business and yourself to others. 38.25 - How to find Kate online and social media. Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about Kate on her website: www.katehoylehypnotherapy.com
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you looking to invest in training in your pet business but feel unsure about what's right for you? There is so much information out there when it comes to ways to grow your business. From learning practical skills and theory to help you deliver your service or create your product. To thousands of marketing and social media experts, plus tech, coaching and much more. And where do you start? The free content, paid for programmes or one to one, or a mix of all three? In this podcast episode I'm chatting about the difference between the options, plus my own experiences and what has helped to start and grow my business. Plus case studies and recommendations too. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.11 - What to do if you think you would like to work together one to one. 2.12 - How the internet means we can learn pretty much anything for FREE! 2.31 - How I first started learning online and why I decided to pay for a programme. 3.57 - Examples of free content and membership models in the fitness industry. 6.05 - Why I invested in my own business and what the impact of that was. 11.50 - How free content works. 15.51 - How paid for courses and group programmes work. 17.45 - How free content can lead people into your paid programmes. 21.25 - How one to one coaching and mentoring works. 23.16 - Information on my one to one packages. 25.15 - Feedback from current clients on the difference between one to one and free content. 26.45 - Advice on using free content to get a feel of the person you’re thinking of investing with. 29.14 - What to do if you’d like to chat, e mail Rachel@rachelspencerwrites.com or find me on social media. Links mentioned in this episode: Book in a free https://calendly.com/rachelspenceruk/friday-drop-in (15 minute call here). Find out more about Janet Murray on her https://janetmurray.co.uk/ (website here) Find out more about Helen Perry https://www.helen-perry.co.uk/work-with-me/ (here)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Katie Gwilt is founder of The Kat Lady and in this episode she shares how she set up her business as a holistic cat groomer and behaviourist. Katie always loved cats, and found herself running her dream business of working with her feline friends after a terrifying experience with her health. After taking time to recover, she set her heart on supporting cats and their humans, helping cats in need and discovering ways to make their lives happy and healthy. Katie is such an inspiring lady and is doing incredible things in the cat caring space and it is so exciting to be able to share them with you in this In The Spotlight episode. Learn how she overcame her health problems and several rounds of surgery to pursue her dream of working with cats and how she's set to help others do the same. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.02 - Katie’s background and role in the pet industry. 3.21 - How Katie found her way to becoming the Kat Lady via a terrifying collapsed and years of health problems and surgery. 10.15 - How Katie’s business grew from cat sitter to holistic therapist and much much more. 16.35 - Getting the word out about The Kat Lady. 20.21 - Blogging and how it’s helped Katie grow her business - especially on LinkedIn. 23.52 - How Katie overcomes imposter syndrome. 25.53 - Featuring in Your Cat and landing an amazing opportunity with the iPet network. 28.17 - What the Grooming Academy will mean for Katie’s business. 32.02 - Katie’s passion for education when it comes to cat care. 34.09 - Where to find out more about Katie. Links mentioned in this episode: Visit Katie's Website: https://thekatlady.co.uk/ (https://thekatlady.co.uk/) Read Barry's story on https://thekatlady.co.uk/the-kat-lady-blog-1/f/how-cat-rescue-centres-can-help---barry?blogcategory=Cat%2FPersonal+Stories (Katie's website here). Follow https://www.linkedin.com/katie-gwilt (Katie on LinkedIn) Follow https://www.facebook.com/kthekatlady (Katie on Facebook) Follow https://www.instagram.com/k_thekatlady/ (Katie on Instagram)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Crufts is back for 2022 after a two year break and if you’re involved, this is a chance to get some press coverage. If you’re there showing a dog, taking part in Scruffts, joining in the dog sports or showcasing your product you can pitch to the press about it. In this podcast episode I’m sharing how to get press coverage from Crufts. And if you’d like to get a little more support or ask any questions around using Crufts as a media opportunity, I have a free workshop you can attend too. It’s taking place on February 17th at 4pm on Zoom and https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Crufts2022 (you can register here). Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.18 - Intro and why Crufts is a brilliant media opportunity. 1.28 - Details of the free Crufts workshop taking place on February 17th at 4pm. 2.17 - This year’s Crufts and how it’s back with a bang after a two year break, with 150,000 people and 27,000 dogs expected. 3.39 - How to use Crufts to get local press coverage. 3.56 - Case studies Claire Lawrence and Karen Boyce. 6.11 - How to get press in Trade titles and the kind of stories they might use, anniversaries and new product launches. 9.42 - Winning national press from Crufts and the kind of stories journalists are looking for. 12.41 - Human interest story case study of Kratu the rescue dog. 16.09 - How to use press to amplify the reach you have from being at Crufts. 17.33 - How to download my free resources - five steps to get in the press and press release template. 18.42 - Get in touch if you’re there and I can come and say hi! Links mentioned in this episode: The Crufts workshop is on February 17th at 4pm on Zoom and https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Crufts2022 (you can register here). https://www.leaderlive.co.uk/news/18338390.wrexham-dog-trainer-celebrates-win-worlds-biggest-dog-show/ (Read Karen's Crufts win story here. ) https://www.buxtonadvertiser.co.uk/news/tideswell-dog-charmer-wins-third-first-row-crufts-73898 (Read Claire's Crufts win story here.) Read about Nature’s Menu in Pet Gazette here: https://www.petgazette.biz/23537-natures-menu-unveils-poo-bag-sculpture/ (https://www.petgazette.biz/23537-natures-menu-unveils-poo-bag-sculpture/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Dragon's Den fans - this episode is for YOU! Have you ever watched the show and wondered what it would be like to go before the Dragons on the BBC 1 series? Well this week's podcast guest did - and got investment. Debbie Greaves from Barking Bags wowed Sara Davies and secured a £35,000 investment in her dog walking bags. She held her own in the Den, even when newbie Steven Bartlett scoffed at her bags for being 'unfashionable' and 'not for millennials.' Debbie hit back, and even suggested the social media guru met up with her daughter after the show. In this episode Debbie lifts the lid on what it's really like in the Den and her advice for any petpreneur considering it. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.10 - Debbie shares what led her to start her walking bag business. 3.05 - Debbie explains how the first version of her bag came from a trip to Oxfam and a shocked woman in her local park inspired her to create a 'proper bag.' 5.38 - How Debbie partnered with Nottingham Uni students in creating the bags. 8.25 - Growing the business from a hobby to selling out at Discover Dogs. 8.55 - How she got the word out when she first started out. 12.40 - Examples of the feedback Debbie gets from her superfans. 15.57 - Why millennials LOVE Barking Bags, even if Steven Bartlett doesn't. 17.55 - How she ended up on the TV and the process to getting there. 27.27 - What it's like to get out of the lift on Dragon’s Den and go before the Dragons. 32.15 - Why Debbie wasn't nervous in front of the panel. 35.43 - Debbie shares how she felt initially, her reaction to finding out she was going to be on TV and the rollercoaster of being in the process. 38.55 - What happens after the Dragon’s invest in your business. 41.30 - Why Debbie thought Deborah Meadon would invest and how she felt when Sara said yes. 46.18 - How pet businesses can work with Debbie and Barking Bags. 52.30 - Debbie’s advice to anyone wanting to go on Dragon’s Den. 55.00 - Where to find out more about Debbie and Barking Bags. Links mentioned in this episode: Debbie's website: https://barkingbags.co.uk/collections/all (www.BarkingBags.co.uk) Debbie on the Metro website: https://metro.co.uk/2022/01/27/dragons-den-hopeful-tries-to-set-steven-bartlett-up-with-daughter-16003288/ (https://metro.co.uk/2022/01/27/dragons-den-hopeful-tries-to-set-steven-bartlett-up-with-daughter-16003288/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Did you know that it's possible to use Twitter to get amazing press coverage in huge titles? Like the Metro, the Telegraph, the Daily Mail, Your Dog magazine, Psychologies, huge websites like Yahoo and Buzzfeed and Unilad. And the everyday journalists are on there looking to hear from people like YOU who run small businesses. People who might want to talk about their experiences, or share expert insights, or talk about that product or service. If you're not using Twitter, and I don't want this to sound like I'm telling you what to do or what you must be doing… But you are missing a trick if you want to get press coverage. In this podcast episode where I'm talking all about Twitter. You'll learn why it's important to be on there, how to connect with journalists, how to give them what they want, how to build relationships, so you can become their go to person. Plus loads of little Twitter tricks that you can use to land brilliant press coverage in 10 minutes a day. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19 - Come and join my free https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (Facebook group here) if you have any questions about Twitter. 1.32 - Intro to the podcast and why I'm talking about Twitter. 2.46 - Why if you're looking for press coverage you should consider going on Twitter. 3.44 - Statistics on the active users on Twitter Facebook, YouTube, Whatsapp and Instagram. 4.55 - Using Twitter to find out what's going on in the news and how 48% of Twitter users say that's why they use the platform. 6.12 - Why pet businesses should be on Twitter and examples of case studies I've found and written stories about the pet industry from Twitter. 8.42 - Why Twitter is the platform to connect with journalists because that's where they're working all the time. 11.38 - How to go about building relationships with journalists on Twitter. 12.53 - Case study Kerry Jordan and how she landed coverage in the times after building relationships with journalists on Twitter. 16.10 - How to use it in a really effective way in just 10 minutes a day by using the #journorequest. 18.29 - Case studies of pet businesses who have used Twitter and landed brilliant press coverage. 22.55 - Final Thoughts on Twitter and how if you behave like a nice person on there, you will reap the rewards. Links mentioned in this episode: Join the https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (Publicity for Pet Businesses Facebook Group.) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/press-coverage-facebook-groups/ (How to use Facebook groups to get press coverage with Jill Foster) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/using-a-pr-versus-learning-how-to-get-publicity/ (Using a PR company versus learning how to do your own publicity. ) Karen Rhodes from https://luxurydoghampers.co.uk/ (Luxury Dog Hampers) has featured in The Times, Dogs Monthly and Metro. Kim O'Donnell from https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/ (Leo, Charley and Me) pet accessories has secured coverage in Boots magazine and Good Housekeeping. Michelle Burgess from https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/ (Scruffy Little Terrier) has trended on Twitter for her National Terrier Day awareness day and had features in the Mail On Sunday, Business Insider and Woman magazine. Jo Milnes from https://distinctivepets.co.uk/pages/muddy-dog-day (Distinctive Pets) trended on Twitter for her Muddy Dog Day and won Theo Paphitis' SBS, a Twitter award which led to lots of coverage. Ali Smith from https://rebarkable.com/ (Rebarkable) used Twitter and was featured in Unilad, Eating Well and Spruce Pets. Louise Humphrey, a pilates and canicross instructor at https://studio44pilates.com/ (Studio44 Pilates) and Paws4Running says she built her community on there and found her podcast co-host on Twitter.
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable -...
Have you ever had a lightbulb moment and followed it through? This week on the podcast I'm speaking to Karen Rhodes from Luxury Dog Hampers and Suffolk Pet Services. Karen was watching a TV show about Fortnum and Mason three years ago and had a thought, 'I wonder if I could make this for dogs?' Rather than forgetting about it, she made it happen, and now runs the HUGELY successful Luxury Dog Hampers. She's been featured in GQ, the Times, Dogs Monthly, Your Dog, worked with influencers and sold so many hampers in lockdown she ran out of actual hampers. In this In the Spotlight episode she shares so much helpful information for any product business owner on building a brand from scratch and getting press coverage. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.18 - Introduction to the episode 2.37 - Karen’s background, starting as a dog walker when she stopped working as a foster parent. 4.37 - Taking a leap of faith to set up Luxury Dog Hampers after watching a show about Fortnum and Mason. 5.48 - How Karen got started with her pet business and how her senior dog Bailey helped her get the word out there. 9.32 - How Karen started out with approaching the press. 11.28 - Where Karen has been featured. 13.16 - The impact of getting in the press on her business. 15.26 - Keeping things simple in your marketing. 17.14 - Karen shares some of the angles she’s used for coverage. 20.55 - How Karen coped as a new business during the lockdown losing her dog Bailey but also seeing her business thrive. 25.05 - Refining and polishing her brand. 29.29 - Karen’s advice for new businesses. 32.43 - Why getting media coverage is worth the time and effort and the impact it’s had on Karen. 36.24 - Where to find out more about Luxury Dog Hampers. Links mentioned in this episode: Visit Karen's website: https://luxurydoghampers.co.uk/ (https://luxurydoghampers.co.uk/) Read about her in GQ: https://www.gq-magazine.co.uk/lifestyle/gallery/best-gifts-for-dog-lovers (https://www.gq-magazine.co.uk/lifestyle/gallery/best-gifts-for-dog-lovers) Follow her on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/luxurydoghampers/ (https://www.instagram.com/luxurydoghampers/) And on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/luxurydoghamper (https://www.facebook.com/luxurydoghamper)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to raise the profile of your pet business by being featured in the media? If so, taking part in the 12 week Get Your Pet Business in the Press programme will give you everything you need to find stories in your pet business and share them with journalists. In this podcast I'm sharing what to expect from taking part in the programme, how it works, plus interviews with three ladies who have completed the course. Dog trainer Jo Sellers, Karen Rhodes from Luxury Dog Hampers and Jo Milnes from Distincive Pets share the impact it's had on their businesses. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19 - Introduction to the episode and it being specifically about my programme. 1.36 - What the Get Your Pet Business in the Press programme is. 1.53 - My background in journalism. 4.03 - The different elements of the programme. 6.06 - How the live calls work. 7.55 - Jo Sellers interview. 17.20 - Details of the dates, times and sessions taking place over the 12 week programme. 23.19 - The membership community calls and how you will be supported by a group of pet businesses who have been through the course and are willing you to succeed, 24.43 - The members only podcast. 27.04 - Jo Milnes interview. 34.53 - Karen Rhodes interview. Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about the programme and save your place: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/GetInThePress (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/GetInThePress) Karen Rhodes website: https://luxurydoghampers.co.uk/ (https://luxurydoghampers.co.uk/) Jo Sellers website: https://www.pippinpetsdogtraining.co.uk/ (https://www.pippinpetsdogtraining.co.uk/) Jo Milnes website: https://distinctivepets.co.uk/ (https://distinctivepets.co.uk/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is getting on the radio one of your PR goals for your pet business? Being interviewed live is fantastic for giving people an insight into you as a pet professional but can be daunting too. Anna Webb is a seasoned BBC Radio presenter and a regular guest on shows like Jeremy Vine, Trisha and Alan Titchmarsh. She’s a dog trainer, canine nutritionist and co-hosts Barking At The Moon on BBC Radio London, and her own show, A Dog’s Life podcast. Anna explains how pet business owners can give fantastic radio interviews with tips on everything from getting rid of nerves to what kit you need. Plus what it’s like to go head to head with the Pope’s biographer in a debate over whether it’s selfish to have dogs and not children. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19 - Intro to the episode and what to expect 2.03 - Anna’s background and different skills. 3.46 - What to expect from Anna’s podcast. 7.26 - The kind of stories that appeal to Anna for her radio show. 13.05 - Who to contact when you’re pitching to radio shows. 15.38 - How to prepare for an interview. 20.31 - How to gather your thoughts to get your point across when your mind is spinning! 25.52 - What to do if a conversation goes in a direction you’re not happy with. 27.50 - How to know when to stop talking! 32.53 - How long the ideal answer is. 37.01 - Why it’s important to remember your ‘why’ when you’re on the radio and feel nervous. 38.01 - Ways to build rapport with hosts and presenters. 41.49 - Getting the right tone to engage listeners. 43.23 - The kit needed for radio interviews. 46.26. - Dos and Don’ts on the radio. 48.46 - Anna’s advice to pet brands who want to be on the radio - give it a go and have some humour. Links mentioned in this episode: Listen to Anna's podcast on her website: https://annawebb.co.uk/pages/podcasts (www.annawebb.co.uk) Tune in to Barking At The Moon on BBC Radio London on Thursday nights here: https://www.bbc.co.uk/sounds/play/live:bbc_london (https://www.bbc.co.uk/sounds/play/live:bbc_london) Follow Anna on social media @annawebbdogs on all platforms.
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of taking part in a five day challenge and want to make the most of the time you set aside? Free online challenges provide a brilliant way to learn something new in a short space of time, delivered by an expert. You can add to your skillset and experience what it’s like to work with the person hosting the challenge. If learning how to feature in the press is something you’d like to learn more about, then you’re just in time to join my free Get Your Pet Business in the Press challenge starting January 10th 2022. You can save your place by clicking https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (this link) and it would be great to see you there. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.01 - What happens in the Get Your Pet Business in the Press challenge 1.52 - Where people have had press coverage, Telegraph, Your Dog, Your Cat, Edition Dog, Dogs Today, Daily Mail, BBC Radio and much more. 2.24 - How the challenge led to sales for dog lead maker and dog walker Jesse Graves. Here are the five ways to make the most of being in the challenge. 4.27 - One - only take part in challenges that are relevant to you and what you do. 7.25. - Two - if you sign up for a challenge, commit to doing the work if you want to get a result. 11.21 - Three - take advantage of the time you have with the challenge host as you’d normally pay thousands for it! 13.27 - Four - Network like mad with the people in the group because they could turn into future customers and clients. 18.57 - Five - Think of the challenge as a PR opportunity and make an impression on everyone there. 22.47 - Why I have to be like the Demon Headmistress on the challenge and make sure people stick to the tasks. 26.16 - How to join the challenge. Links mentioned in this episode: Join the five day Get Your Pet Business in the Press challenge here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is getting some media coverage on your wish list for 2022? If so, then you will love what's in this podcast episode where I walk you through how to create a media plan for your pet business. You'll learn what to put into a media plan, how to come up with ideas consistently throughout the year, how long do you need to wait before you approach the media. Plus, what you can do with everything in your media plan to make sure that your social media and the content that you create on your own platforms is relevant and helps you make more sales in your business. And if you'd like more support, I have a workshop happening on January 5th at 1pm, where you can put your media plan together. It's £47 and e mail subscribers do get a discount. You can https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/L3a9mPHj (find out more here.) Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.31 - How to join in the workshop on January 5th if you'd like support. 2.25 - What a media plan is 3.52 - Why it's important to plan so far ahead 6.24 - Forward planning case study - Katie Gwilt The Kat Lady 8.57 - How to build up your media plan without it being totally overwhelming 10.24 - Examples of what to put in a media plan for dog trainers 13.23 - How to decide what to do with the topics in your plan and what to pitch, what to use for social media and website content 16.17 - Breaking down the themes into monthly and weekly content ideas 17.57 - Why it's essential to plan ahead for media coverage because many titles have long lead times so you need to be at least three months ahead 18.26 - Case study - Kerry Jordan and how she plans for National Dog Photography Day 19.45 - Case study Niki French and her book launch for Stop Walking Your Dog 20.54 - How to get more support by joining in the workshop Links mentioned in this episode: Katie Gwilt's website: www.TheKatLady.co.uk Kerry Jordan's website: https://www.furandfables.com/ (www.furandfables.com) Niki French's website: https://puptalk.co.uk/ (https://puptalk.co.uk/) If you'd like more support, I have a workshop happening on January 5th at 1pm, where you can put your media plan together. It's £47 and e mail subscribers do get a discount. You can https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/L3a9mPHj (find out more here.) Join the Five Day Get Your Pet Business in the Press challengehttps://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge ( here.)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you keep track of the wins in your pet business? We can get so bogged down in the day to day running around that we don’t find time to celebrate the good stuff. Or, we DO celebrate when things go well, but it’s soon forgotten when we become stressed or busy. Then, when we’re feeling overwhelmed, or there’s been a bump in the road, rather than thinking about our achievements, we can dwell on the negative. One of the things I’ve done to to stop myself doing this, and this is still a work in progress, is create a win folder. In this episode I’m talking about why I believe every pet business should have one in their resilience toolkit. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.20 - Why every pet business should have a win folder 1.08 - What a win folder is 1.51 - Why it's important to keep a track of wins in life 3.59 - How the idea for a win folder started 6.04 - How the win folder helped me through lockdown 8.25 - Choosing a digital or a physical win folder 10.33 - How your win folder can help with comparisonitis and imposter syndrome 11.23 - How you win folder can help with your marketing 11.40 - What is social proof and social proof mining? 12.40 - Social proof example - Doreen Potter 13.47 - How to build up your win folder 17.45 - Why you should use the comments in your win folder for marketing e mails and sales pages including the words that people say about you 20.06 - What pet businesses say about their win folders and why they love them! Links mentioned in this episode: Sign up for the next five day Get Your Pet Business in the Press challenge January 10th - 14th here: Five Day challenge Follow me on social media: https://www.google.com/url?q=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.instagram.com%2Frachelspenceruk&sa=D&source=calendar&usd=2&usg=AOvVaw0542B_re_dNrlSXSHZg4pF (https://www.instagram.com/rachelspenceruk) https://www.google.com/url?q=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.facebook.com%2Frachelspenceruk&sa=D&source=calendar&usd=2&usg=AOvVaw1Jd5nJI1o94K4GLSVXB9h2 (https://www.facebook.com/rachelspenceruk) https://www.google.com/url?q=https%3A%2F%2Ftwitter.com%2Frachelspenceruk&sa=D&source=calendar&usd=2&usg=AOvVaw3OHCf4ozIkWHyAfLlObseX (https://twitter.com/rachelspenceruk) https://www.google.com/url?q=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.linkedin.com%2Fin%2Frachelspenceruk%2F&sa=D&source=calendar&usd=2&usg=AOvVaw0iLm9dw_cXHxC4vHHbFkks (https://www.linkedin.com/in/rachelspenceruk/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you ever thought about sending your photos in to a newspaper or magazine? Often photos on their own can make a story, and while it’s usually professional photographers who are commissioned by news outlets, they do publish images from the public too. So if you have a breathtaking image, or a photo that is taking off on social media, there’s the potential that the press could use it too. In this podcast I’m chatting to Vasi Siedman from Pet Pix Academy in Florida who has had her photos published in HUGE publications like the New York Times. She’s sharing how she went about it and has come tips on how to capture awesome images of your dog at Christmas and all year round too. Key topics and timings in this episode: Links mentioned in this episode: Vasi is helping the http://www.baunjistrongfoundation.org/ (Benji Strong Foundation) raise money for pets who have cancer. Vasi also has her own podcast here: https://www.petpixacademy.com/podcasts/petpix-academy-with-vasi-siedman (https://www.petpixacademy.com/podcasts/petpix-academy-with-vasi-siedman) Visit her website: http://www.petpixacademy.com (www.petpixacademy.com) And follow her on Instagram at http://www.instagram.com/petpixacademy (www.instagram.com/petpixacademy)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is getting some press coverage something you’d love to achieve for your pet business? You might see other people in the industry getting brilliant media coverage and wonder ‘how do they do it?’ Well, the good news is you don’t need a huge budget and a fancy PR company to appear in the media and make sure your business is seen. In this podcast episode I’m sharing five simple steps you can follow to if you’d like to Get Your Pet Business in the Press. There’s also a PDF you can download https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/five-steps (here) that takes you through each step, with space for notes and ideas and additional resources. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.30 - Introduction to the episode and how to get the PDF download which walks you through each step. 2.00 - Why you don’t need a PR company or agency to get in the press. 3.13 - How getting in the press can help you grow your pet business. 5.22 - The difference in the number of people you can reach through media coverage versus social media. 6.26 - Case study Zoe Willingham. 7.15. - Step one - consider who you want to reach. 9.52 - Step two - think about where you would like to be featured. 13.27 - Step three - come up with a story idea. 20.10 - Step four - find the right person to pitch to - the one who is likely to be interested in what you have to say. 23.41 - Step five - write your pitch. 25.22 - Be prepared to have the journalist call as soon as you send your pitch. 26.54 - How to join my free Five Day challenge. 27.21 - How to stay in touch in my Free Publicity for Pet Businesses community. Links mentioned in this episode: Download the https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/five-steps (Five Steps PDF) Read https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-prepare-for-a-media-interview-in-10-simple-steps/ (How to prepare for an interview in ten simple steps) Sign up for the free https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (Get Your Pet Business in the Press challenge taking place January 10th - 14th 2022.) Keep in touch in the https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (Publicity for Pet Businesses Facebook community)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
When Michelle Burgess started a pet blog, Scruffy Little Terrier, so she could share her life as a new dog mum, she never imagined it would grow into a business. That was back in 2014 and she’d just adopted Border Terrier pup Barney and in that time it’s grown from a hobby to a full time business. Michelle sells amazing products for terrier owners from clothing to items for the home and she also has treats and goodies for terriers too. She shares how she overcame the many hurdles that were in her way to launch a successful brand and how media coverage really helped her business grow. Michelle has been on TV, on BBC Radio and had her products featured in Coast magazine TWICE. In this podcast episode we cover her journey from having a blog that she started on a whim to an award winning pet brand. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.20 - what to expect in this episode 2.15 - Michelle’s background and how the blog started in 2014 7.16 - How having the blog helped Michelle with coping with her health issues 9.18 - Growing her blog into a business 13.53 - How Michelle grew a community of people who could buy her products from her blog 20.04 - Turning her blog from a hobby to a business where she was selling her products 24.57 - How Michelle went about gaining media coverage for her products 32.29 - Why it’s important to really think about the titles you want to target 40.16 - How securing press coverage has impacted Michelle’s business and her self confidence 47.15 - Michelle’s advice to anyone considering building a business - don’t compare, go at your own pace. 51.33 - Being part of a community and how this can support you through challenging times. 54.57 - What’s next for Scruffy Little Terrier Links mentioned in this episode: Visit her website: http://www.scruffylittleterrier.com (www.scruffylittleterrier.com) Find her on Facebook: http://www.facebook.com/ScruffyLittleTerrier (www.facebook.com/ScruffyLittleTerrier) Follow her on Twitter: http://www.twitter.com/MichelleSLT (www.twitter.com/MichelleSLT) Check out Barney and Sandy on Instagram: http://www.instagram.com/scruffylittleterrier (www.instagram.com/scruffylittleterrier) Join the next Five Day Challenge: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Pitching to the press about your pet business can be daunting, especially if you’re doing it for the first time. That’s why I created the Get Your Pet Business in the Press one to one sessions, where we’re able to work together on your pitch or press release. The sessions are held on Zoom and by the end you’ll have your pitch ready, we’ll have some titles and writers to approach and in many cases, your press release will be written. In this podcast episode, I’m sharing everything you need to know about working together one to one. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.18 - Intro and details on the FREE Zoom Q and A taking place on November 30th at 1pm 2.08 - What is a Get Your Pet Business in the Press session? 3.49 - Getting your press release and pitch DONE on the session. 5.50 - Who the Get Your Pet Business in the Press sessions are for and the kind of people who have used them. 7.06 - The two ‘work with me’ options, book an hour session or a day. 8.52 - Booking your day and time and what you get before the session to help you prepare. 9.28 - Why the Get Your Pet Business in the Press sessions are different to working with a PR company and a much more affordable price. 10.45 - What happens on the call. 11.32 - What happens after the call. 15.27 - Examples of the kind of results people have had from Get Your Pet Business in the Press sessions. 16.31 - How to decide whether you should book the hour session or half day. 26.09 - What is the impact of being in the press? 27.30 - How to book your session. Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about the https://publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-your-pet-business-in-the-press/ (Get Your Pet Business in the Press sessions. ) Adios Plastic in https://www.theguardian.com/lifeandstyle/shortcuts/2021/jan/18/eco-friendly-pet-owners-dog-poo-wormery (The Guardian) Adios Plastic in https://www.petbusinessworld.co.uk/news/feed/compostable-poo-is-the-way-to-go (Pet Business World) Rebecca Walters in https://www.bordercountiesadvertizer.co.uk/news/19686229.oswestry-puppy-expert-launches-conference-dog-owners/ (Oswestry Advertiser) Wendy Thomson in https://www.warrington-worldwide.co.uk/2021/04/01/cat-lover-creates-paw-map-to-help-kitties-prepare-for-life-after-lockdown/ (Warrington Worldwide) Wendy Thomson in the https://www.warringtonguardian.co.uk/news/19204763.cat-sitter-recommends-paw-maps-feline-friends-lockdown-restrictions-ease/ (Warrington Guardian ) Jo Milnes in https://www.bridlingtonfreepress.co.uk/news/people/muddy-marvellous-pets-celebrated-on-muddy-dogs-day-an-event-devised-by-a-thornholme-owner-3404140 (Bridlington Express )
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to have professional looking graphics and imagery for your pet business feel unsure about taking the next step? Investing in how your brand looks can help take you to the next level and get more people to know about what you offer. But the whole ‘brand’ thing can feel uncomfortable. You don’t want to feel like you’re taking yourself too seriously, and it’s something I've struggled with. This week on the podcast I’m chatting to Alison Price from House of Henry, a graphic designer for the pet industry. We’re exploring the different ways design can elevate your brand, boost your own confidence and bring more customers and sales. Plus everything you need to know if you're thinking of starting to work with one, so you don't get overwhelmed. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.26: Introduction to the episode 2.31: Alison’s background 3.03: How graphic design can work for pet business owners 4.56: What graphic design ideas are working well for pet businesses right now 6.39: Lead magnets and how these can help wow potential clients 10.13: How professional design can make petpreneurs feel more confident putting their brands out there 15.09: Creating online brochures and magazines for awareness days and special dates 16.10: How to brief a designer 22.00: Why it’s important to find a designer you trust and who understands your brand. 25.08: How your brand can change as your business grows 30.00: Why having a designer doesn’t mean you can’t do work on your brand yourself. 33.21: Case study Sarah Jones from My Anxious Dog 37.02: How to find out more about Alison Links mentioned in this episode: Want to find out more about Alison and House of Henry? Visit her website: https://www.houseofhenry.uk/ (https://www.houseofhenry.uk/) Follow Alison on social media @hourseofhenryuk on all platforms.
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you ready for Christmas yet? The big day might be six weeks away but if you’ve a product or service you’re going to be promoting around Christmas, it’s time to start talking about it now. In fact, if you want to get press coverage, it was time to start talking about it back in July. That’s when all the big brands - think John Lewis and Marks and Spencer - showcase their festive creations. When it comes to your own content on your website, in your e mails, and on your social media, you can leave it a little later though. In this podcast episode I’m going to share simple ways to plan your Christmas content so you can chill out and enjoy the holidays. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.20: Can you believe there’s only six weeks to Christmas and why it’s time to get planning now. 2.10: Why it’s not to late for your blog, e mail and social media Christmas content. 2.43: Step one - decide on what you’re going to be marketing at Christmas. 3.38: Ideas to ‘Christmas up’ your current services and products with case studies from Emily Thomas and her Canicross bundles. 6.02: Step two - create core content around your Christmas product with case study from Michelle Burgess at Scruffy Little Terrier. 8.07: Case study Ali Smith from Rebarkable creating a Christmas workshop for puppies. 9.23: Step three - brainstorm your social media posts with a block of post it notes where you answer common questions, explain the benefits, share case studies and much more. 11.30: My Get Your Pet Business in the Press Christmas bundle ideas. 15.51: Schedule your social media posts for your Christmas offer and repeat them. 17.38: Step five - get some press coverage around your Christmas offer and what kind of things you can use for story ideas. 20.45: My story ideas for 2022 Q and A on November 30th at 1pm - https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/NovQandA (sign up here). Links mentioned in this episode: Check out Michelle Burgess https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/www-scruffylittleterrier-com-dog-themed-gifts-xmas (Scruffy Little Terrier Christmas guide:) Ali Smith https://rebarkable.com/blog/ (Rebarkable ) has a https://app.livestorm.co/rebarkable/naughty-to-nice (Naughty to Nice workshop for puppy owners.) Emily Thomas K9TrailTime has https://www.k9trailtime.com/other-activities/christmas-treats-stocking.html (Christmas stockings for active dogs) and a https://www.k9trailtime.com/canicross/canicross-foundations-course-starts-september-20th-2022.html (Canicross starter course) for people who want to get fit in 2022. Join my free Facebook group, https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses ) or follow me on social media @rachelspenceruk. For tips on pitches and press releases check out this episode, https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/difference-between-pitch-press-release/ (What’s the difference between a pitch and a press release.) And you can learn how to write a press release in this episode, https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/ (How to write a press release for your pet business.)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love for your pet business to be the go-to pet business in your local community? Maybe you have some support locally but you want to branch out and reach more people? Perhaps you'd like to target people in your local community who aren’t on social media and be the talk of the town for all the right reasons. If so you'll love this chat with American pet sitter Collin Funkhouser who shares the amazing ways he’s grown his pet business in his local community. It all started as a side hustle but is now a full time job for Collin and his wife Meghan, plus they run an amazing podcast and community for pet sitters too! From wearing clothes that scream Pet Sitter to securing hard to reach clients, to speaking at local colleges to being an authority in the US pet space, Collin shares loads of brilliant advice. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.18: Introduction. 1.52: About Collin and his pet business . 3.04: How the business started for Collin and his wife Meghan as a side hustle but ended up growing. 5.17: What it was like growing his pet sitting business at the beginning. 8.48: His challenge when it came to finding people who weren’t on social media. 13.41: The stumbling blocks they experienced at the beginning of their journey. 16.26: Starting the podcast. 19.20: How the podcast has grown a community in the pet industry. 23.46: How they decide what content to share on social media. 29.41: How their podcast had helped their face to face business. 32.21: Using their podcast to position themselves as experts in the industry. 37.22: The challenges facing pet businesses when it comes to putting themselves out there. 41.35: The importance of educating owners to build trust and help them feel reassured their beloved pet is safe. 43.13: How being featured in the local newspaper helped Collin reach pet owners he’d been unable to find on social media. 46.25: Collin shares his tips for getting in the media. 51.16:What’s next for Collin and his podcast and business. 52.59: Where can you find out more and connect with Collin. Links mentioned in this episode: You can find out more about Collin and Meghan’s Podcast here:https://www.petsitterconfessional.com/ ( www.petsitterconfessional.com) Join them on Facebook and Instagram: @petsitterconfessional
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to be the go to expert in your area of the pet industry? For your name to be on the tip of people’s tongues when what you offer crops up in conversation? Being known for what you do can help you stand out, bring you more clients and sales, boost your feeling of self worth and enable you to increase your prices. And as long as you’re happy to put yourself in the spotlight, with a little focus it’s a lot easier than you think. In this podcast episode you’ll learn seven simple ways you can become the go-to expert in your field. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.18: Introduction to episode 1.00: Get in touch if you’d like me to be a guest expert on publicity in your community. 1.45: What being the go-to expert means for you. 2.20: How being the go-to rescue dog expert helped Suzanne Gould build her self worth and put up her prices. 4.50: Decide on what you want to be known as an expert for. 8.38: Launch your core content platform, this can be a blog, vlog or podcast. 10.18: Put yourself forward as a guest expert in other people’s communities. 12.25: Carry out research or a study into a topic in your area of expertise or launch an awareness day. 15.02: Write a book and how easy it is to get published these days. 17.02: Get some press coverage where you talk about your area of expertise. 19.38: Speak at events and my terrible experience talking at Glee when I was a total flop. 21.00: Build up your expert status activities slowly. And get help if you can for public speaking! 22.07: Final thoughts. 22.23: Don’t be scared to build yourself as an expert in an area where there are other experts. 23.52: Be prepared to feel uncomfortable calling yourself an expert. 24.09: Connect with others in your area of expertise. 24.50: Persevere as it will pay off. 25.15: Keep a folder of wins to keep you going when you wobble. 26.28: Listen to my interview with https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-out-your-way-osmaan-sharif/ (Osmaan Sharif for further support). Links mentioned in this episode: Osmaan Sharif - https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-out-your-way-osmaan-sharif/ (Get Out Your Way and put your pet business out there. ) Niching with https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/niche-dog-trainer-beagle-lady-kellie-wynn/ (The Beagle Lady Kellie Wynn,) Spaniel specialist Hannah Antrobus https://pawsitivelypawsomepups.com/ (Positively Pawsome Pups) Claire Lawrence interview: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-writing-a-book-can-raise-the-profile-of-your-pet-business/ (Barking Dog expert Claire Lawrence) Suzanne Gould interview: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/suzanne-gould-edinburgh-holistic-dogs/ (Rescue Dog Ranger Suzanne Gould) For more on pitching to podcasts, try this episode, https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/podcastpitch/ (How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest,) For guest blogging inspiration, try https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/collaboration-pet-business/ (How to find people to collaborate with in your pet business. ) Find out more on Tracey's study on her website https://bestdoglearningandstuff.co.uk/ (https://bestdoglearningandstuff.co.uk/) Learn about Write a Dog Book in 30 days course with Canine Principles here. https://www.canineprinciples.com/course/dog-writing-course (https://www.canineprinciples.com/course/dog-writing-course) Also check out Vicky Fraser at Moxie Books who has helped dozens of pet professionals write their books - her website is https://moxiebooks.co.uk/ (https://moxiebooks.co.uk/) Has this inspired you to start working on building yourself as an expert? Do come and let me know your thoughts on social media, I'm @rachelspenceruk on all platforms. And come and hang out in my FREE Facebook group too, https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses)
This podcast uses the following...
Were you at the recent Pet Industry Federation awards or are you thinking of applying in the future? This podcast features interviews with hosts Alexandra and Nigel Baker from the Pet Industry Federation. Plus winners Debbie Greaves from Barking Bags, Gemma Connolly from Scoff Paper, Steve Belgrau from The Pet Joint and Denise Lucas from The Green Poop Bag company who was shortlisted for the Sustainability Award. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.30: Introduction 2.36: Interview with Alexandra and Nigel Baker from the Pet Industry Federation 12.05: Interview with Debbie Greaves from Barking Bags - Winner of New Business of the Year 22.19: Interview with Gemma Connolly from Scoff Paper - Winner of Product Innovation - Dog 33.02: Interview with Steve Belgrau from The Pet Joint - Winner Cattery of the Year 36.53: Interview with Denise Lucas from The Green Poop Bag company - Shortlisted for Sustainability Award 45.31: Conclusion and how to get press coverage from the awards Links mentioned in this episode: Website - Pet Industry Federation http://www.petcare.org.uk/ (http://www.petcare.org.uk/) Website - Barking Bags https://barkingbags.co.uk/ (https://barkingbags.co.uk/) Website - Scoff Paper https://scoffpaper.com/ (https://scoffpaper.com/) Website - The Pet Joint https://www.thepetjoint.co.uk/ (https://www.thepetjoint.co.uk/) Website - The Green Poop Bag company https://greenpoopbag.co.uk/ (https://greenpoopbag.co.uk/) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/ (How to write a press release for your pet business) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (Download my free Press Release Template and guide)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you run a local pet service business and are curious as to how having a podcast might be helpful? If so, you will love this podcast episode with Greg Pattison from Great Paws dog training who hosts the Woofin Pawsome podcast. Greg is proof that podcasts can play a vital role for those in the pet industry and he has used his to grow his business as a dog trainer in a really creative and interesting way. His podcast brings an element of extra support to the pet owners he’s working with, and it’s been transformational for his business. It’s helped him build a community with other pet professionals, attract more clients, generate lots of leads and bookings. And it's helped inspire him to come up with programmes and packages for existing clients. So if you're thinking of starting a podcast, Greg shares how it could work for you, plus loads of practical advice on how to get going. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.07: About Greg 2.42: About Greg’s podcast 4.21: What promo did greg do before the podcast? 7.47: The promotional surprise benefits Greg found from doing a podcast 11.40: How having a podcast has helped Greg build relationships with potential clients 13.58: How Greg first approached podcasts vs how he does them now 16.58: How have guest podcasts benefitted the show? 20.04: How Greg is generous with his content in his podcast 22.16: What’s the benefit of the podcast on Gregs business? 22.43: What impact has the podcast had on Greg's dog training business? 27.14: How Greg personally connects with podcasts 31.04: What other pet professionals need to know about setting up a podcast? 37.32: When does Greg schedule his podcast and his advice to other pet businesses 40.57: What’s next for Greg and his podcast and business? 47.05: Where to find out more about Greg Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about Greg on his website: https://greatpaws.co.uk/about-me (https://greatpaws.co.uk/about-me) On Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/greatpawsne (https://www.instagram.com/greatpawsne) On Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/greatpawsne (https://www.facebook.com/greatpawsne) For Twitter: https://twitter.com/great_paws (https://twitter.com/great_paws) And check out his podcast: https://greatpaws.co.uk/woofin-pawsome-podcast (https://greatpaws.co.uk/woofin-pawsome-podcast) To learn more about podcasts you might enjoy the following episodes: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/start-podcast-ant-mcginley/ (How to start a podcast with Ant McGinley) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/perfect-podcast-guest/ (How to be the perfect podcast guest) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/podcastpitch/ (How to pitch as a podcast guest )
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of going to Content Marketing expert Janet Murray’s Courageous Content Live event or buying the Courageous Content planner? Janet is a social media and content marketing expert and the host of the Courageous Content podcast and helps small business owners be brave when it comes to sharing their work online. Putting yourself out there can be scary, and her products and systems are designed to help entrepreneurs overcome this so they can attract more clients and make more sales. Three years ago I found Janet’s podcast and it helped take me from being a clueless freelance who waited for the phone to ring to having a successful online business. I’m an affiliate of Janet’s because having her in my corner has had a huge impact on my business. In this podcast I’m sharing what to expect from her planner and event. Key topics in this episode: 00.30: What is the Courageous Content planner? 2.40: What is the Courageous Content Live event? 3.19: Why we need to be courageous with our content 4.24: My personal experience of being scared of sharing content 6.50: What to expect from Janet 7.30: What you’ll learn inside the planner and the 4x4 method 8.41: How the planner can help you stay consistent 12.06: What to expect from the Live Event 13.26: What guests are at the event 15.10: What the impact of creating content consistently will be on your business 16:00: Come and say hi if you go and how to use the code CCLIVERACHEL Links mentioned in this episode: Use the code CCLIVERACHEL Check out the https://janetmurray.co.uk/courageous-content-planner-2022/ (Courageous Content Planner - )an A4 desk planner packed with content ideas/prompts, planning templates, and checklists. Here's the link for https://janetmurray.co.uk/courageous-content-live/ (Courageous Content Live) - a virtual content planning event for coaches, creatives and entrepreneurs, taking place this November. Listen to Jan's https://courageous-content.captivate.fm/ (Courageous Content podcast )
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to get started with using interviews in your pet business content? Chatting to industry experts and other pet professionals helps keep your marketing material interesting and fresh. You bring a new face to your audience and it can help you build your following too. In this podcast episode I’m breaking down everything you need to know if you want to start using interviews in your content marketing. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.28: Background to the idea for this podcast 3.20: What is an interview? 4.19: Why use interviews in your content marketing? 6.02: Examples of ideas 7.54: How interviews can get you time with people who might ordinarily charge a lot of money for sharing their expertise! 11.19: Different ways to use interviews in your marketing including repurposing and resharing at times when the topic is relevant. 15.37: How to find people to interview 18.03: How to carry out the interview, from using Zoom to real life to an old fashioned notepad and pen 21.37: What to do after the interview and how to promote the interview Links mentioned in this episode: Join my free Facebook group https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses) and it would be great to see you there. https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/collaboration-pet-business/ (How to find people to collaborate with in your pet business content) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/start-podcast-ant-mcginley/ (How to start a podcast for your pet business) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-out-your-way-osmaan-sharif/ (Get out your way and put yourself out there with Osmaan Sharif) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/guest-blogging-pet-business/ (How to get started with guest blogging in your pet business)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Thinking of trying Pinterest for your pet business but not sure if it's worth the time and graft? Well you will LOVE this podcast with Tori Mistick, a pet blogger, social media expert, business coach and all round pawsome dog mum. Tori also has a podcast, Wear, Wag, Repeat and teaches petpreneurs how to make an impact on social media. Pinterest has been a HUGE part of her growth and in this episode she shares everything you need to know to get started. If you were on the fence about trying it, this episode will get you off that fence and on Pinterest. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.25:Who is Tori and what does she do? 5.45: Tori explains about Pinterest 9.31: How would Pinterest work for pet product businesses? 13.02: How do Pinterest trends work? 16.23: How would Pinterest work for a pet service provider? 20.27: How do people interact with Pinterest? 22.59: The importance of keywords with Pinterest 26.12: Language that marketers use vs the language that pet businesses can use 27.24: How does Pinterest work for driving people to your website? 31.35: Tori shares if you have a weekly blog post what your Pinterest should look like 34.44: Tori tells me how Pinterest has benefited her website traffic compared to other social media sites 38.21: How can you track the traffic from Pinterest 41.37: Tori’s advice to businesses sitting on the fence about Pinterest 44.19: Where to find Tori Links mentioned in this episode: Check out Tori's website http://www.wearwagrepeat.com (www.wearwagrepeat.com) to find out more about her podcast, courses and blog posts Follow here on Instagram: http://www.instagram.com/wearwagrepeat (www.instagram.com/wearwagrepeat) Blog: http://www.wearwagrepeat.com/ (www.wearwagrepeat.com) Podcast: http://www.wearwagrepeat.com/podcast (www.wearwagrepeat.com/podcast) Online Courses: http://www.wearwagrepeat.com/courses (www.wearwagrepeat.com/courses) Instagram: http://www.instagram.com/tmistick (www.instagram.com/tmistick) Facebook: http://www.facebook.com/groups/wwrlabs (www.facebook.com/groups/wwrlabs) Pinterest: http://www.pinterest.com/tmistick (www.pinterest.com/tmistick) LinkedIn: http://www.linkedin.com/in/torimistick (www.linkedin.com/in/torimistick)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of putting yourself forward to appear on a podcast but want to make sure you get it right? Being a guest on a podcast is a brilliant way to reach hundreds or even thousands of potential clients in a really powerful way. Because they’re listening to you, it helps you build a connection far quicker than they might experience from a social media post or a blog even. You’re seen as a trusted source of information from the person who hosts the podcast and it’s vital that you get it right and make a good impression. They’re giving you the privilege of being about to access their audience, and that’s the potential to connect with tens of thousands of people who had never heard of you before. So you want to make a good impression so on International Podcast Day - September 30th - I’m sharing how to be the perfect podcast guest. In this podcast episode there’s ten things to consider when you’re appearing on a podcast to make sure it’s a memorable experience for the host and the listener. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.18: Podcasts and how they can help you promote your business. 1.24: How I became a podcast addict and signed up for a programme after listening to podcasts for ten hours non stop! 3.22: Why we need to appreciate the opportunity from the podcast host as they are putting us in front of their audience. 4.03: International podcast day September 30th. 4.30: The ten steps to being the perfect guest. 4.31: It’s about their audience, not you. 7.02: Be conversational and chatty. 8.51: Look for visual cues from the host. 10.16: Be interesting and enthusiastic. 12.30: Prepare the key things you want to get across. 15.14: Have your bio and images ready. 16.51: Assume the listener has no idea who you are. 19.01: Check your sound and connection. 21.07: Shout about the episode. 24.12: Build a podcast library on your website. Links mentioned in this episode: Thank you to Chloe Nerina Fuller from the https://podcasts.apple.com/gb/podcast/assistance-dog-education-project/id1507433369 (Assistance Dog Education project) you can find out more about her https://podcasts.apple.com/gb/podcast/assistance-dog-education-project/id1507433369 (podcast here). Pitching to podcasts? Try this episode: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/podcastpitch/ (How to pitch yourself as a podcast guest here) that goes into more detail. Want to start a podcast? Try https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/start-podcast-ant-mcginley/ (How to start a podcast for your pet business with Ant McGinley)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
I’m throwing the spotlight on Marie Yates and the incredible work her organisation does to help people who are survivors of sexual violence on the podcast this week. Marie’s the inspirational Canine Perspective founder, which works with rescue dogs that help people recover, heal, and rebuild their lives following terrible events. You’ll hear about the rescue dogs that have helped people and how they helped a woman in her 80s who had never safely touched another human being. And about rescue dogs Reggie and Bruno, who were let down by their humans and how they cope with their experiences, embrace life, and learn to trust again. Marie shares how the idea of Canine Perspective became a reality and the steps she took to make it all come together. Discover how it’s lead to a book and a podcast (or rather pawdcast!) and what she hopes to achieve for her organisation going forwards. It’s a feel-good listen, and I hope that you enjoy it. Please do be aware that there is a reference to people who have been affected by sexual violence Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.15: Marie talks about her background 3.23: Marie's career before Canine Perspective 6.49: Marie talks about her published book 10.28: How her book idea evolved and she then became a dog trainer 14.05: Marie talks about the idea of Canine Hope and rescue dog Bruno 20.33: What feedback does Marie get from people that the organisation works with? 25.33: Marie shares how lockdown put the organisation on hold but what people can expect from them moving forward 29.12: Marie's children's book ‘Luna's Woodland adventure’ 30.36: Marie shares what we can learn from rescue dogs especially following the Coronavirus pandemic 32.27: Marie tells me what she learnt from lockdown and how she became resilient 35.28: What’s next for Canine Perspective? 36.12: Where can you find out more about Marie and Canine Perspective? Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about Marie and Canine Perspective on her website: http://www.canine-perspective.com (www.canine-perspective.com)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to get some press coverage for your pet business but when you try to think of a story idea you draw a blank? You know what it is you do, how you help your customers and the transformation your services might bring. With your products, it’s always so lovely to get positive feedback and of course, see pets looking dapper in your creations. But when it comes to putting pen to paper and writing about YOU - you freeze. I know this from experience. Even though I've been a journalist since 1999, I’ve always written about other people, not me! So when the tables were turned and I had to write my story, I found it really tricky. One way I have found helps people when they’re struggling to share the personal story behind their pet business is to think of three different ‘moments.' I'm sharing them in this podcast episode and I hope it helps spark ideas for your pet business. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19 - Introduction to the podcast, why I'm covering different moments you can use to generate story ideas 2.57 - How I found it hard to put myself out there so I understand how difficult it can be 3.24 - Moment one - the Lightbulb moment, what is this and how you can use it 4.06 - Lightbulb moment case study, Sarah Jones from My Anxious Dog 5.38 - Lightbulb moment case study, Julie and Peter Maxted Dog G8 7.30 - Lightbulb moment case study, Karen Rhodes Luxury Dog Hampers 9.07 - Moment Two - the Sliding Doors moment, what it is and how you can use it 10.12 - Sliding Doors moment, Michelle Burgess Scruffy Little Terrier 13.24 - Sliding Doors moment, Suzanne Gould Edinburgh Holistic Dogs 15.04 - Moment three - the Turning Point moment what it is and how you can use it including my experience 16.04 - Turning Point moment, Katie Guastapaglia Dogwood Adventure play 18.43 Summary of the three moments 19.18 - Where can you find me? 19.45 - Details of my new programme starting on the 21st September 2021 Links mentioned in this episode: Sarah Jones website http://www.myanxiousdog.co.uk/ (www.myanxiousdog.co.uk) Julie Maxted website: https://www.dog-g8.com/ (www.dog-g8.com/) Julie Maxted podcast: www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/julie-maxted-pr-success/ Karen Rhodes website: http://www.luxurydoghampers.co.uk/ (www.luxurydoghampers.co.uk) Michelle Burgess website: https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/ (www.scruffylittleterrier.com/) Suzanne Gould website: www.edinburghholisticdogs.co.uk Katie Guastapaglia website: http://www.dogwoodadventureplay.com/ (www.dogwoodadventureplay.com) My website: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/ (www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/) Links mentioned in this episode:
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you been thinking of pitching to a journalist but feel a bit nervous as you're not sure what they look for in a story? Would you love to learn what journalists want? If the answer's yes you will love this week's podcast with Marie Carter Robb who is editor of Pets Magazine. Marie has worked for newspapers including the Independent and the Guardian, and lots of women's magazines and local publications AND as a PR in the pet industry. Then she decided to create her OWN magazine. In this episode you'll get a great insight into what makes a story plus have the potential to pitch to Marie - because you'll discover what she wants! Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.50: Introduction 2.57: About Marie Carters background 5.50: Marie Carters talks about setting up Pets magazine 8.05: What does Marie look for when pet brands approach Pets Magazine? 13.12: What other dogs does Marie have? 16.44: Marie talks more about the issues she likes to cover and feels strongly about 19.19: What regular slots does Marie have in Pets Magazine 21.47: Marie explains what dog trainers or cat groomers should consider if they want to be featured in Pets Magazine 23.36: Marie tells me the strangest product she’s ever reviewed 25.03: Marie talks about the effective of the pandemic and the rise in dog abandonment as people go back to work 29.22: Marie gives me her advice for pet businesses who are feeling resistant to promoting themselves 32.37: Where can you contact Marie Links mentioned in this episode: Marie's website: https://www.petsmag.co.uk/author/admin/ (Pets Magazine website) Follow Marie on LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/mariecarter1 (Marie Carter Robb on LinkedIn) Learn how to get your pet business in the press in my coaching programme: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-your-pet-business-in-the-press/ (What to expect from the Get Your Pet Business in the Press Programme)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to raise the profile of your pet business but feel your so busy trying to spin a hundred different plates that you just wouldn't be able to find the time? If the answer is yes then I think you'll be inspired with this podcast episode with Emily Thomas who runs two pet businesses. Emily is one of the busiest and most productive people I know. She runs a hugely successful Canicross equipment business, K9TrailTime and travels across the country to events. Emily also runs a hydrotherapy centre when she lives in Gloucester along with her business partner. And in the last nine months we've been working together on raising her profile. She's done an incredible job, featuring in several national newspapers, in magazines and lots more. Emily shares how she fitted it in her hectic schedule in this episode and her advice for other pet professionals when it comes to getting your name out there. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.48: Emily Thomas talks about her background 5.48: In person events and how they impacted on Emily’s business 7.26: How Emily found it not being able to attend Canicross events for 18 months during lockdown 9.45: Emily talks about the relationships she’s built with customers through her business 10.35: What compelled Emily to take part in my Free publicity challenge in 2021 and how she found it 16.22: Emily shares how she managed her publicity before joining the challenge admitting to having no structure or plan 18.09: The range of publications Emily has been featured in 24.36: Emily tells me how long achieving publicity has taken her 26.58: The impact of the press coverage for Emily’s business 30.06: Emily shares her experience of imposter syndrome 31.48: Emily’s advice to a person who is on the fence about focusing on press coverage 34.53: We talk about FOMO and how it can motivate pet businesses to want to get press coverage 36.15: Emily gives her top tip for getting publicity 39.29: Emily shares what the future holds for her pet business 41.43: Emily talks about the 52% increase of sales she experienced in 2021 Links mentioned in this episode: Emily's feature in https://www.thesun.co.uk/money/14037770/paws-and-claws-rabbits-feeling-the-cold/ (The Sun) and with https://www.thesun.co.uk/money/15745463/paws-claws-cats-dog/ (Victoria Pendleton story) Emily's feature in the https://www.dailymail.co.uk/femail/article-9347661/Dont-let-dognappers-catch-napping-ingenious-new-ways-foil-epidemic-theft.html (Daily Mail). Her website https://www.k9trailtime.com/ (K9TrailTime) Her website https://www.canactive.co.uk/ (Canactive)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to raise the profile of your pet business by being featured in the media? If so, taking part in the 12 week Get Your Pet Business in the Press programme will give you everything you need to find stories in your pet business and share them with journalists. In this episode you’ll learn everything you need to know about what happens when you join the course. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.18: Introduction and why I'm talking about the Get Your Pet Business in the Press Programme as it's the week of the free challenge. 4.48: What does taking part in the Get Your Pet Business in the Press Programme involve? Who is it for and what does it aim to do? Breakdown of when the calls take place and what's involved. 12.22: Dog trainer Zoe Willingham shares her experience of the Get Your Pet Business in the Press Programme. 15.15: The support available in the Get Your Pet Business in the Press Programme. 18.30: How the Get Your Pet Business in the Press Programme works for different types of businesses. 23.04: Animal behaviourist Caroline Wilkinson shares her experience of the Get Your Pet Business in the Press Programme. 24.25: The investment for the Get Your Pet Business in the Press Programme and how you can get involved. Links mentioned in this episode: Read this as a blog post: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-your-pet-business-in-the-press/ (What to expect from the Get Your Pet Business in the Press Programme) Sign up for the programme and read and watch testimonials from pet businesses who have taken part: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/GetInThePress (Buy Get Your Pet Business in the Press )
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to learn how to get press coverage for your pet business in five days? If the answer is yes then I’m so excited to invite you to my free five day challenge to help you do exactly that and it's happening next week! The Get Your Pet Business in the Press challenge is taking place on Monday 30th August to Friday September 3rd. Inside you’ll learn everything you need to get your pet product or service in the media, ranging from local titles to huge pet magazines. In this podcast episode I’m sharing all you need to know about the challenge and what you can expect to achieve from taking part. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.49: Intro to the five day Get Your Pet Business in the Press challenge and how you don’t need to have a fancy PR company to get in the press. 1.34: How the challenge works and what you will learn, short video in the morning, 20 minute task and an evening live at 6pm. 2.52: Why now is the easiest time for you to get press coverage. 5.18: How you’ll learn to be your own PR in the free five day challenge. 6.05: The main focus of the five day challenge - media coverage in newspapers, magazines, TV and radio. 7.24: Examples of the outlets people in the challenge have been featured from the Daily Mail to Radio 2. 8.17: The difference between publicity and social media. 12.04: What kind of outcomes you can expect to see from raising your profile. 16.07: How to sign up for the challenge. 16.57: What will happen on each day of the challenge. 18.12: Challenge success stories, Jesse Graves, Liza Edwards, Louise Humphrey, Karen Rhodes, Gina Grandfield, Rikki Sullivan. 21.53: What you need to do to take part. 23.50: The challenge prizes. Links mentioned in this episode: Sign up for the challenge: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/karen-boyce/ (How Karen Boyce secured 30 pieces of press coverage in six months), https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/ (How to write a press release for your pet business) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/using-a-pr-versus-learning-how-to-get-publicity/ (Hiring a PR company versus learning how to do it yourself.)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you struggling to get your pet business found on Google? Maybe Google just doesn’t know that you exist? Don’t worry I have exactly what you need in this week’s podcast with SEO and website optimisation expert Malcolm Maybury. Find out how to go from being invisible on Google search to ranking at the top of the search he’s sharing the secret to keywords, website optimisation. Plus what you can do to improve your website to make Google love it, in a simple easy to understand way. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2:20: Background to 360spin.com 3:38: What businesses Malcolm works with 4:35: What challenges does 360 spin help to solve 5:46: How does Malcolm help small businesses 7:30: Keywords and how they can be used 8:37: Mistakes small businesses make with digital marketing 9:31: Can small businesses salvage their website? 12:00: The steps you can take to be found on Google 19:00: How to use keywords to make your website visible 21:10: How reviews can be used to boost your rankings 27:52: How can blogging help 29:20: What should your website look like? 30:36: How to post to Facebook without being penilised 33:00: The positives of working with a professional for digital marketing 36:54: How Google can demote rankings if loopholes have been used 37:56: What to do when you work with an expert 38:40: Where to find out more about Malcolm Links mentioned in this episode: Malcolm helps small and big businesses across the UK improve their searchability on Google, and you can find out more on his website, https://www.360spin.com/ (360Spin.com ) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/why-blogging-can-help-your-pet-business/ (How blogging can help your pet business) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-pet-business-found-on-google-rosie-robinson/ (How to get your pet business found on Google with Rosie Robinson,)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you love listening to podcasts and dream of starting one of your own? Podcasting has grown massively, particularly since lockdown, and there are currently over 2 million podcasts available to tune in to. That’s a massive jump from just 500,000 in 2018, according to research by Podcast Insights. Another study by Statista found 16 million people in the UK were podcast listeners. Having a podcast is an ideal way to give people an insight into who you are, and share your ethos, values and expert knowledge. And starting one honestly isn’t that difficult. This week on the podcast we have Ant McGinley, the King of Podcasting, explaining all you need to know if you’re thinking of launching one yourself. Ant mentored me to launch this podcast, and introduced me to the podcasting world at his awesome event Pods Up North and I am so so excited to have him on the show. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.30: Introduction to what to expect from this episode 2.05: Background to how Ant has supported me in creating the podcast 3.36: Ant’s background and how he got into podcasting. 6.54: How anyone can have their own show and how there isn’t a barrier to entry now. 7.29: Why should you start a podcast in the first place? 10.39: What the podcasting community is like and how podcasters support one another. 13.02: How having a podcast can help you grow your business. 19.04: Why podcasts make people feel like they know you. 22.54: Ant shares advice for new podcasters Ali and Sarah on things to focus on in their upcoming shows. 29.44: The basic kit you need to get started with your podcast. 36.43: How simple it is to record a podcast on a phone with the Rode reporter app. 38.50: How podcast hosting platforms work. 44.47: How Facebook has plans to be a podcast provider in the not too distant future. 46.22: Finding the right style for your podcast - should you do a solo, interview or a mix? 51.20: How one of Ant’s colleagues managed to get a message from Russell Crowe thanks to their podcast. 56.31: Using your podcast to approach experts and people you would love to learn from. 57.24: Why having a podcast can help you rise above the many people who claim to be an expert on the internet as people can listen to you demonstrating your expertise. 60.39: How having a podcast means you can give as much time as you want to sharing stories, knowledge and interviews rather than being cut off on the radio! 1.02.13: Essential elements of a podcast. 1.06.13: What is success for a podcast? 1.10.26: Where to find out more about Ant. Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about Ant's new mentoring community at https://podcasterhq.net/ (https://podcasterhq.net/) Follow Ant on social media https://twitter.com/antmcginley (@antmcginley) and his event, Pods Up North https://twitter.com/PodsUpnorth (@podsupnorth).
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
How much should you give away for free? In the digital age, when we have so many ways to communicate and so many marketing platforms, and so much noise, how do you stand out? Using content marketing to share your knowledge in your given field is a way of building that know, like and trust. It can be hard to know how much you should be sharing, and striking a balance is important. In this episode I cover some of the common questions around working for free and giving away advice for free. There are examples from pet business owners, plus some of my personal experiences, and I share how my mindset has changed on this topic. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.30: The debate around how much we should share for free. 1.07: My experience of working for free and having a fixed mindset around the topic. 3.33: Why I changed and the different ways I will work for free. 5.50: Why work for free in the first place? The benefits of working for free. 6.57: The customer experience and how having free content on your website on the topic you specialise in can make people choose you. 11.17: Working for free and publicity - if you’re being in an article, chances are you will be working for free. 12.17: Case study Sue McCabe from Muttamorphosis and being featured on the BBC. 13.19: Case study Zoe Willingham and the free Dog Pub challenge. 15.37: How much advice should you give away for free in your content? 17.27: Press release example and how that has led to people booking my Power Hours. 19.44: Will people use your free content and not book with you? 20.33: Why people will always want more personalised advice. 23.06: Case study Helen Pritchard LinkedIn expert. 25.52: How sharing free advice can ensure you’re the. Go-to person. 27.13: How many touchpoint does someone need to buy from you? 28.00: Conclusion, why I believe you should be generous with the advice you share. Links mentioned in this episode: If you enjoyed this episode, you might like https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/linkedin-for-pet-professionals-with-helen-pritchard/ (Getting started with LinkedIn for your pet business with Heleh Pritchard) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/ (How to write a press release for your pet business) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/content-strategy-pet-business/ (How to create an effective content strategy for your pet business) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-pet-business-found-on-google-rosie-robinson/ (How to get your pet business found on Google) https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (Join my FREE publicity challenge )
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is your feeling of not being good enough holding back your business? Maybe you’re always worrying that people will find out you’re not the expert and you’re constantly thinking ‘who am I to say this?’ Perhaps you’re worried about what people will say or criticise something you’ve said? If you were nodding away to any of that then this week’s podcast with performance and mindset coach Osmaan Sharif is a must-listen to help you get out of this way of thinking. Discover why reframing your mindset to how you’re helping people is key to ditching those mindset gremlins! Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.51: Introduction 2.28: About Osmaan 5.16: Osmaan’s advice for businesses wanting to grow but feeling held back by their mindset 7.13: Accepting you need to get yourself out there to help others 10.33: Osmaan shares how you don’t have to wait for the perfect moment in business 13.03: Osmaan’s advice for worrying about what people think of us 16.27: Osmaan shares why you need to be the guide to your customers not the hero 19.36: How your experience from your previous career is still valid in your new business 22.07: How to put yourself out there 24.53: Osmaan talks about imposter syndrome 33.08: How the Rapid Transformation Formula works 36.59: How to overcome feelings of overwhelm and tiredness 41.26: How recognising your goals can help win publicity 45.36: Osmaan’s advice for when we’re putting the breaks on ourselves 50.08: How to explore negative feelings 52.28: Where to find out more about Osmaan Links mentioned in this episode: Take the quiz on Osmaan's website: http://www.rapidtransformation.co.uk/ (www.rapidtransformation.co.uk) Tune into the podcast: https://www.rapidtransformation.co.uk/podcast/ (https://www.rapidtransformation.co.uk/podcast/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of starting a small business? Or maybe you've started one recently and have chosen this episode for some wisdom? This month marks 15 years since I first went freelance and I'm sharing what I've learned and the mistakes I've made. Starting out on your own is scary, and to say running your own business is a rollercoaster doesn’t even begin to describe it! Since 2006 when I left my staff job there has been huge changes in the media, my business and my personal life too. Lots of lessons have been learned, some good, some bad, and in this podcast I’m going to explore 15 of them. It’s in the hope that you will find them helpful, it’s warts and all, and I hope it will help you avoid some of the mistakes I have made. Key timings in this episode: 0.30: Celebrating 15 years as being self employed and intro to the episode. 2.15: If it’s your first listen, do please go and check out some of the more practical ones in the links at the bottom with advice on what to do if you want to raise your pet business profile. 2.55: Why being self employed isn’t for everyone. 3.55: Why you have to put faith in yourself. 3.59: How I came to be self employed in 2006 after quitting my job on a boozy hen night. 10.14: Why social media isn’t everything and what life was like before it! 13.57: Being determined and how that will help you as an entrepreneur. 16.12: Why it’s ok to be yourself and why it took me ages to figure this out. 20.53: Why it’s important to be generous and pay it forward. 24.58: Why you shouldn’t rely on one client or one income stream. 25.14: Embracing change rather than being scared of it. 30.29: It’s ok to ask for help. 32.59: Build a community around you of people who have your back. 35.29: Work with people who share your values and who value you. 39.23: Learn how to spot the red flags. 41.40: Don’t be afraid to do things differently. 44.06: Take time off for the things that matter. 47.32: Why it’s fab to be the captain of your own ship. 49.33: How to keep in touch and how you can work with me. Links mentioned in this episode: How to use awards to get publicity for your pet business: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/kirsty-skeates-awards/ (https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/kirsty-skeates-awards/) How to pitch to podcasts: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/podcastpitch/ (https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/podcastpitch/) How to pitch to guest blogs: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/guest-blogging-pet-business/ (https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/guest-blogging-pet-business/) How to write a press release: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/ (https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/) Blogging for pet businesses: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/ (https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/) Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses) Free Publicity Challenge: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to know more about how to have an eco friendly, sustainable pet brand? Do you want to carry on doing what you love and ensure you’re caring for the environment at the same time? It can be really overwhelming considering not just your business but the planet too, there are so many things we feel like we should be doing but it’s knowing where to start. For Plastic Free July I’m speaking to Jo Baker, a sustainability expert, who is sharing everything you need to know to improve your understanding of the issue. Jo has worked with big corporate organisations advising them on how to be more sustainable and environmentally friendly. Her range of expertise covers financial sustainability, ethical sustainability and being socially sustainable covering all kinds of topics from human rights to packaging. We unpack how you can be more sustainable as a small business owner, and I’ll let you in on a secret. It’s completely manageable and don’t worry you don’t have to take the plunge and become vegan. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.21: About Jo and her business Collar Club 4.03: Jo’s sustainability background 5.17: How collar club happened 7.17: What does Collar Club look for from brands? 12.18: Greenwashing and how to avoid it 16.40: Jo talks about the Pet Sustainability coalition 18.19: Jo’s advise to smaller businesses 19.44: Jo talks about the ethics and morals of changing and how your customers will be influenced 23.04: Jo speaks about how generations influence change for values of brands 27.55: Jo shares with me her future plans for the Collar Club 29.16: What the terms biodegradable and compostable mean 31.49: Jo’s favourite sustainable brands 33.01: How does Collar Club ‘give back’? 34.58: What’s next for Collar Club? 36.10: Where to find out more about Jo Links mentioned in this episode: Collar Club http://www.collarclub.co.uk/ (www.collarclub.co.uk) Pet sustainability: https://petsustainability.org/about-psc/ (ttps://petsustainability.org/about-psc/) https://sdgs.un.org/goals (https://sdgs.un.org/goals) United Nations: https://www.un.org/en (www.un.org/en) Smug Mutts https://www.smugmutts.co.uk/ (www.smugmutts.co.uk) Beautiful Joes http://www.beautifuljoes.com (www.beautifuljoes.com)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Summer is upon us, and it may be a time where your pet business is busier than ever, or you could be experiencing a bit of a lull. After a year of unpredictable twists and turns due to the pandemic, you may be feeling a little unsure about how to make the best of the summer months ahead. If you need some inspiration about what content to create for your pet business over the summer then head to this week’s podcast. I’m sharing eleven great content topics that you can talk about in your pet business during the summer months. Plus lots of other tips on ways to boost your business as the temperatures soar. Discover why now is the perfect time to create content about your business and how you can create content that still solves your ideal clients’ problems - even if you think everyone is on holiday or your regular clients don’t need you. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19: Background to the summer hols and why it can be a challenging time, especially after 18 months of lockdown. 2.09: Summer for pet sitters, boarders and holiday cottages. 4.12: Summer for eCommerce stores and product makers. 6.15: Ideas for dog walkers, pet sitters and trainers. 7.42: Considering the needs of the young pets bought in lockdown - what can you offer to them? 8.24: Creating packages to help pets adapt to life post lockdown. 9.28: Ideas for dog boarders and daycare - can you offer something to people staying and collaborate with pet friendly holiday cottages/rentals. 12.09: Ideas for dog groomers and potential packages. 14.08: Ideas for product makers. 16.02: Using the down time to work on websites and other jobs that you might avoid. 17.00: Using the time to pitch to the media. https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/difference-between-pitch-press-release/ (What’s the difference between a pitch and a press release podcast.) 18.02: 11 summer content ideas. 29.47: Collaboration ideas for the summer. 30.24: Don’t forget to have a rest too! Links mentioned in this episode: Join my FREE Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses) WE love the https://www.moomooandbear.co.uk/products/fells-and-peaks-dog-collar-and-optional-lead-in-grey?variant=34202584613002 (Peaks and Fells print from Moo Moo and Bear here). And the https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/products/salty-sea-dog-lead (Salty Sea Dog from Leo, Charley and Me here.)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of setting up a Facebook group for your pet business? Maybe you already have one and it’s a little bit quiet so you want to get it going again? Or you’ve got a group and you’re putting loads of time and effort into it, but you’re feeling like you’re getting nothing back? Perhaps you’re worried that it’s turning into a nightmare and you’re not sure whether you want to carry on with it. Facebook groups can seem like a bit of a beast to tame sometimes, and it’s really easy to feel overwhelmed and overworked by them. That’s why I spoke to Samantha Hill, a Facebook group expert. In this episode, she shares how to set up a Facebook group, how to put rules in place and how to get the right people to join. You'll learn her secrets to how to keep people in there and keep them entertained. Plus the difference between paid and free groups and how you can make money from Facebook groups. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.19: Who is Samantha and what you will learn in this episode 2.04: Samantha’s background 2.58: What type of clients Samantha supports as a community manager 3.39: The difference between a facebook group and page 5.07: What are Facebook groups good for? 5:35: What are Facebook groups good for? 6:31: Why it’s important for product pages to have a Facebook page 8:24: When does having a group work for pet businesses and examples of pet businesses with groups 11:04: What if you’re starting your group from scratch? 12.59: Facebook group rules and how to use them 14.14: What rules should you include for your group? 15.15: What if someone breaks the rules? 18:07: How to get conversation going in the group? 19.48: What makes a group a community? 21:00: How to make sure you don’t give all your time to Facebook 22.41: Samantha’s advice on free and paid for groups 26.09: How pop up groups can be used for sales 30.14: What else do you get from Facebook Groups? 31.56: When is it time to say goodbye to your group? 35.03: Samantha shares her most exciting Facebook group moment 37:00: How can Samantha help you and where to find her Links mentioned in this episode: Sam's website: http://www.samanthajhill.co.uk (www.samanthajhill.co.uk) Find her on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/samantha_j_hill/ (https://www.instagram.com/samantha_j_hill/) Follow her on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/sjhillsocial (https://www.facebook.com/sjhillsocial) Check out her Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/theCommunityLoungeuk (https://www.facebook.com/groups/theCommunityLoungeuk)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is creating regular content for your pet business something you would like to focus on? Maybe you’ve tried a blog, vlog or podcast but haven’t felt it’s worked for you. You’ve put the effort in but maybe ground to a halt because it didn’t feel like it was worth it? If you’re nodding your head, then this podcast episode can help you get on track. We’ll cover why content can help our small businesses reach more people. Plus how to come up with content ideas that will be worthwhile creating, and lots of examples of petpreneurs who have used their content to win clients and make sales. Key timings and topics in this episode: 1.57: The lightbulb moment I had on a client 1-1 about how pet business websites can miss the mark with content. 3.59: How content works 4.12: Tim Kitchen Cameron's book - https://amzn.to/3gXi7nV (How to get to the top of Google) 5.12: Consider what people would put into Google to find you 6.08: Why creating content that doesn’t fit with your service or product is a waste of time. 6.34: How to use your time effectively when you create content. 7.09: Using your content to explain processes and things clients need to know. 8.15: Step One - Choose your keywords 10.25: Step Two - Put your keywords into titles 14.19: Step Three - Share that content 14.57: Why we shouldn’t be afraid to keep sharing our content. 20.27: Examples of pet business owners who have nailed their content strategy 22.05: Has this made you rethink your content strategy? 22.08: Keep in touch in the Publicity for Pet Businesses Facebook group Links mentioned in this episode: Tim Kitchen-Cameron - How to get to the top of Google - https://amzn.to/3gXi7nV (Buy on Amazon* )(affiliate link) Michelle Burgess from Scruffy Little Terrier: https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/ (www.scruffylittleterrier.com/) Nadia Sidebottom from Moo Moo and Bear: https://www.moomooandbear.co.uk/ (www.moomooandbear.co.uk/) Katie Gwilt at The Kat Lady: https://thekatlady.co.uk/ (www.thekatlady.co.uk/) Rowan Williams at Pooch and Pineapple: https://www.poochandpineapple.com/ (www.poochandpineapple.com/) Vicky Gunn at Millies Beach Huts and Millies Pet Services: https://milliesbeachhuts.co.uk/ (www.milliesbeachhuts.co.uk/) https://milliespetservices.co.uk/ (www.milliespetservices.co.uk) Listen to my interview with https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/vicky-gunn/ (Vicky on working with influencers and journalists here). Keep in touch in the https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (Publicity for Pet Businesses Facebook group)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you want to use Linkedin to attract more clients to your pet business? Maybe you’ve heard of it but don’t have a clue how to use it? Perhaps you have seen other businesses getting wins from LinkedIn but you don’t know where to start? It can seem scary adding another social channel string to our bow as a small business. So that’s why I spoke to the queen of LinkedIn, Helen Pritchard, to find out how you can use it to attract clients and make sales in your pet business. Helen has helped thousands of small business owners master LinkedIn through her free five day challenges and Mastermind programme. She shares how to apply her success formula to the pet industry, from blinged up Chihuahuas to becoming the most sought after pet professional in your town. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0:18: Introduction 1:56: About Helen 4:05: How Helen’s marriage breakdown and a career change led to her finding her passion 6:23: Helen’s reflexology work inspired her social media career 10:07: Why Helen chose LinkedIn as a platform to focus on 11:52: How localising her LinkedIn helped businesses connect with her 13:43: How product providers and service providers can use LinkedIn 14:44: How it works well for local service providers like dog walkers 20:35: Business and pricing advice from Helen 23:23: Helen answers whether we should be talking about our pets on Linkedin 25:34: Helen’s tips for LinkedIn 28:55: Helen shares her advice for attracting more money to your pet business 31:08: How can a product based business benefit from LinkedIn 37:20: How being niche helps your business grow 39.20: Who to follow on LinkedIn? 41:09: Connecting with journalists on LinkedIn 41:38: How Helen’s challenge helped Paul Green get on the BBC 43:08: How Helen raised her own profile 45:50: Helen explains how giving her expertise away freely has helped her business grow 49:00: How talking about your whole business journey can help create content 52:00: Where you can find out more about Helen Links mentioned in this episode: Helen's programme - find out more here: https://getleadsfromlinkedin.com/evergreen/ (https://getleadsfromlinkedin.com/evergreen/) LinkedIn: www.uk.linkedin.com/in/helenpritchard Free LinkedIn Marketing Facebook Group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/groupforlinkedinmarketing (https://www.facebook.com/groups/groupforlinkedinmarketing) Facebook: www.facebook.com/LinkedInLeadGen Instagram: www.instagram.com/helenpritchardonline Website: www.helenpritchardonline.com/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you ever posted something online either on your website or social media only for people in your industry to lash out? Maybe you’ve shared some advice for the customers or community you serve only to be torn apart by a competitor. Putting yourself out there, and putting your content out there, is brave. We are vulnerable, because although we come from a place of trying to be helpful, there is that fear that someone will tear us down. It can make you want to hide away and knock your confidence which impacts on your business and on you emotionally. In this episode I talk about ways to cope with negativity and how you can bounce back. There are case studies, links to expert advice and lots more. If you enjoy this episode, or if you have any suggestions, please do let me know. Come and join my free Facebook community at: Or find me on social media @rachelspenceruk on all channels. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.36: Intro to the episode theme and what it's like to be called out online. 2.00: Why it’s brave to put yourself out there. 3.05: How it took me nearly four years to start putting content out there about my area of expertise. 4.27: How It’s Not For You has become the stock answer for when people criticise you online. 6.38: Who experiences criticism online? 7.17: The imposter syndrome Imp, how we all experience it in different ways and Rosie Gilderthorp’s expert advice on this. 9.39: Case Study Ali Smith from Rebarkable. 11.25: The reasons why people feel the need to lash out. 13.20: My personal experience of being attacked online earlier this year. 15.15: How the experience made me question myself and hide away. 15.56: The impact of being put down or attacked online. 17.49: How imposter syndrome effects everyone, even people who you look up to. 19.26: Natasha Courtenay Smith post from LinkedIn on Imposter Syndrome. 20.39: Why we must keep getting back on the horse! 20.48: Case study Kim O’Donnell and Claire Lawrence. 23.45: Case study Angela Day 27.19: Why criticism always sounds 10 times louder than positive feedback. 28.38: How being part of a community can help you feel more supported. 29.58: Keeping a win folder for lifting yourself up. 31.29: Where to keep in touch. Links mentioned in this episode: Rosie Gilderthorp - listen to her podcast on https://podcasts.apple.com/gb/podcast/dealing-imposter-syndrome-for-psychologists-therapists/id1503339622?i=1000521675720 (Imposter Syndrome here). Ali Smith - visit her online puppy training website https://rebarkable.com/ (Rebarkable.com) Natasha Courtenay Smith - visit her website https://natashacourtenaysmith.com/ (Natasha Courtenay Smith) Learn more about Claire Lawrence - https://highpeakdogservices.co.uk/ (High Peak Dogs) Learn more about Angela Day - https://borntorun.org.uk/ (Born2Run) If you enjoyed this podcast, you might like to listen to https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/sarah-baxter/ (How to create a positive mindset with Sarah Baxter) or https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/writewithconfidence/ (How to create content if you're not a confident writer) Read an honest review of https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/review-janet-murray-build-your-online-audience-programme/ (Janet Murray's Build Your Online Audience) programme.
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you ever worry about putting information into the public domain as a pet business owner? Perhaps you might be put off sharing advice in case something happens or someone takes exception to what you've said? This week I'm chatting to insurance expert Catherine France about things we need to consider when we're publishing content. Having insurance for your blog could really help get you out of tricky legal situations if they were to ever occur. In this episode Catherine provides a no nonsense approach to insurance, giving those who seek her help information, knowledge and confidence. Catherine has 20 years’ insurance industry experience with an impressive track record working within high profile businesses. She has a passion for sharing her experience to guide small businesses and empower them into understanding insurance so that they can get their head around it and focus on running their business. Catherine shares down to earth advice, and we reflect on cases where people didn’t have insurance to show the worst case scenario and to help make sure that doesn’t happen to you! If your mind gets foggy as soon as insurance is mentioned and you’re not sure whether you should be insuring your online content then this episode is for you. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2:00: Catherine’s background 2:40: Do you need insurance as a blogger? 3:17: How insurance works and why you need it as a small business 5:11: The risks about putting things in the public domain 6:10: What problems can arise 6:45: Defamation and how it could happen 6:59: Copyright Infringement explained 7:37: Confidential information risks 8:15: Why it’s a legal minefield 9:31: Real life case study Facebook legal case 10:33: What you can do to check your posts before you hit publish 12:00: Facebook posts can spread faster than blog posts 12:56: Sally Bercow, the Speaker John Bercow's wife who shared legal information on twitter 13.47: Don’t panic and think you need to stop publishing 15:30: What do pet businesses need to consider in their policy 17:38: What to say to your existing policy 19:15: Product companies and insurance 21:12: What if someone makes a claim against you? 22:10: Steps you can put in place to protect your blog 24.50: Advice Catherine offers on her website 28:00: What changes have occurred in insurance when service providers go online 29.48: Catherine talks about the special priced live advice call she is offering to listeners Links mentioned in this episode: Offering: LINK TBC Website - https://www.catherinefrance.com/ (https://www.catherinefrance.com/) Instagram - https://www.instagram.com/catherinefranceuk/ (https://www.instagram.com/catherinefranceuk/) LinkedIn - https://www.linkedin.com/in/catherine-france/ (https://www.linkedin.com/in/catherine-france/) Twitter - https://twitter.com/CathFrance (https://twitter.com/CathFrance) Facebook - https://www.facebook.com/insurancecatherine (https://www.facebook.com/insurancecatherine)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
There has never been a better time if you have a service or product for pet owners. Did you know a huge £3.7 BILLION was spent on dog treats, toys and accessories alone last year? (This is according to Le Chameu research) We’ve bought 3.2 million pets in the last 15 months since lockdown began and owners need services and products. (Figures from PFMA) The dog population has shot up from 9 million in 2019 to 12.5 million in 2021. A third of homes in the UK have a dog. The cat population has increase from 7.5 million to 12.2 million with 27 per cent of homes having a feline family member. This week I did a FREE training in my Facebook group with Rosie Robinson, a pet business website expert, on how to help pet parents find you online. And if you would like more support over the next few weeks, you can join in the Get Your Pet Business Found on Google. It's £197 for four weeks of live training and you can find out more here: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/ (Get Your Pet Business Found on Google) If you didn’t make it live, you can listen in here. Key topics and timings in this episode: 6.33 - How Google My Business works for a local service business 8.46: Why local service providers should be using GMB daily as they would Facebook or other platforms 10.45: Ideas on how to use GMB 12.35: Stats on spending in the pet industry 17.17: Tips on coming up with content ideas to get your pet products found 18.52: How to use questions to bring people to your content and why blogging isn’t dead or a waste of time 10.44: What kind of content dog walkers should be posting and how they can be responsive to what’s happening right now 23.24: Think of your clients when you’re posting and not other pet professionals 25.16: How Rosie fills her daycare and boarding business without using social media 30.10: Geographical content explained 35.10: Quick ways to create content if you’re time poor Check out this podcast with content made easy tools 37.44: Why your blog doesn’t have to be 3000 words 39.25: Using your website content to share and be helpful in Facebook groups particularly community ones 43.05: The Get Found on Google programme and what’s included 47.35: Q and A Links mentioned in this episode: The course: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/ (Get Your Pet Business Found on Google) Rosie and I will be teaching this live for the next four weeks and here’s the breakdown of what’s included: June 7th 5pm How Google Works. Maybe you’ve looked at SEO, got bamboozled and put it on the backburner. Have no fear, by the end of this session you’ll know how to organise your website into sections to make it easy to get found, and to fill out the fiddly bits to ensure your content is optimised. June 14th 5pm Content Made Simple We’ll explore the kind of content to create to get found on Google and easy ways to write it. It can be scary putting your words out there - many of us carry hang ups from school. You’ll learn how to come up with content ideas and how to use templates to write posts quickly and confidently. June 21st 5pm Get Visible You’ve done the hard work, now it’s time to amplify your content and get eyes on your pet business. We’ll explore the many ways you can share your content without feeling spammy and make sure each post is optimised for search engines. We’ll cover design and image sizing, the little details that will make readers keep coming back. BREAK FOR A WEEK July 5th 5pm Make It Happen Implement everything you’ve learned to come up with your content plan for the next 12 months. Make sure you hit your goals and get your business under the noses of pet parents – there’s 3.2 million people who bought pets in lockdown. We’ll go through the key dates and events taking place plus what’s happening in your business to create a content plan for the next year with all your subject...
Would you love to be more consistent with your pet business content marketing? Perhaps you find it time consuming and it drops to the bottom of the to do list? If that's the case this week's podcast episode is for you whether you're looking to work on a blog, vlog or podcast. It's a rundown of apps, tools and software you can use to make life easier for yourself. From transcribing videos and audio files to finding the right images in seconds, to hosting all your important stuff like lead magnets, e mail marketing and sign up pages, this episode will help you overcome your content creation challenges. If conquering content is something you'd like some accountability for, then the Get Your Pet Business Found on Google course is happening in June too. It's four weeks of live training, and you can find out more here. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.30: Learn about tools and apps to help with content creation 0.58: How you can join the Get Your Pet Business Found on Google course if you’d like to brush up on your content. 2.40: How nothing ‘works or doesn’t work,' people make platforms work for them by working on them. 3.12: How you can learn about Getting Your Business Found on Google in a free Facebook live on June 1st 7pm. 4.11: Breakdown of the tools and how they work. 4.12: How Otter.ai transcription works. 5.22: How the Rev.com transcription service works. 8.20: Using Kapwing to add captions onto your videos. 9.43: Using Canva for graphics, infographics, workbooks, e books and much more. 9.51: Gemma Cormack - Canva expert and how she has helped me! 11.21: Why I use Alison from House of Henry graphic design for workbooks and PDFS. 12.15: Dropbox and how you can use this for storage and sending images. 15.40: WeTransfer and how you can use this for storage and sending images. 17.55: Grammarly and how this can help you build confidence in writing. 18.51: Finding images for your blogs with Pixabay and Unsplash. 19.56: Paying for images from Shuttershock if you have a special image you want to use. 21.12: Using Kajabi for hosting lead magnets, sign up pages and links from blog posts. 22.40: How blogging and publishing regular core content on your website can help you get found. 22.45: Why you still need to put words on your website if your core content is a video or podcast. 23.44: Examples of pet business owners and tangible results they’ve had from their core content. Links mentioned in this episode: Sign up for the https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/ (Get Found on Google) course here. http://www.otter.ai (www.otter.ai) www.rev.com Get $10 off your first order with http://try.rev.com/3q8vcd (my referral link here). www.canva.com www.dropbox.com www.wetransfer.com/ www.kapwing.com www.grammarly.com http://www.pixabay.com (www.pixabay.com) http://www.unsplash.com (www.unsplash.com) www.shutterstock.com https://app.kajabi.com/r/o62vfuYc/t/4zqlrygg (www.kajabi.com)* https://www.gemmacormack.com/ (Gemma Cormack) https://www.houseofhenry.uk/ (House of Henry ) https://www.moomooandbear.co.uk/ (Moo Moo and Bear) https://www.poochandpineapple.com/ (Pooch and Pineapple photography) https://rebarkable.com/ (https://rebarkable.com/) www.emilyscaninecrew.co.uk/
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
This week I'm chatting to Carol Ashworth who has 40 years experience as a dog trainer. Carol runs the Walkabout Way and the Walkabout Academy, a mentoring programme for aspiring dog trainers and owners who want to learn how to train their dog. She has been in the industry before the internet, social media and all the fancy things we have today. And in this episode she talks about how to get your pet business out there in as many ways as possible. From having a sign outside your house to running online workshops and being on the local news - Carol has done them all. Carol is such a lovely lady and is doing her bit to help pet professionals who want to upskill and become trainers. She's holding a workshop on June 12th and you can contact her via her website here to find out more. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.53 - Carol’s background as a dog trainer for over 40 years. 2.37 - Her love of German Shepherds - she’s had 32! 4.10 - Her work as a German Shepherd specialist 4.50 - Carol’s work with street dogs and supporting Give A Dog A Home 7.02 - The joys of working with street dogs and seeing them in happy homes 8.50 - Carol’s biggest piece of advice, talk and listen to people 9.00 - How Carol had to get her business out there before computers and social media, what she did and why it’s important to talk to people 12.01 - The different media Carol uses to reach people 16.42 - About the Walkabout Academy 20.04 - How lockdown has impacted on her business 23.58 - How blogging helped Carol get inquiries as it meant she’d already broken down barriers from them reading her content 30.29 - Why it’s important to be generous with your knowledge 32.38 - How building relationships with other pet businesses through her content which has led to referrals 36.27 - How a range of things work when it comes to publicity. 40.40 - Carol’s advice for anyone who is feeling nervous about putting themselves out there Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more by e mailing carol@walkabout.academy Or contact her on her website https://www.walkabout.academy/contact (www.walkabout.academy/contact) If Carol's story has inspired you to start blogging, the Get Your Pet Business Found on Google course starts June 7th. Click https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/ (here to find out more).
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Two weeks ago I did my Pet Business Publicity challenge and already one of the members, dog behaviourist Rachael Claire, has secured a guest blogging role for a huge pet brand. It means her name is in front of 40,000 people on social media, really raising her profile as a dog behaviourist. Guest blogging can be the first step in getting your name out there on platforms that aren't your own. It's a nice way to lead into pitching to newspapers and magazines and a way pet business owners can collaborate so they reach more people. In this episode I'm talking about guest blogging and how to get started, and here is a downloadable guide to help you with outreach. Key topics and timings in this episode: 1.00 - Results from the publicity challenge 5.01 - Why guest blogging can help you in your pet business 6.40 - What is guest blogging 7.20 - How being featured on other sites can build trust in your business 9.20 - How to find places to offer guest content to 11.50 - What kind of things to cover in a guest blog 16.26 - How long should a guest blog be? 18.11 - How to make sure you get eyes on your guest content 20.45 - How guest blogging can position you as an expert 23.05 - What to do if you want to pitch to a podcast - https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/podcastpitch/ (Full episode here) 24.03 - Why you should try to build a relationship before you pitch Links mentioned in this episode: Download the pitching template: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/podcastpitch/ (Guest blogs and podcast) Learn more about Rachael on her website here https://www.rachaelclairedogbehaviour.co.uk/ (Rachael Claire dog training). Find out more about the Get Found On Google course starting in June: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/ (Get your pet business found on Google)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
When Justine Williams left the RSPCA she decided she wanted to have a greater understanding of why people give up their pets. Having worked in the communications and campaigns department, she'd tried to make sense of the huge problem of dogs being abandoned. Before she had her children, she remembered turning to Mumsnet for help on what to expert and how to adjust her lifestyle. And as a new mum, she spent many a time in the small hours getting advice on forums. Justine realised there wasn't anything similar for puppy owners, or new dog owners. So she studied human behaviour change and decided to create Our Family Dog, a website and community supporting new pet parents. Launched just before lockdown at the end of 2019, the site has grown hugely and in this episode Justine shares her story. Key timings and topics in this episode: 0.45 - Justine’s background and Our Family Dog. 1.30 - Justine’s work at the RSPCA in animal welfare. 3.00 - Studying the relationship between impulse purchases and dogs being handed in to rescue centres. 3.30 - Realising the similarity between parenting and having a pup. 5.30 - Studying human behaviour change at the University of Derby. 8.27 - How people responded to Mumsnet for dogs! 11.06 - How people feel when they are struggling with their pets and why Justine thought it was key to focus on the owner as well as the dog. 12.14 - How Our Family Dog works. 16.18 - Why community is so important to pet parents. 17.56 - The impact of lockdown on Our Family Dog and why support is needed more than ever. 19.38 - The issues Justine is seeing and how she’s trying to provide the tools to support dogs post lockdown and why it’s important to step into their shoes. 22.02 - Justine’s concerns about dogs and where they might end up post lockdown. 24.58 - Our Family Dog’s mission to support owners as they return to normal. 26.02 - Justine’s advice for owners who need support, to find a trainer who is a member of the Association for Pet Behaviour Counsellors (APBC) accredited behaviourist and pet professionals who are in the Pet Industry Federation. (PIF) 28.40 - The importance of rewards based training. 28.22 - Justine’s mission for Our Family Dog. 31.15 - How pet professionals can work with Our Family Dog. Links mentioned in this episode: Find Justine on Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram @ourfamilydoguk Or find out more about opportunities to work with Our Family Dog here, including link sharing, affiliate partnership, and more: https://ourfamilydog.org.uk/work-with-us (www.ourfamilydog.org.uk/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Working on your own is tough and running a business can feel lonely. So being part of a community such as a group coaching programme or membership can help as you have other people to support you. They understand what it’s like to be your own boss (like never switching off) and if they’re in the same industry, they get what you do too. And this can be really important when it comes to promoting ourselves and our businesses. Putting ourselves out there can be daunting, but when you have other people around you who understand those feelings of awkwardness and who are there to support you, it can make it a lot less painful. For the last year, I’ve been running a membership programme for pet business owners helping them ‘put themselves out there’ and get publicity. At first, it was all about traditional media, but it’s grown to cover all kinds of topics around raising the profile of your business. I'm opening it again for new members to join this week and if you'd like to learn more you can do so on https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/coaching-programme (this link.) This episode is about how community of like minded people can help you become more visible. Key timings and topics in this episode: 1.30 - How business memberships have helped me in my business and what it was like being on my own beforehand. 3.19 - How the publicity for pet businesses membership came about. 4.22 - What the ethos is inside the membership and how it helps when it comes to putting yourself out there. 5.30 - The three elements of the membership, the live classes, the membership portal and the Facebook community. 7.55 - The publicity foundations sessions and how they help you set yourself up for PR success. 8.54 - Why you need to have the foundations in place if you want to build authority as an expert. 10.00 - The publicity spotlight programme and how that works by helping pet businesses get featured in newspapers, magazine, TV, radio and websites. 12.02 - The publicity roadmap and how they fit together. 12.46 - Monthly Q and A sessions and how they work. 13.05 - Why I teach the sessions live - only 15 per cent of online courses get finished. 14.05 - What the programme sets out to achieve - to take people from feeling unsure about whether they could get publicity to confidently approaching journalists and having pitches accepted. 15.40 - How Karen Rhodes made her investment in the membership back ten fold - she featured in GQ. 16.40 - How business is passed around in the membership (not like BNI) but where people buy each other's products, or use their services, for example Rikki Sullivan as a Canine Copywriter, photographers Kerry Jordan, Nigel Ord Smith and Rowan Williams, and Kate Taylor's dog friendly directory Dotty4Paws. 18.24 - How a session inspired the Twitter chat hour Petworking Hour which has connected founders Kerry Jordan and Jeni Morris with people all over the world. 18.52 - How the community has raised the profile of DoggyLottery for Lisette Van Riel and K9Nation for Becky Baker and members have invested in her app. 20.34 - Results from the founder member's survey. 20.40 - Why people join - 62 per cent joined because they wanted to learn about media coverage, 47 per cent said they weren't visible enough, 43 per cent didn’t feel comfortable promoting their business and 38 per cent said they joined because they wanted to know more about content. 21.09 - Has it raised your profile? 42 per cent of respondents said that being in the membership had raise their profile and that this had impacted on sales. 43 per cent said it had raised their profile. Only nine per cent responded with ‘maybe’ 21.42 - Most helpful element. Live calls were top at 67 per cent. 52 per cent said support and contacts in the Facebook group, a third said the membership portal. 22.24 - Most helpful module.‘Writing pitches and press releases’ was 81 per cent, followed ‘finding stories in your pet business’ at 52 per cent,...
You can't help but be moved when you hear of the plight of rescue centres across the UK who are struggling for funding. And when Lisette Van Riel lost her job at the start of lockdown she decided she wanted to take action to support shelters. She’d been working in marketing and after adopting her dog Beautie from a shelter in Dubai, she started researching about the situations dogs in rescues faced. Heartbroken at the lack of funding and the many thousands of dogs needing homes, she teamed up with her cousin Lee Brown and founded DoggyLottery. That was back in July 2020 and since then DoggyLottery has raised £19,000 and helped 45 small, independent rescues across the UK. Lisette has worked so hard on raising the profile of DoggyLottery so they can help more dogs and in this episode she shares lots of information on how to secure publicity. From knock backs to winning awards from Theo Paphitis, Lisette has so much determination and what she's doing is incredible. Key timings and topics in this episode: 2.14 - Lisette’s background in marketing before she decided to set up DoggyLottery 3.21 - How working at the Animal Action shelter led Lisette to adopt Beautie 5.01 - Researching the issues faced by rescue dogs and how that made Lisette want to make a change 5.18 - Coming up with the idea for DoggyLottery with her cousin Lee Brown 7.39 - Bringing Beautie back from Dubai and what life is like for her now in the UK 10.38 - Making DoggyLottery a reality and how Lisette worked full time and on her not-for-profit in every spare moment 12.33 - How DoggyLottery works - 60 per cent into a charity fund, 30 per cent into the prize fund and the remaining funds go on running costs 14.49 - Why rescues need so much support at the moment particularly after the pandemic 15.01 - How lots of the funding goes towards vet bills, neutering 16.14 - Some of the challenges Lisette and Lee faced at the beginning - particularly as a non-profit trying to raise money they still fall under gambling laws 17.21 - Why it was even a struggle to get rescues on board at the beginning 18.14 - Some of the heartwarming stories from the rescues 20.13 - How Lisette has raised £19,000 for 45 rescues 20.45 - How Lisette went about getting the DoggyLottery message out there on social media, particularly on Facebook 24.11 - Appearing in the Yorkshire Post, Pet Gazette, The Dogvine and other titles and the impact on fundraising 25.01 - Winning Small Business Sunday with Theo Paphitis 27.05 - How Lisette coped with the knock backs when she pitched to the media and kept going 29.54 - Why it’s key to share your personal story when pitching to the media 30.21 - What’s next for DoggyLottery and Lisette’s mission to help every small rescue in the UK Links mentioned in this episode: Learn more about DoggyLottery on the website https://www.doggylottery.co.uk/ (www.doggylottery.co.uk) Lisette in the https://www.yorkshireeveningpost.co.uk/news/people/west-yorkshire-woman-raises-over-ps10000-dog-lottery-uk-charities-after-losing-job-covid-3116264 (Yorkshire Post) DoggyLottery in https://www.petgazette.biz/194182-doggylottery-wins-small-business-sunday-award/ (Pet Gazette) Lee in thehttps://www.chichester.co.uk/news/people/westbourne-mans-doggylottery-raises-ps10000-6-months-struggling-animal-rescue-shelters-3135704 ( Portsmouth News) Winning Small Business Sunday in https://www.yorkshireeveningpost.co.uk/news/people/dog-lottery-charity-fundraiser-launched-by-west-yorkshire-woman-wins-small-business-award-3156633 (Yorkshire Post)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you ever taken part in an online challenge? Or thought of doing one of your own? There are challenges for everything from fitness and weight loss to dog training and learning skills to boost your business. Particularly in lockdown there have been so many taking place online. And challenges can be a great way to get fresh eyes on your business too. In this episode I talk about seven things to consider if you're thinking of running a challenge. This episode is ahead of my free publicity for pet businesses challenge taking place live from April 26th - 30th 2021. Each day you have a task which will help you get publicity and former participants have used the challenge and been featured in newspapers, magazines, on the radio and on TV. You can sign up here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge) Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.39 - Challenges and what my publicity one is all about. 1.43 - Intro to challenges and what they're about 3.18 - Why do a challenge and how it can help your business 4.09 - Why your challenge should lead naturally to a paid product 5.18 - How to research ahead of your challenge 7.43 - Ways to get expert advice on your challenge - it's FREE! 10.11 - Why it's key not to focus on numbers and overwhelm yourself on your first challenge 12.11 - Preparing your challenge and making sure your diary is clear so you can focus on the tasks 17.11 - How cheerleaders can help you feel more confidence and create a buzz in your challenge group 20.52 - Consider having prizes in your challenge to motivate people 22.32 - Why you should show up and give your all with no expectation of anything in return 25.19 - Reflecting on my challenge experiences in the last two years 27.08 - Why you should join in the publicity challenge if getting publicity is what you'd like to do 27.28 - Keep it simple and try to enjoy your challenge Links mentioned in this episode: If you’d like to join my free publicity challenge it’s taking place on 26th - 30th April 2021, https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (you can sign up here.) Find https://www.facebook.com/bigphilharrison/ (Phil on Facebook here) Join Phil'shttps://rachelspencer.krtra.com/t/NXdTAOV7QIdT ( challenge here). (Affiliate link) Get leads from LinkedIn with https://helenpritchardonline.com/ (Helen Pritchard) Supercharge Your Website https://heyvickijakes.com/ (Vicki Jakes) Captions and subtitles - I order these from http://rev.com (rev.com) and use https://www.kapwing.com/ (Kapwing) to add them to the video. Courageous Content https://www.janetmurray.co.uk/ (Janet Murray)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to learn how to take scroll stopping photos of your pet? To celebrate having fun with your dog while attracting fans and potentially clients too? If so then you will love this episode with accidental online sensation Liz Gregg. Liz is a professional photographer and creator of the https://instagram.com/blackwhite.gold (@blackwhite.gold) Instagram account. The adventures of Elsa, Jeannie and Dolly have led to her being featured by Instagram three times and 45,000 followers. (correct at time of writing) In this episode Liz shares loads of tips on how to take better photos of your dog, her passion for sharing positive reinforcement training and how she started out in her granny’s cupboard. Key timings and topics in this episode: 0.30 - Intro to the episode and what to expect 2.22 - Intro to Liz and her background as a photographer 2.52 - Starting out with a dark room at her grandmother’s house 4.00 - How Liz would badger magazine editors to hire her as a photographer at the beginning 6.30 - The challenges of photography 20 years ago compared to now 7.10 - Why magazines don’t want overly re-touched or filtered photos 8.14 - Why it’s important for businesses have photos - and it’s tax deductible 10.05 - Why Liz loves her dogs bringing joy to people worldwide! 10.30 - How the account started with a studio shoot for Cosmopolitan on how to make your dog insta famous. 11.30 - Keeping her account fresh and taking photos each day 13.37 - About https://www.instagram.com/blackwhite.gold/ (Black White Gold) and what to expect from the account 14.00 - Liz’s mission to show how positive reinforcement helps our dogs 14.30 - How she wants to spread her message to owners in America who might use methods at odds with her training style 17.29 - How Dolly and Elsa are showing how senior dogs can be healthy and have fun 19.31 - Educating people about how older dogs can play safely with balls and enjoy games while supporting joints 21.45 - What people like about the account - the dogs happy and having fun 22.45 - Being real and the dogs being real and why this makes her account relatable 26.00 - How Liz got featured by Instagram and 1 million likes 29.33 - How Liz uses tricks to get brilliant photos 30.18 - Silvia Trickman training and how Liz followed the http://www.lolabuland.com/ (Lolabuland) method 32.04 - Why you shouldn’t make your dog sit to get great photos but use toys! 33.51 - Be fun with your dog 37.22 - How tricks can help recall 38.49 - Liz’s Snap Catch photos and how to do them 43.18 - About the Snap Catch tour and how you can get involved 47.03 - How it works on a shoot with Liz 48.48 - Working with dogs with challenging personalities 50.00 - How Liz works with dogs who aren’t confident at first to reassure them 54.02 - Working with older dogs 56.43 - Where to find out more about Liz and how to get in touch Links mentioned in this episode: Liz's website: https://www.photosbylizzie.co.uk/snap-catch (www.photosbylizzie.co.uk) Liz's Instagram account: https://www.instagram.com/blackwhite.gold/ (www.instagram.com/blackwhite.gold/) Silvia Trickman's website: http://www.lolabuland.com/ (www.lolabuland.com/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you thought of hiring a PR company to help raise the profile of your pet business? Maybe you've thought about how you'd like to get publicity, so for your product or service to be featured in newspapers, magazines, on the radio or TV but felt unsure of how to go about it. If that's the case, then you may have considered hiring a PR company or consultant to help you achieve this. But there are lots of things you can do as a small business owner to get publicity on your own. You don't need to hire anyone to do it for you. It just takes a little research and strategy and you can learn how to approach journalists and give them what they want. In this episode I cover the differences between using a PR company to promote your business versus learning how to get publicity for yourself. Plus the pros and cons of both options so you can make a decision that's right for you. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.30 - Introduction to the episode and why I'm talking about the two options 2.15 - Remember - getting publicity doesn't have to cost you a penny! 2.26 - My background - in case you’ve stumbled across the episode and aren’t a regular listener! 4.06 - How it works with hiring a PR firm or doing it yourself 5.45 - The cost involved for both options 6.52 - Examples of pet businesses who have secured publicity for free - Joe Collings and Rachel Rodgers 7.58 - My DIY programme and when the next launch is (may 2021) 8.36 - Time and the difference between hiring someone to do your PR and doing it yourself 9.51 - Generating ideas for stories and the difference between hiring someone to do your PR and doing it yourself 14.30 - Finding publicity opportunities and the difference between hiring someone to do your PR and doing it yourself 19.32 - Dealing with journalists and the difference between hiring someone to do your PR and doing it yourself 22.50 - What happens in a crisis and the difference between hiring someone to do your PR and doing it yourself 26.26 - Developing skills to promote your business and the difference between hiring someone to do your PR and doing it yourself 29.19 - Your PR goals and the difference between hiring someone to do your PR and doing it yourself 31.31 - Social media and the difference between hiring someone to do your PR and doing it yourself 32.57 - Pros and cons of both options 36.19 - Why it’s important to find a PR company with a proven track record of dealing with pet businesses 39.40 - Book recommendations Links mentioned in this episode: Pay per result firm https://www.sanity-marketing.com/ (Sanity Marketing) - find out more https://www.sanity-marketing.com/ (here). https://writeontime.co.uk/ (Write On Time) is run by former journalists Christian and Michelle Ewan where you pay them to write a press release and put it out for you to suitable publications. The cost for this is £549 and you can https://writeontime.co.uk/ (find out more here). Books on publicity - I would recommend the following: Your Press Release is breaking my heart by Janet Murray - https://amzn.to/3wf4zuD (buy here on Amazon). Hype Yourself by Lucy Werner - https://amzn.to/3wf4zuD (buy here on Amazon). PR School by Natalie Trice - https://amzn.to/3wf4zuD (buy here on Amazon). Publicity Tips for Pet Businesses by ME! - https://amzn.to/2PEPBgK (buy here on Amazon). Listen or read the interview with Jill Foster, co-founder of FeatureMe here. https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/press-coverage-facebook-groups/ (How to win press coverage from Facebook Groups with Jill Foster) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/karen-boyce/ (How Karen secured more than 30 pieces of publicity in a year). You can book in for ahttps://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/power-hour/ ( Power Hour here.) If you’d like recommendations on PR companies who have a track record in helping pet businesses get coverage, do feel...
Is being an ‘Award Winning’ pet business a goal you’d like to achieve? Have you seen your colleagues celebrating after winning and wonder how they go about it? Or maybe you feel a bit weird nominating yourself for a gong? If the answer’s yes then then you will love this interview with the Queen of Awards, Kirsty Skeates from Fit4Dogs Hydrotherapy centre in Hull. I first met Kirsty two years ago when she was on a mission to win Theo Paphitis’ Small Business Sunday - which she achieved. Since then she’s gone on to win and be shortlisted for dozens of other awards, raising her profile as a small business. In this episode she shares everything you need to know about awards from how to find ones to enter to filling out your application to press releases after winning. Key timings and topics in this episode: 2.19 - Kirsty's background at Fit4Dogs. 3.35 - The late entrepreneur Damien Lee and how he inspired Kirsty to start looking into awards. 5.24 - Why Kirsty books power hours to work on her awards applications. 6.17 - Applying for awards and how it's not about you, it's about your clients and demonstrating how you give value and why you should win. 7.33 - Why publicity was Kirsty's goal when she first started winning awards and how she used them to connect and build relationships with journalists. 9.39 - How winning Small Business Saturday meant she had a huge PR team supporting her and raising her profile. 10.38 - Why just being nominated in the top ten is still a huge achievement and can lead to opportunities, networking and connecting with the media. 11.45 - How awards can keep you front of mind with journalists. 15.58 - The benefits of local business awards. 18.12 - How COVID has impacted on Kirsty's business. 20.51 - Why you shouldn't get disheartened if you don't win straight away. 22.35 - Kirsty's advice for people who are feeling nervous about applying for awards. 23.53 - Why you can nominate yourself for an award. 25.07 - How you can get your customers to nominate you for awards - you have to TELL THEM! 29.07 - Expensive awards and what to do if you're asked to pay for an award. 32.34 - How to research awards to find out if they're credible. 36.14 - How customers respond when you're an award winning business. 37.51 - The awards Kirsty would love to win. 39.45 - What's next for Fit4Dogs Links mentioned in this episode: Kirsty's website: https://www.fit4dogsuk.com/ (www.fit4dogsuk.com/) Kirsty's SBS win: http://www.hu17.net/2019/05/10/canine-hydrotherapy-centre/ (http://www.hu17.net/2019/05/10/canine-hydrotherapy-centre/) Kirsty's nomination for Animal Star Awards: http://www.hu17.net/2021/03/05/vet-nurse-hydrotherapist-named-as-finalist-in-the-animal-start-awards/ (www.hu17.net/2021/03/05/vet-nurse-hydrotherapist-named-as-finalist-in-the-animal-start-awards/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Want to hear tips from pet business owners on how they put themselves in the spotlight? To celebrate the first year of the podcast, I've rounded up ten of my guests to share their publicity tips. Rather than me waffling on, they reveal what they did to get media coverage. The tips in this episode are gold and come straight from the petpreneur's mouth! So I hope you enjoy it and thank you to Becky, Claire, Dominic, Helen, Julie, Karen B, Karen M, Kerry, Kim and Suzanne. Key timings in this episode: 0.18 - Intro and what it was like launching a podcast in lockdown 2.15 - Changing the first episodes to make them relevant and helpful when pet business owners were struggling to know what to say 3.05 - How the podcast led to me launching a membership programme 6.03 - Becky Baker from https://k9nation.dog/ (K9Nation) 6.54 - Claire Lawrence from https://highpeakdogservices.co.uk/ (High Peak Dog Services) 7.57 - Dominic Hodgson from https://www.packleaderuk.com/ (Pack Leader Dog Adventures) and https://www.growyourpetbusinessfast.com/ (Grow Your Pet Business Fast) 9.02 - Helen Motteram from https://www.socialpawscheltenham.co.uk/ (Social Paws) and https://www.petpronetwork.com/ (Pet Professional Network) 10.41 - Julie Maxted from https://www.dog-g8.com/ (Dog-G8) 11.20 - Karen Boyce from https://www.beastlythoughts.co.uk/ (Beastly Thoughts) 12.03 - Karen Maher from https://www.maherandhounddogtraining.com/ (Maher and Hound) 13.18 - Kerry Jordan from https://www.furandfables.com/ (Fur and Fables ) 14.00 - Kim O'Donnell from https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/ (Leo, Charley and Me) 15.16 - Suzanne Gould from https://edinburghholisticdogs.co.uk/ (Edinburgh Holistic Dogs) 17.20 - Thanks to everyone who has supported the podcast 18.20 - Where to go if you'd like to stay in touch - Free Facebook Group 19.00. - How to work together in the membership programme Links mentioned in this episode: Free Facebook group - https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (Publicity Tips for Pet Businesses) For all the episodes from the guests in this session visit www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk Find out about my https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Publicitymembership (membership programme )here
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you worry about how you sound when you write about your pet business? Maybe you feel too formal or are concerned you don't sound 'professional' enough? As a pet business owner you have to wear so many different hats and it can feel overwhelming having to create content and put yourself 'out there.' In this episode Rikki Sullivan - the Canine Copywriter - shares how to overcome any anxieties you might have around this. Key topics and timings in this episode: 0.18 - Intro to Rikki 1.40 - Rikki’s background and her experience in the pet industry 2.20 - How Rikki left her corporate job to become a dog walker and launch a daycare business 5.16 - Why blogging is seen as the ‘Boring uncle’ of the promotion world 6.37 - How blogging helped Rikki build a waitlist of clients who wanted her to care for their pets 8.32 - What puts people off blogging 9.05 - Why your writing voice should be as close to your personal voice as possible 11.32 - How to get started with blogging and why you shouldn’t worry about being rubbish at first 12.02 - How a ‘brain dump’ can get you into the flow of writing 13.30 - Why you don’t need to fret about the structure at the beginning 15.19 - Writing in layman’s terms and avoiding jargon 17.14 - Why it’s important to write for your clients, not for your peers 18.26 - How the pandemic has made it more important than ever to stand out 21.02 - Speaking in your own authentic voice 22.03 - How your friends and clients can help when it comes to finding your voice 23.55 - Example - Canicross business 27.05 - Getting friends to check your content and how tools like Grammarly can help 28.02 - Sharing you own experiences to build confidence in your writing 32.10 - Finding people to collaborate with in my free Facebook group 34.34 - Being accountable with your content and pledging to post regularly 35.58 - Outsourcing and how to brief a copywriter 40.59 - How to find out more about Rikki Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about Rikki at https://www.thecaninecopywriter.co.uk/ (www.thecaninecopywriter.co.uk/) Free website for checking Grammar - https://www.grammarly.com/ (www.grammarly.com/) My free Facebook group - https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (Publicity Tips for Pet Businesses )
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you thought about collaborating with other pet businesses? Working together with other pet professionals is a way to get the word out about what you do and attract more clients. Plus you get to reach a whole new audience and by bringing fresh faces, views and voices to your own marketing materials. In this episode I’m going to cover seven ways collaborating can help you promote your pet business. Plus there are lots of examples from clients in my membership community to show how it's done. Key timings and topics in this episode: 0.00 - Details on https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/masterclasses/ (Awareness Day class) on March 5th for £27. 1.45 - What is a collaboration? 2.15 - Examples of recent collaborations in my membership community. Why collaborating can help you 8.25 - You can position yourself as an expert 9.20 - You reach a different audience 10.13 - You build links on Google For more on this check out https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/why-blogging-can-help-your-pet-business/ (How to get started with blogging for your pet business) or https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-pet-business-found-on-google-rosie-robinson/ (How to get your pet business found on Google with Rosie Robinson.) 11.54 - How these links can help when appraoching journalists as an expert 14.30 - You can build partnerships and relationships with vets and other pet businesses 15.22 - You create fresh and exciting content 17.02 - It shows you give a stuff about your customers or audience 17.35 - You build a team of cheerleaders 21.30 - If you’re looking for people to collaborate with and you’re not there already, do come and join my free https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (Facebook group, Publicity for Pet Businesses.) Links mentioned in this episode: https://k9trailtime.wordpress.com/2021/02/15/how-to-stay-injury-free-whilst-canicrossing-by-louise-humphrey/ (How to stay injury free when doing Canicross) - Louise Humphrey and Emily Thomas https://www.bellascollars.co.uk/blogs/news/my-experience-with-my-own-anxious-dog-bella (My experience with anxious dog Bella) - Sarah Jones and Suzanne Gould https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/masterclasses/ (Awareness Day class) on March 5th for £27. https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/pet-product-review/best-compostable-poo-bags-for-dogs/ (Best compostable poo bags for dogs) - Me and Rikki Sullivan
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to work with an influencer but feel unsure as to how to go about it? Well are you in for a treat because this week on the podcast Vicky Gunn from Millie's Beach Huts is talking about her visit from Mrs Hinch. In this episode Vicky shares her tips on content marketing, publicity and working with influencers and how it can help you as a pet business owner. As well as the visit from Charlotte Hinchcliffe, the UK's most famous cleanfluencer Vicky has been in newspapers and on websites around the world and is currently on a BBC2 show with Alan Carr. She shares so much helpful information for pet businesses who might like to raise their profile. These are the key timings and topics covered: 1:55 - How Vicky started her business 4:31 - How to get started with marketing and publicity 7:55 - How blogging and content marketing propelled the business 9:15 - Make a start, and keep at it 11:58 - Is social media enough on its own? 12:45 - When blogging leads to amazing publicity 15:10 - What impact does PR have on your business? 15:58 - How press coverage helps your SEO 19:24 - When Mrs Hinch books your beach hut 23:45 - What is the impact of working with an influencer? 32.22 - What to expect when working with influencers 40:43 - How do you get the most out of working with an influencer Links mentioned in this episode: Read about Mrs Hinch's visit on the OK website: https://www.ok.co.uk/lifestyle/mrs-hinch-family-beach-holiday-22650695 (Mrs Hinch Family Beach Holiday) You can find out more at https://milliesbeachhuts.co.uk/ (www.milliesbeachhuts.co.uk/ ) Check out her grooming and pet shop business at https://milliespetservices.co.uk/ (www.milliespetservices.co.uk) You can follow Millie’s Beach Huts here: www.instagram.com/milliesbeachhuts And Millie’s Pet Services here: https://www.instagram.com/milliespetservices (www.instagram.com/milliespetservices)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of approacing the media and want to make sure you get it right? I had the idea to create this episode after a huge furore over an article about puppies in the Sunday Times on February 14th 2021. It was written by sports commentator Andrew Cotter and he shared his advice on how best to treat a puppy in their first year as a seasoned dog owner. (You can read it on the links at the bottom of this episode) It prompted a lot of criticism from trainers and behaviourists who felt a professional should have been appointed to write the piece. In his defence, Andrew had highlighted that he wasn’t qualified to give advice several times, saying, But I do accept that readers and owners would see him as an authority, take in his suggestions and go on to use them. However, lashing out at a writer on social media, attacking them, telling them publicly they are wrong, is not going to achieve anything. Key timings and topics in this episode: 0.50 - How to reply to a journalist the best way if you don't agree with what they are saying 1.10 - Background and the Andrew Cotter column 5.10 - How you can learn from other experts who are in the media 7.11 - DO be yourself, if you're being interviewed by a journalist show your personality 7.31 - DO have lots of anecdotes and stories to share 8.45 - DO have stats and facts to hand with examples such as statistics from charities 9.52 - DO be passionate about your topic - be excited! 10.39 - DO have high resolution photos that tell your story and story of Dominic Hodgson 12.02 - DO keep it simple, explain everything in a relatable way without jargon 13.40 - DO make sure the journalist is interested in the topic that you're covering DON'TS when speaking to journalists 14.50 - DON'T be salesy - thanks Jill Foster 15.45 - DON'T be afraid of sharing your own personal stories and experiences and mention of Hannah Antrobus, dog trainer, https://www.pawsitivelypawsomepups.com/ (Pawsitively Pawsome) who shares personal stories to be relatable 17.09 - DON'T refuse to give basic details to journalists and why 20.08 - DON'T complain to a journalist unless it's warranted 22.31 - DON'T demand to the journalist and why not to do this, and how to ask for links using Vicky Gunn in OK as an example 25.11 - DON’T sound like you're reading from a script but have things prepared to say 28.39 - DON'T be precious with your knowledge, be prepared to share your expertise so you’re seen as a helpful person 31.31 - Want to stay in touch? Come and carry on the conversation in my free Facebook group https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (Publicity Tips for Pet Businesses ) Links mentioned in this episode: Andrew Cotter - https://www.thetimes.co.uk/article/andrew-cotter-your-puppys-first-year-a-survival-guide-hsf95whlx (Your puppy's first year - a survival guide in The TImes) Dominic Hodgson in the Sunday Mirror - https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/dog-trainer-cycle-300-miles-19792708 (Dog trainer cycles 300 mile to help rescue dogs). Hannah Antrobus interview on her imperfect Spaniels - Hannah https://podcasts.apple.com/gb/podcast/episode-146-how-spanial-specialist-hannah-antrobus/id1395354685?i=1000506200159 ( podcast interview). Karen Boyce interview - https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/karen-boyce/ (Karen Boyce on how press coverage has helped her training business. ) FREE press release template that comes with a series of e mails and video to help you. You can download it here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (Press Release Template)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you ever taken a look at your Google Analytics? If you have, then chances are that you either dived in and lost a lot of time in a Google Analytics rabbit hole. Or you took one look and ran to the hills. Whatever your response, this podcast will demystify Google Analytics and help you use it to make more sales in your pet business. Key topics and timings in this episode: 2.25 - Vicki's background. 05:08 - How does Google analytics work? 05:52 - What can Google Analytics tell me? 06:43 - Where is your traffic coming from? 07:30 - Why is this helpful? 08:36 - How to get started with Google Analytics 10:08 - How can I find out what content my readers like? 23:40 - What are the benefits of Google Analytics? 27:45 - Using Google Ads - what you need to know to make sure you get value for money. 32:40 - What keywords should I use? Links mentioned in this episode: Check out Vicki's blog: https://heyvickijakes.com/10-ways-to-use-google-analytics-like-a-pro/ (Ten ways to use Google Analytics like a pro. ) Vicki Jakes works with small businesses to understand their customers and grow their sales either one-to-one or in her membership. Find out more on her website: https://heyvickijakes.com/ (www.heyvickijakes.com) Sign up for Vicki's free five-day challenge here and give your website some love. https://superchargeyourwebsite.com/5-day-challenge/ (https://superchargeyourwebsite.com/5-day-challenge/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you thought about having a photoshoot for your pet business? Is the idea of posing uncomfortable, but you know you need nice images? I hear you, because I HATE having my photo taken too. However. if you’re planning on putting yourself forward to the media with a story, or as an expert, or for a case study, it’s important to have the right images. Often, people will be ‘dropped’ from articles if photographs aren’t available. And with us putting so much content out there on social media and our own websites, having professional images helps create the right impression. With many photographers offering personal brand shoots, it’s become more affordable too. So if you’re considering a photoshoot for your pet business, in this episode you'll learn all you need to know to make it as painless as possible. This episode also comes with a downloadable checklist too that you can access here. These are the key timings and points covered in this episode: 0.30 - why it’s important to have photographs for your pet business if you’re hoping to secure media coverage 1.31 - Where to go if you have any questions around photography or would like to find a photographer 2.00 - Why you should plan and not make the mistakes I’ve made! 2.39 - Some of the embarrassing things I have had photoshoots for 4.54 - Why business owners need to have their own images and how the media has changed and photographers can no longer go out to every story 6.05 - How sometimes even HUGE brands don’t have the right imagery 7.12 - What is a personal brand shoot? 7.20 - How a shoot doesn’t have to cost a fortune 9.07 - Pre shoot checklist - what to do before the shoot 9.10 - Hair and make up 9.35 - What to wear 9.50 - Outfit changes 11.35 - Choosing a location 12.10 - Creating a mood board of images to capture 12.50 - Choosing your photographer 15.23 - What to do on the day to take away your nerves 17.51 - Remember to smile! 20.01 - Capturing behind the scenes images 21.09 - Checking on usage rights with the photographer to make sure you can use them for publicity and that you’re not going to constrained by their T&Cs 23.23 - Where to get the free download Links mentioned in this episode: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/kerry-jordan-photography-tips/ (How to take photos in your pet business with Kerry Jordan) Download: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Photoshootguide (Photoshoot guide for pet businesses) And finally, if you want to see some of my embarrassing photoshoots.... https://www.dailymail.co.uk/femail/article-4952862/Pet-personal-stylist-dressed-Simon-Cowell-s-dogs.html (Personal shopper for dogs) https://www.dailystar.co.uk/news/latest-news/re-chilli-isles-lake-district-18273746 (Britain's hottest curry) https://www.mirror.co.uk/lifestyle/family/reiki-is-not-just-for-humans---1700944 (Reiki for dogs) http://www.xtremebootcamps.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/02/Xtreme-Boot-Camps-Muddy-Brilliant1.pdf (Xtreme bootcamp)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
What do you think publicity is in 2021? Is it mainstream media? Newspapers, magazine, websites, radio and TV stations? Or social media, so networks like Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, LinkedIn or TikTok? Perhaps it’s about being featured on other websites owned by people who are an authority in your area or an influencer? Publicity has changed massively over the last 20 years since I started out as a journalist. It is such a grey area now, and with new platforms and outlets springing up all the time, there is so many more opportunities to get your message out there. In this episode, along with May King Tsang, a FOMO creator and social media expert, you'll discover the many different types of publicity we can enjoy today. Key timings and topics covered in this episode: 2.25 - May King background as a FOMO creator and what one is 4.35 - How publicity has evolved and what it was like before social media 6.35 - Creating content for the lurkers and how we need to be mindful that people are watching and listening even though they don’t tell us! 9.45 - Why we need to be patient and not expect instant results from publicity and social media 12.14 - Using a Twitter chat hour to get a magazine publicity opportunity - Case Study Kerry Jordan 16.54 - The power of social media and how it can create a ripple effect through sharing connections 19.45 - Being polite and thankful on social media and how that can help your reputation 21.33 - How you can use traditional publicity to amplify the material you are publishing yourself 24.39 - Examples of how May King has used social media and in person events to secure more paid work 28.32 - Examples of how traditional publicity can lead to huge peaks in sales (libido enhancers and slimming bands!) 31.58 - Why storytelling is important and how we can do this on social media - Case Study. Katie Gwilt (http://www.thekatlady.co.uk (www.thekatlady.co.uk)) 33.56 - Why we are all publishes and how there has never been a better time to get our brands and stories out there 36.33 - Where to find out more about May King Links mentioned in this episode: May King Social media: Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/maykingtea (www.instagram.com/maykingtea) Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/maykingt (www.facebook.com/maykingt) Twitter: https://twitter.com/maykingtea (www.twitter.com/maykingtea) LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/maykingtsang/ (www.linkedin.com/in/maykingtsang/) Mallory band story in Daily Mail: https://www.dailymail.co.uk/femail/article-2345168/Hairdresser-Harrogate-loses-stone-using-Ancient-Egypt-diet-trick-Malory-Band.html (https://www.dailymail.co.uk/femail/article-2345168/Hairdresser-Harrogate-loses-stone-using-Ancient-Egypt-diet-trick-Malory-Band.html) Libido enhancer story in Daily Mail: https://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-9157945/Sales-female-Viagra-soar-women-look-add-spark-love-life-lockdown.html (https://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-9157945/Sales-female-Viagra-soar-women-look-add-spark-love-life-lockdown.html)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Being featured on a podcast is a way to reach hundreds or even thousands of potential clients in an intimate way. Because they’re listening to you, it helps you build a connection far quicker than they might experience from a social media post. You also have the benefit of being seen as a trusted source of information from the person who hosts the podcast. You’re able to reach their audience, which could potentially mean connecting with tens of thousands of people who had never heard of you before. And if they like what they hear, they could become customers of yours in the future too. In this episode you’ll learn the best way to go about pitching yourself as a podcast guest. Key timings in this episode: 0.20 - Where the idea for the podcast pitching guide came from. 2.00 - Working out what kind of podcast to pitch to. 2.20 - Examples of business related podcasts 3.18 - Examples of local podcasts 4.25 - Examples of pet owner podcasts 6.47 - Examples of influencer podcasts 8.52 - Steps to follow before approaching a podcast - listen to it! 10.02 - Building relationships with the host on social media 10.16 - Leaving a review and how it can make you memorable 11.01 - Make sure you can demonstrate your expert status 14.46 - Why you must think of what's in it for the listener and not you! 17.28 - Writing your pitch to the podcast 18.50 - Remember when you’re pitching they are helping you and you will need to schmooze them! 20.13 - How to write your pitch (You can download the template here) 22.19 - Including previous interviews and blogs in your pitch 23.32 - Preparing your bio and images 24.13 - Sharing the living daylights out of the interview 24.41 - Shanking the person and leaving a review 26.05 - Come and join me in my free Facebook group to stay in touch Links mentioned in this episode: Download the guide: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PodcastPitch (Podcast pitch) Dominic Hodgson podcast: https://www.growyourpetbusinessfast.com/ (The Poodle to Pitbull Pet Business Podcast) Janet Murray podcast: https://www.janetmurray.co.uk/ (Janet Murray) Animal Star Awards: https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/news/mary-burgess-animal-star-awards/ (Animal Star Awards in 2018) Anna Webb podcast: https://annawebb.co.uk/pages/podcasts (A Dog's Life) Greg Pattison podcast: https://greatpaws.co.uk/woofin-pawsome-podcast (Woofin Pawsome) Kellie Wynn interview: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/niche-dog-trainer-beagle-lady-kellie-wynn/ (Niching with Kellie Wynn the Beagle Lady) Katie Gwilt - the Kat Lady: https://thekatlady.co.uk/ (www.thekatlady.co.uk) Rikki Sullivan the Canine Copywriter: https://www.thecaninecopywriter.co.uk/ (www.thecaninecopywriter.co.uk/) Best podcasts for pet businesses: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/pet-business-podcasts/ (Pet Business Podcasts)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
I'm so excited to share this episode with dog trainer Karen Boyce from Beastly Thoughts who has done incredible things when it comes to raisnig her profile. In the past 18 months alone, Karen, Wales, has been featured more than 30 times in the press, including many times through lockdown. This has meant she’s become the go-to person for new dog owners and has even been called the ‘Puppy Queen’ of Wales. It’s been amazing for her business and in the episode she shares how petpreneurs can follow in her footsteps. Key points and timings in this episode: 2.26 - Karen's background and how she became a dog trainer. 3.50 - Her experience with her own reactive dog 30 years ago and how that shaped her career. 6.09 - How sharing her personal story helped her to connect and be relatable to other dog owners. 8.03 - Karen's first pitch to the media about her Crufts win in 2019 and the impact that had on her profile. 10.36 - Karen shares what happened when she pitched, and how the pieces of coverage came about. 12.45 - Securing a monthly collumn in a local lifestyle magazine. 14.09 - Being described as The Puppy Queen of Wales after training a record number of pups in 2019. 18.46 - Winning awards, having publicity and the impression that creates for future clients. 22.35 - Karen's advice on building relationships with journalists and nurturing them to ensure a steady stream of publicity. 25.00 - What Karen has learned from being in the Publicity for Pet Businesses membership. 28.51 - Karen's advice on pitching and how business owners should be brave and not be scared to big themselves up! 30.10 - The importance of photos with your pitches. 32.10 - How Karen coped with lockdown. 35.44 - The changes Karen has seen in the cases of dogs she's been training since lockdown and how she's adapted her programmes. 39.05 - What's next for Karen and Beastly Thoughts, her Reactive to Reassured programme and puppy training. 40.00 - Where to find out more about Beastly Thoughts. Links mentioned in this episode: You can find out more about Karen on her website http://www.beastlythoughts.co.uk (www.beastlythoughts.co.uk) Puppy Queen of Wales: https://www.leaderlive.co.uk/news/18225923.llangollen-dog-trainer-celebrates-milestone-achievement-beastly-thoughts-professional-dog-service/ (Dog trainer Karen's milestone achievement) How Karen trained 220 pups in Lockdown: https://www.leaderlive.co.uk/news/19005250.wrexham-puppy-trainer-celebrates-record-number-pups-coming-classes---despite-multiple-lockdowns/ (Wrexham puppy trainer helps record number of pups) Trader of the week feature: https://www.bordercountiesadvertizer.co.uk/news/18492794.trader-week-karen-knows-dogs/ (Karen knows all there is to know about dogs)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is the Publicity for Pet Businesses membership right for you? This week I've been working with over 200 pet business owners showing them simple steps to follow to put themselves in the spotlight. During the challenge they will work their way through a roadmap which includes how to come up a story idea, find places to pitch to and connect with journalists. The next step for anyone hoping to work on raising their profile is to take part in the Publicity for Pet Businesses membership. In this episode, I explain how the membership works and why I've decided to rebuild it. And you'll hear from two petpreneurs, Claire Lawrence and Louise Humphrey, who share how publicity has helped their business. If you'd like to find out more about the programme, click here to visit the information page. These are the key timings in this episode: 0.18 - Intro and why this is a special episode explaining what's happening in the membership. 2.12 - How the Publicity programme started. 4.30 - When I realised I needed to focus on pet business owners and what they were creating on their own platforms if they were being put forward for publicity opportunities. 6.39 - Why the Publicity for Pet Businesses course became a membership programme. 7.21 - Bringing guest experts into the membership programme like May King Tsang and Janet Murray. 8.42 - The additional courses in the programme like Get Your Pet Business Found on Google and Kick Start Your Pet Business Blog. 10.04 - Giving more value in the membership because it's no longer just focused on press. 12.01 - The difference between the Monday and Wednesday classes moving forward. 13.29 - Claire Lawrence shares how the membership programme has helped her business. 18.03 - What to expect in the two different sections of the membership. 19.30 - The opportunities out there to promote our businesses and how the new programme will utilise all of them. 21.00 - How you can use mainstream media to amplify the message you're putting out on your own platforms. 22.00 - The two sections of the programme explained. 34.10 - Louise Humphrey from Paws4Running shares how publicity has helped her business. 37.10 - The current price of the programme - £67 a month or £799 for the year and why the price is increasing. 38.00 - Objection - it's too expensive. 40.22 - Objection - it's not the right time. 42.12 - Objection - can't attend live. 45.00 - Objection - don't have time to work on publicity. 46.02 - Objection - I'd rather hire a PR company. 47.04 - Objection - why is it more expensive than bigger/other memberships. 48.24 - Objection - what if it doesn't work for me? 49.30 - Why I don't want you to come and try it for a month. 51.00 - What kind of results you can expect. 55.04 - What else is there to support me? Links mentioned in this episode: Sign up page: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Publicitymembership (Publicity for Pet Businesses membership)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
You might know Sarah Baxter from her awesome pet blog Twilight Bark where she showcased pet brands, shared stories and documented the adventures of her Dachshunds Ted and Millie. Two years ago, after Millie needed surgery, Sarah began training as a business and personal coach with leading experts in the coaching industry; Barefoot Coaching. With her experience in the pet industry and her expertise as a coach, I thought Sarah would be perfect to chat to for a special episode on mindset to start the year. The beginning of each year is a time to reflect on what lies ahead but after that has happened with COVID, 2021 is slightly different. In this episode Sarah Baxter, a business and personal coach, shares how to process what happened in 2020 in a healthy way. Rather than think about the struggles, Sarah shares lots of helpful coping strategies. Plus ways to document your success and how and start 2021 with a positive mindset. These are the key points and timings in this episode: 0.18 - Intro to Sarah and why we’re talking about mindset for 2021 2.27 - Sarah explains her new career and what she now specialises in 3.17 - The Twilight Bark Blog and why. Sarah decided to stop the blog because of her Dachshund Millie’s health problems 7.01 - Sarah explains how what has happened with COVID in the last 12 months impacts on our mindset 11.08 - How to use the Stress Container exercise to cope in difficult times 14.37 - Sarah shares another exercise called ‘Circles of Concern’ where you identify the things you can control and those that you can’t to limit stress 16.46 - Why it’s important to recognise how you react when stressed and find healthier coping strategies 18.57. - Recognising the emotional impact of our livelihood being taken away and taking time to feel that rather than bottling it up. 20.53 - Why you DON’T have to put your best face on all the time and you can talk about how you feel 24.13 - The importance of reflection and spotting the opportunities you found during the difficult times 27.52 - Why every small business owner should have a win folder! 30.16 - Examples of pet business owners who kept going when it was tough and had amazing results, Kim O’Donnell from Leo, Charley and Me and Dawn Wilkinson from Nosy Dog 32.14 - The difference between a fixed and a growth mindset 34.13 - How it can be hard to step out of our comfort zone 36.15 - Questions from members of the Publicity for Pet Businesses Facebook Group 45.39 - What is the best thing that could happen to you for 2021? Links mentioned in this episode: Sarah's Twilight Bark website: https://twilightbarkuk.com/ (Twilight Bark) Follow Sarah on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/goodthoughtsgrowhere (@Goodthoughtsgrowhere) Connect with her on LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/sarah-baxter-01034186/ (Sarah Baxter Linked In)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you like to get media coverage for your pet business? Maybe you’ve seen other service providers like dog walkers, trainers and groomers feature in magazines and are wondering how you can do the same. Or perhaps you’ve a product and you would love to see it feature in a gift guide or review. Well the good news is it’s easier than you think and next week, January 11th-15th 2021, I’m holding a FREE publicity challenge for pet business owners. In this episode you'll learn everything you need to know if you'd like to take part. If you’d like to take part, https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (click here to grab your place.) Key timings in this episode: 0.20 - Intro to the challenge 2.21 - How coming on the challenge can help you come up with your publicity ideas for the year 2.54 - The kind of publicity we cover on the challenge 4.20 - How the daily tasks work on the challenge 5.35 - How long the tasks will take each day 6.34 - How the live Q and A sessions work and why I made a right mess of the last challenge 7.10 - What you get as part of the week long challenge - a week's intensive publicity coaching 8.55 - The importance of having feedback on your ideas and how it can make a difference as to whether a story lands or not 9.51 - Success stories from previous challenges - see links below to read the articles 12.50 - What you need to take part in the challenge, an idea, enthusiasm and dedicating a bit of time each day to the tasks 14.05 - How you can be in with a chance to win a month's free membership in the challenge worth £67 or a Janet Murray media diary worth £39. 18.41 - Where to sign up for the challenge - see link below - or e mail rachel@rachelspencerwrites.com if you have any problem joining up Links mentioned in this episode: If you'd like to join the challenge, you can sign up here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge) Sarah Latham’s dog treat company appeared in her local paper, the Stoke Sentinel, with this fab piece about her https://www.business-live.co.uk/enterprise/how-dog-lover-turned-side-19023184 (bushtucker trials! ) Zita Wells pitched to her local radio station Meridian 107, and was interviewed about her puppy health guide. Alex Graves from Rove Pet Services appeared in her local paper in Essex talking about how she was supporting pet owners in lockdown. Kim from https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/pages/press-coverage (Leo, Charley and Me), Karen from https://www.luxurydoghampers.co.uk/ (Luxury Dog Hampers), Jo from https://barksandsqueaks.com/ (Barks and Squeaks) and Heather from https://www.treatyourdog.co.uk/ (Treat Your Dog) featured in Christmas gift guides in Dogs Today. Trainer Claire Lawrence featured in https://www.companionlife.co.uk/how-good-dogs-can-turn-bad-titons-story/ (Companion Animal) magazine talking about her new book, Three Steps to Silence, for owners of barking dogs. Roz from ByBenji had a double page spread in https://www.puppypost.co.uk/ (Puppy Post) for her biltong treats. Pet Photographer Petra featured in https://www.petgazette.biz/27192-petra-brand-photography-launches-virtual-sessions-to-help-brands-continue-marketing/ (Pet Gazette) and Pet Business World magazine – amazing for her profile.
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to put your pet business in the media spotlight for 2021? If you’re here, I think the answer might be yes. And it is completely achievable for you to win fantastic media coverage as long as you have a plan. In this podcast, I’m going to share how to put one together to increase your chance of featuring in the media in 2021. And if you need more support I have a free challenge taking place on January 11-15th where you can get personalised advice on how to get more eyes on your pet business in 2021. Key timings in this episode: 1.21 - How to plan your publicity for 2021 2.33 - The two kinds of publicity that can help your pet business 4.45 - Details for the planning masterclass on 7th January at 1pm 5.18 - Why it’s important to plan your publicity 8.08 - Where to start when it comes to putting your plan together 10.10 - How to go about coming up with ideas for publicity 10.46 - Getting publicity opportunities by applying for awards 14.44 - Using awareness days and national days to come up with ideas for publicity (Check out the Kerry Jordan interview about https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-create-an-awareness-day-with-kerry-jordan/ (National Dog Photography here)) 17.02 - Hannah Capon interview from https://player.captivate.fm/f30395c6-26f8-4efc-b2fa-14e9240b1f07 (Canine Arthritis Management.) 19.16 - What to do when you have the foundations of your publicity plan together 21.10 - Generating publicity for your idea or campaign on your own platform 21.34 - Building relationships before you’re ready to pitch with journalists and influencers, and other pet business owners like vets, pet shops 22.19 - What to do if something comes up outside of your plan 23.45 - Details on the publicity for pet businesses free challenge on January 11th - 15th 24.46 - Details on the Plan Your Publicity for 2021 class on January 7th. Links mentioned in this episode: Hannah Capon from https://player.captivate.fm/f30395c6-26f8-4efc-b2fa-14e9240b1f07 (Canine Arthritis Management interview). Kerry Jordan interview about https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-create-an-awareness-day-with-kerry-jordan/ (National Dog Photography). I have my Publicity Challenge happening on 11th to 15th January and I would love for you to come along with a story idea and I can help you there. You can sign up for the https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityChallenge (free publicity challenge here). Or, if you’d like help with your plan, I have a Plan Your Publicity for 2021 masterclass happening on January 7th 1pm UK time. In the session I will show you how to create your publicity plan and make 2021 the year you put your pet business on the map. If you’d like to sign up, you can do so for https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/L3a9mPHj (£47 here.)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Fancy tuning in to some tips for your pet business over the holidays? There are pet business podcasts popping up all over the world where you can learn ways to boost your brand. I've rounded up a selection of shows that you can tune in to to improve your skills as a petpreneur. Here are the key timings in this episode: 0.20 - Intro and why I'm doing an episode on podcasts. 1.54 - Dominic Hodgson - The Poodle to Pitbull Pet Business Podcast 4.19 - Anna Webb - A Dog’s Life 6.26 - Beverley Cuddy - Editor of Dogs Today - The Devil Wears Dog Hair 7.53 - Nick Benger - Dog Talk 9.31 - Kate McQuillan - Pet Sitters Ireland 10.45 - Meg Kelly - Vet Rehabbers 12.25 - Bella Vasta - Bella in Your Business 15.09 - Kristin Morrison - Prosperous Pet Business 17.34 - Wear Wag Repeat - Tori Mistick 19.24 - Meghan and Collin Funkhouser - Pet Sitter Confidential Links mentioned in this episode: Dominic Hodgson - The Poodle to Pitbull Pet Business Podcast www.growyourpetbusinessfast.com/podcast/ Anna Webb - A Dog’s Life www.annawebb.co.uk Beverley Cuddy - Editor of Dogs Today - The Devil Wears Dog Hair https://thedevilwearsdoghair.podbean.com/ (https://thedevilwearsdoghair.podbean.com/) Nick Benger - Dog Talk www.nickbenger.com Kate McQuillan - Pet Sitters Ireland www.petsittersireland.com Meg Kelly - Vet Rehabbers www.onlinepethealth-info.com/podcast/ Bella Vasta - Bella in Your Business www.jumpconsulting.net Kristin Morrison - Prosperous Pet Business www.prosperouspetbusiness.com Wear Wag Repeat - Tori Mistick www.wearwagrepeat.com Meghan and Collin Funkhouser - Pet Sitter Confidential www.petsitterconfessional.com/ If you have a podcast and think it should be added to the list, or you'd like to chat about my podcast, you can drop me a line at Rachel@rachelspencerwrites.com Finally, if you'd like to learn what to expect from the Publicity for Pet Businesses podcast, tune in to my intro episode here:https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-press-coverage-can-help-your-pet-business/ ( How publicity can help your pet business.)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you like to help dogs live healthy, happy, pain free lives? I know the answer is going to be a firm 'yes' if you're tuning into this podcast. It's a special episode with Hannah Capon, founder of Canine Arthritis Management, and she is appealing to YOU to help. As a pet professional, YOU have influence over owners, and often might be the first person to see the signs something isn't right. Hannah is calling for pet pros to support her in harnessing this, educating owners about arthritis and helping more dogs live longer and pain free lives. In this episode you will learn everything you need to start making positive steps in the fight against arthritis, one of the main causes of pets being put to sleep. It's an emotional interview, but I hope it inspires you to share Hannah's message. These are the key timings in this episode: 0.45 - Intro to Hannah and a brief overview of why it's important for pet professionals to be more aware of arthritis. 2.21 - How CAM first started back in 2015 as a simple Facebook page. 6.23 - Hannah shares how she felt she was failing dogs and owners as a vet with the support she was giving them and wanted to do more. 9.14 - The day Hannah had to put two dogs to sleep in a row because of arthritis and how it changed her life and inspired her to set up CAM. 11.30 - The rise of arthritis in dogs and now how up to 45% of all dogs have the condition. 13.11 - What pet professionals can do if they fear a client has arthritis. 18.11 - Hannah shares her belief that dogs don't mask pain, they just cope. 19.36 - How groomers can often feel ignored or dismissed by vets and Hannah's advice on how to overcome this. 22.32 - Broaching difficult conversations with owners and Hannah's advice on the best way to do this without making an owner feel bad. 28.18 - Why it's important to get help and Hannah's own experience of life with a senior dog, Holly. 31.20 - Hannah's mission for arthritis to be as headline grabbing as Alabama Rot. 36.33 - Why arthritis needs to be managed as it can be the seed that grows into an oak tree of pain. 38.23 - Hannah's training for vets and nurses. 39.41 - How her dedication to CAM has led to Hannah returning home to her parents so she can continue her work. 41.46 - Why educating yourself as a pet professional can help you build relationships with vets. 42.45 - Why pet professionals are influencers and are often more trusted by owners than vets. 46.09 - The CAMbassador programme and how it works. 40.32 - The CAMadvocate programme which is for pet professionals where they can learn how to identify arthritis and support owners. 51.30 - The CAMpaigner course for owners who want to give the right advice to friends, family or clients if they might have a pet product business to share the right message. 55.20 - Hannah appeals for brands offering enrichment toys, beds, car boot ramps, harnesses, any kind of product that would fit with CAM’s message to get in touch with a view to having your products in the CAM shop. THE CAMbassador course is on offer for $120 up to Christmas Eve. Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about CAM on the website: http://www.caninearthritis.co.uk/ (www.caninearthritis.co.uk) Learn with CAM in their online resouce for pet professionals. http://www.cameducation.co.uk/ (www.cameducation.co.uk) Support CAM by buying from their shop or by approaching Hannah if you have a suitable brand. http://www.camonlineshop.com/ (www.camonlineshop.com) Follow CAM on Social Media: Facebook Canine Arthritis Management: https://www.facebook.com/CAMarthritis (https://www.facebook.com/CAMarthritis) Holly's Army: https://www.facebook.com/groups/2161091580843717 (https://www.facebook.com/groups/2161091580843717) Canine Arthritis Management Pro page: https://www.facebook.com/CAMprofessional (https://www.facebook.com/CAMprofessional) Canine Arthritis Equipment review and advice group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/540364159637089...
How do you feel about pricing? Do you feel comfortable and confident when it comes to what you charge or is it something that causes you stress and worry? I’m in the latter group and as I was planning this podcast I spoke to a lot of people who felt the same. In this episode Sally Farrant - aka The Pricing Queen - talks about what gets in the way of us putting up our prices. She explains what the biggest pricing challenges are for business owners and how to overcome them. And she shares how to price your product or service in a way that you attract the right kind of customer who isn’t going to quibble about what you charge. We also talk about the emotional side of pricing and how being questioned about what we charge can affect our feelings of self worth. It’s such a fascinating chat and I hope you enjoy the episode. Key timings in this episode: 4.09 - Sally’s background as a management accountant and how she specialised in pricing, and the kind of businesses she works with. 5.04 - Why she decided to focus purely on pricing. 6.01 - The biggest challenges facing small business owners - knowing what to charge to make money and knowing your worth. 7.19 - The difference between your rates as an employee and a business owner and what we need to factor in. 10.03 - Calculating what you want to earn and factoring in holidays, time off sick and how it should be at least 20 per cent more than your wage as an employee. 11.37 - Sally shares how most people are undercharging. 12.07 - How to increase your prices with new clients. 12.56 - Why it’s important to regularly put your prices up. 15.45 - The emotions attached to our animals and how we are prepared to pay more to know they are safe, happy and well cared for. 17.46 - How to be brave and tell clients your price and look at their reactions without dashing to discount. 18.53 - Why it can be preferable to have less clients but at a better rate. 20.31 - Choosing appropriate products and services to discount - ie the ones that don’t take up a lot of time or that you are trying to shift stock of. 22.31 - Cutting back on extras on a service to make it more affordable. 23.55 - Selling the emotional benefits to overcome price objections. 26.33 - The basic principles of pricing a product. 30.20 - Factoring costs like Paypal, Etsy fees into a price. 31.21 - Making it easy for people to buy from you. 34.08 - Why you might be too cheap if you can offer quick results for people. 36.25 - Remembering your worth and experience when it comes to pricing and standing firm. 38.20 - Assessing people’s priorities in life and why your pricing might not be a problem to them at all! 40.25 - Where you can find out more about Sally. Links mentioned in this episode: Sally's website: http://link.wisestamp.com/ls/click?upn=vSlrWpDPU0Nq6-2B6JJxDS6se8TUoi7GAem8c5QThjARMhDse2bhJsY22SYKwdA5SKtqO2_wPFeiy-2BGgLYDlzWKFgx5-2B1Y7upRWTVDnVENF4CtH0Su2PYG9PFtDcHdUTIEovyhpqoYTzS-2Be-2FSI9K8WhbNvlakk8yQbwh2vQwJR-2FSifGsXQ8p736RKpIi5xGCkc-2BOQM4IpfGQdSawHu0Me2VX7aAKww6fPq4AW81hkPg7kyhBothCG0XEX-2B3gEwLwuhUAa5uEkzw0kzAubHbFsAB8M-2Faj8JbqZBS9E25eTAE0L-2BUQhoZQer-2BMmzTakaFXtSeYWNIBzZxdZPxLv724qdGXB5G9130FnRhKzq3rcW0MVV1qhw-3D (www.businessgrowthbynumbers.com ) Check out her blog: https://www.businessgrowthbynumbers.com/blog (www.businessgrowthbynumbers.com/blog) Work with Sally: https://www.businessgrowthbynumbers.com/work-with-me (www.businessgrowthbynumbers.com/work-with-me) Follow her on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/thepricingqueen/ (The Pricing Queen) Join her Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/strengthinnumberssally/ (Strength in numbers)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you looking for ways to keep in touch with your pet business clients over the holidays? But you want to inject a bit of fun rather than talk work! Well help is at hand with the 12 Days of Pet Business Content ideas. This podcast has 12 different topics you can talk about on social media, on your blog, in your e mails or even as pitches to the media if you get a wriggle on in time. Do let me know if you use them, you can tag me on social media @rachelspenceruk on all platforms. Here are the key timings in this episode: 1.32 - Information on my Plan Your Publicity for 2021 class on January 7th. 3.27 - Idea Number One - What would your pet's New Year's Resolution be? 4.15 - Idea Number Two - What's on your pet's Christmas list? 5.19 - Idea Number Three - How do you spend your Christmas? 6.12 - Idea Number Four - Share your festive outfit 7.05 - Idea Number Five - What does your pet have for Christmas dinner? 8.16 - Idea Number Six - Choose your own '12 Days Of' 9.01 - Idea Number Seven - Your New Year promise to your pet 11.26 - Idea Number Eight - Create a Festive 'How to' guide 12.29 - Idea Number Nine - Create a Christmas gift guide 14.10 - Idea Number Ten - A time for giving - shine a light on a charity or cause 15.19 - Idea Number Eleven - Naughty or nice list? 17.27 - Idea Number Twelve - What's in store for 2021? Links mentioned in this episode: Plan your publicity for 2021 class sign up page Christmas gift guide from https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/top-10-gifts-dog-lovers-christmas/ (Scruffy Little Terrier) https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/tried-and-tested/christmas-gift-ideas-for-terrier-owners/ (Christmas gift guide for terrier owners on the Paw Post)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
When Becky Baker welcomed Cockerpoo Buddy into her home five years ago she admits she didn’t quite know what had hit her. Sleepless nights, toilet training and constantly worrying whether she was doing things right led her to having the ‘puppy blues.’ But she also had a lightbulb moment - if she was feeling like this then surely others were too - and she created a solution - the K9Nation app. It started in 2017 as a rough and ready website and app that she bootstrapped bit by bit while working for a law firm. Now it’s an amazing app and monthly podcast for pet owners and Becky has an entire team supporting her too. I met Becky right at the start of her K9Nation mission and I am so excited to speak to her about all she has achieved. Key timings in this episode: 3.02 - Becky’s background and what the K9Nation app is - think Trip Advisor meets Facebook for dogs and their owners 4.55 - How Becky had the idea for the app 6.20 - Using her contacts in the tech industry to make it a reality 9.16 - Boostrapping the K9Nation app herself and how Becky scrimped and scraped to get the first version of the app off the ground 12.08 - How losing a colleague at work in a tragic road accident inspired her to take action and do the Paws On Tour to test the water for K9Nation in summer 2019 16.23 - Getting the word out there about K9Nation and appearing on The One Show 18.08 - Accepting that she needed help and joining a business accelerator in 2020 as lockdown hit 20.07 - Taking part in Pitch Fest, a virtual pitching event to investors and securing funding and a team of investors for K9Nation 21.05 - Her long term goals for K9Nation 22.12 - How K9Nation works for both pet parents and pet business owners 25.28 - How pet businesses can use K9Nation to find clients and be discovered online for their products and services 29.15 - Becky’s PR coverage and how it wowed her investors 30.27 - How having a team is helping Becky grow K9Nation 32.19 - Getting over being a perfectionist 35.04 - Becky’s advice for anyone considering launching an app or following their dream as she did 37.37 - How Becky coped in the tough times and kept going 40.09 - Why you DON’T need to hire a PR - Becky’s advice on publicity and how it can help your business grow 41.55 - Where to find out more about K9Nation Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about Becky on the K9Nation website: https://k9nation.dog/ (https://k9nation.dog/) In this episode, Becky refers to having support from my membership programme and you can find out more about joining here: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/coaching-programme/ (Publicity for Pet Businesses membership.) Read Becky's first story about the K9Nation app from back in 2018: https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/you-post-canine-depression-psychologist-11807136 (Do you have post puppy depression?) Becky's coverage of Paws on Tour: https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/animal-lover-cockapoo-begin-hunt-14995545 (Animal lover and her Cockapoo hunt for Britain's most dog friendly destination) Becky's K9Clean Up coverage: https://www.petgazette.biz/27804-k9-clean-up-initiative-launched/ (Dog lover launches K9CleanUp campaign for Dogs Trust) How determined Becky secured funding: https://bdaily.co.uk/articles/2020/08/24/social-media-platform-for-dogs-secures-250000-angel-investment (Social media platform for dogs secures £250,000 investment) My first blog post with Becky: https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/news/k9nation-social-media-platform-dogs-humans/ (How puppy Buddy inspired Becky to make the K9Nation app)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Thanks to the Coronavirus health crisis there are more new pet owners in every town, city and village across the UK. Everywhere you go, you can’t move for pandemic puppies. Animal charities now have huge waiting lists for adoptions. And if you’re a pet business owner this is good news - because the new pet parents will need to use your services. Whether that’s dog walks in the day when they return to work, or even while working from home when owners need to concentrate on Zoom, or cat visits, they need support. Not to mention the training challenges faced by owners with puppies who may not have been able to socialise as they would in the normal world. In this episode I share how you can create content to attract and convert new pet owners. Key timings in this episode: Links mentioned in this episode: Join the Awareness Days class taking place on December 1st at 1pm here: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/masterclasses/ (Awareness Days for Pet Businesses ) Jude Davidson, a dog walker from Park Life Honiton did this post on https://www.parklifehoniton.com/post/preparing-your-dog-for-when-you-go-back-to-work (how to help your dog cope when you return to work.) Anna Pollard, a dog groomer from The Dog House wrote about https://www.thedoghouseleicester.co.uk/self-isolation-is-the-perfect-time-for-your-puppy/ (how to prepare your puppy for their first groom.) Kate Taylor from Dotty4Paws wrote about https://dotty4paws.co.uk/how-to-toilet-train-your-puppy-in-just-a-few-weeks/ (how to toilet train your pup) and https://dotty4paws.co.uk/how-to-crate-train-your-puppy-the-gentle-way/ (how to crate train your puppy) - educational and helpful content rather than ‘buy this stuff.’ Michelle Burgess from Scruffy Little Terrier has products for terriers and their humans. She wrote about https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/ten-things-only-terrier-owners-understand/ (Ten things you’ll know if you have a terrier) and a brilliant https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/what-do-you-get-the-terrier-lover-in-your-life-for-christmas/ (Christmas gift guide for terrier owners.)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Carla Finzel is a district vet nurse who is pioneering a revolutionary service allowing pets to receive the medical care they need in their own homes. It's no longer just humans who can benefit from expert medical care at home when it's needed. Carla is my second guest in my new Change Maker series, which I've created to shine a light on people doing extraordinary things to help animals. In this podcast, I talk to Carla about how it all started and the future of this innovative lifeline for pets and their owners. These are the key timings in this episode: 0:52 Carla's background as a vet nurse 3:11 The challenges of traditional veterinary care 5:21 What is a district vet nurse? 6:39 A life changing impact for owners and their pets 9:08 The moment of change 11:51 Setting up as a district vet nurse 18:20 The animals who have benefitted 22:11 A tale of Christmas Spirit 30:54 The campaign crusade 34:54 Crowdfunding for change 44:24 Carla's message and how you can support the campaign Links mentioned in this episode: You can support Carla's campaign by donating to her Just Giving page. https://www.justgiving.com/crowdfunding/carla-finzel (https://www.justgiving.com/crowdfunding/carla-finzel) If you're a vet nurse that would like to get in touch with Carla, you can reach her at vetdistrictnurse@gmail.com You can learn more about Carla and her important work on her website: https://www.carlafinzelvetnurse.com/ (www.carlafinzelvetnurse.com)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Jade from StreetVet is the first guest in my new Change Maker series, set up to shine a light on people doing extraordinary things to help animals. Jade co-founded StreetVet along with another vet, Sam Joseph in 2016. StreetVet is a charity delivering free care for the homeless and their pets on the streets of London and cities across the UK. It started with two vets and a backpack back in 2016, and is now run by an army of over 650 vets and nurses in 16 locations. In this podcast, I talk to Jade about the challenges faced by homeless people and their pets and how StreetVet helps. These are the key timings in this episode: 1:55 How it all started 3:55 The challenges for homeless pet owners 4:59 Helping the homeless community 6:29 How it's changed 7:42 Going from two vets to an army of 650 volunteers 14:21 What does a StreetVet do on a typical outreach 19:33 Why do homeless people have pets? 23:30 The sacrifices homeless people make for their pets 29:19 Tips on media coverage for charities and social enterprises 35:43 Purina Better with Pets prize – StreetVet Accredited Hostels 41:25 How homeless pet owners would live in an ideal world Links mentioned in this episode: Website: http://www.streetvet.co.uk/ (https://www.streetvet.co.uk/ ) Amazon Wishlist: https://www.streetvet.co.uk/how-to-use-the-amazon-wish-list/ (https://www.streetvet.co.uk/how-to-use-the-amazon-wish-list/) > Donate: https://www.streetvet.co.uk/donate-now (https://www.streetvet.co.uk/donate-now) Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/streetvet/ (https://www.facebook.com/streetvet/) Twiiter: https://twitter.com/streetvetuk (https://twitter.com/streetvetuk) Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/streetvetuk_/ (https://www.instagram.com/streetvetuk_/) YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCuc3im7mGQFrDOXeyIiSfdA (StreetVet on YouTube)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
If you’re looking to raise the profile of your pet business one really easy way is to put yourself forward as a case study. Case studies share their real life experiences of all kinds of things, from setting up a business in lockdown to having a pet that weighs more than you! My membership clients and people in my free Facebook group have had huge PR wins from being case studies in national newspapers and magazines and pet publications. And you can use case studies in your own pet business marketing too. In this episode I speak to Jenna Sloan, a freelance journalist and university lecturer who specialises in writing case studies. These are the key timings in this episode: 0.48 - Jenna's background 1.31 - Why Jenna niched into writing about case studies 3.35 - What is a case study? 6.24 - Examples of case studies 9.37 - Line up features Jenna has worked on 12.11 - Case study stories involving animals 13.07 - Guide dog case study example 14.55 - Using case studies in your own marketing 17.25 - How case studies can help with pitches to podcasts and the media 19.27 - Tips on how to interview a case study for your pet business 22.35 - Putting feelings and emotion into your case studies 24.52 - Jenna’s self study case study course 26.44 - Where to find out more about Jenna Links mentioned in this episode: Read Jenna's feature on Guide Dog owners whose dogs had been attacked here: https://www.thesun.co.uk/archives/news/408589/an-attack-on-any-dog-is-frightening-but-for-a-guide-dog-owner-it-is-worse/ (An attack on any dog is frightening but on a Guide Dog it’s far worse) Find out more about Jenna on her website: http://www.jennasloan.co.uk/ (www.jennasloan.co.uk)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
How do you feel when it comes to writing about your pet business? Do you worry that you sound bossy, or that you’re boasting, or bigging yourself up too much? When you start a business of your own, writing about what it is that you do or the product you create can be overwhelming. Lots of us may not have written regularly since school, never mind put stuff out in the public domain. But when we start as business owners, we have to consistently create content for the many different communication channels; our social media, newsletters, e mails and websites. So how do you build your confidence in writing? In this podcast are nine pointers that will help you. The key thing to remember is that if we reframe our content and see it as a way to give value to our customers or potential clients, then we are more likely to create it in the first place, and promote it so it serves its purpose. These are the key timings in this episode: 1.00 - How to do write about technical subjects in a way that's easy to understand? 2.20 - The challenge business owners face with so many communications channels. 2.52 - We all feel awkward when we first start writing about our businesses. 3.10 - How I cringed when I had to write about what I did and why I resisted it for so long. 8.10 - Why you should give yourself time to find your voice and try to talk in your posts in the way you would in real life. 9.20 - Suzanne Gould - from feeling wobbly about writing to writing a 40,000 word book. 11.15 - Why you should write for your clients and not for your peers. 12.20 - Helen Motteram and how she walks in the shoes of her clients. 14.03 - Writing helpful and educational content and how this will make you more likely to promote it and delight your clients. 16.20 - Grammar and how to overcome any fears about this. 18.27 - Consider asking a friend or colleague to check over your work if you feel unsure about it. 20.15 - Read magazines and websites and find styles and formats you like. 21.24 - How you can use your writing to express your personality. 23.05 - Case study Alex Smith and how she used her blog to help owners get to know her and her values, so they felt like they already knew her. 25.14 - What to do if you'd like more support. Links mentioned in this episode: Podcast episode: https://podcasts.captivate.fm/media/1f48ec2d-ce9a-4cd1-ae7f-26efefb6394d/publicity-for-pet-businesses-rachel-spancer-07-11-2020.mp3 (What’s inside the Get Your Pet Business Found On Google programme) Join here: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/ (Get Your Pet Business Found On Google) Interview with Helen Motteram - Walk in their shoes https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/stand-out-social-media-helen-motteram/ (Helen podcast and blog ) Interview with Suzanne Gould - https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/suzanne-gould-edinburgh-holistic-dogs/ (Suzanne blog post and podcast.) Suzanne's website - https://edinburghholisticdogs.co.uk/ (Edinburgh Holistic Dogs) Malcolm the SEO guy - https://www.360spin.com/ (360Spin.com ) Grammarly is a free tool - find it here: http://www.grammarly.com/ (www.grammarly.com/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
This is a bonus episode of the podcast for anyone who is considering taking part in the Get Your Pet Business found on Google course taking place from 10th November 2020. If you’re in the UK, you’ll know we’ve just gone back into lockdown for four weeks until December 2nd. And while many pet business owners can still work thank goodness, we can’t do much else. The Get Your Pet Business Found on Google course is taking place now as many people will be using the time at home to work on their websites. It’s run with me and Rosie Robinson, a former dog walker who creates websites for pet business owners, from walkers and groomers and trainers to product makers. She’s spent years designing and creating stunning websites and working on SEO so they stand out online. My background if you haven’t listened to the podcast before is in journalism, writing mostly about pets, and I have an award winning pet blog, http://www.thepawpost.co.uk (www.thepawpost.co.uk). In this episode you will hear from three pet business owners who will share what being found on Google has done for them. They will talk about learning to blog and coming up with topics and content that has helped them get discovered and support their clients. Each pet business owner shares how blogging has helped them get found on Google and gives an insight into what it’s like to work with Rosie and I. Key timings in this episode: 0.30 - Introduction to the Get Your Pet Business Found on Google course 6.15 - Interview with Michelle Burgess from Scruffy Little Terrier, a blog and lifestyle brand for terrier owners. 12.30 - Interview with Alex Smith, a former dog walker from Rove Pet Services. She now lives in America and creates content for a large pet brand there. 16.30 - Interview with Debbie Greaves from Barking Bags, who makes dog walking bags and usually takes part in a lot of shows but this year was faced with having to move to online. 21.13 - How to get in touch if you'd like to do the programme. Join the programme? If you’d like to join the programme, it starts November 10th 2020. Each week there will be a live class on Zoom with Rosie and I. You will learn… How Google works - Rosie will explain SEO and why Google shows websites in the order it does, and how to get yours seen. How to create content with confidence - Rachel will explore the kind of content you can create to get your pet business found and how to do it quickly and easily. How to amplify your content - Rosie and Rachel will share how to get more eyes on your website, plus how to make your posts look nice so users return again and again. How to plan your content for a YEAR - yes, the final session will be a planning session for 2021 and you can make a start of mapping out the next 12 months.
You'll be given a workbook to store everything you learn and you’re able to ask questions and get advice throughout the programme. The recordings will be stored in a private Facebook group and you will be sent them at the end of the programme. You’ll go into 2021 being able to write with confidence, with your ideas mapped out, and make your brand stand out online. Any questions, head over to the show notes for this episode, or find Rosie and I on social media. I’m @rachelspenceruk on all platforms. Rosie @wufdesign on all platforms. Key links mentioned in this episode: The investment is £97 and you can sign up here: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/ (www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/) Michelle at Scruffy Little Terrier: https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/ (www.scruffylittleterrier.com/) Alex at Rove Pet Services: https://rovepets.com/ (https://rovepets.com/) Debbie at Barking Bags: https://barkingbags.co.uk/ (https://barkingbags.co.uk/) My Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses) My website:...
The last seven months have been a challenging time for pet business owners following lockdown with so much uncertainty in the air. One person who has stepped up to the plate to support people is Rivka Abecasis, founder of Puppy Post, an online magazine for pet parents and pet brands. The magazine launched in January and Rivka single handedly produces 100 pages on a monthly basis. And after lockdown hit, she created Puppy Post Marketplace to help product businesses who could no longer go to shows or events. In this episode she shares how finding a helpless puppy JoeJoe changed her life and led her to create Puppy Post. Plus how pet businesses have battled through and been resilient, what she looks for in a story and how to get involved in the Christmas market. Key timings in this episode: 1:57 - Where the Puppy Post came from 2:48 - When the magazine started 4:12 - Rivka’s background 7:19 - All about the Puppy Post magazine 10:16 - How her puppy Jojo was found in a lockup 13:13 - Why Rivka left the corporate world 15:15 - What Rivka is looking for in a story 17:46 - How to pitch to Puppy Post 20:06 - Examples of Puppy Post stories 24:44 - How Puppy Post was affected in March with COVID-19 27:10 - How small businesses are coming together in the Puppy Post community 28:00 - How the online marketplace works 35:00 - How Rivka's community has led to friendships 36:16 - The resilience of pet businesses 38:42 - New Puppy Post behind the scenes section 39:24 - About the junior Petpreneur section 41:31 - How pet businesses can benefit from asking for help 43:10 - How to get in touch with Rivka Links mentioned in this episode: To join in with the marketplace there is an application fee of £100 and you can find out more here https://www.puppypost.co.uk/marketplace-info (www.puppypost.co.uk) If you’d like to check out the Puppy Post magazine, you can sign up via the website here https://www.puppypost.co.uk/join-us (www.puppypost.co.uk) And if you’d like to follow Rivka and Puppy Post on Instagram, go to https://www.instagram.com/puppy.post.co.uk (www.instagram.com/puppy.post.co.uk) Or find them on Facebook at http://www.facebook.com/puppy.post.co.uk (www.facebook.com/puppy.post.co.uk)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
When you Google your business name, what do you see? Do you show up in lots of places and do you think you’re ranking for the search terms your ideal customers are putting into a search engine? If working on your business is something you’re planning on doing for the next four weeks as we go back into lockdown, then here’s how you can give your website a refresh. Rosie Robinson has worked as a dog walker and boarder and now makes websites for pet business owners. She’s created hundreds of sites for product and service businesses, helping them stand out online. In this episode she shares simple steps that will improve your Google ranking. Key timings in this episode: 1:55 - Rosie Robinson background 3:30 - Why it’s important for service providers to be found on Google 4:49 - How different type of clients come in from social media and websites 6:36 - What can you do to make your website rank higher 8:22 - Listing your pet business website in directories 11:00 - When people are on a budget and might do their own site, what is the most important thing to get right? 14:40 - Creating content for your website to improve your ranking 23:00 - Content strategies The Get Your Pet Business found on Google. This is what the course will cover: Week One: How Google Works. By the end of this session you’ll know how to organise your website into sections to make it easy to get found, and to fill out the fiddly bits to ensure your content is optimised. Week Two: Content Made Simple We’ll explore the kind of content to create to get found on Google and easy ways to write it. Week Three: Get Visible You’ve done the hard work, now it’s time to amplify your content and get eyes on your pet business. Week Four: Make It Happen In this session you will plan your content for 2021. If you’d like to take part, the investment is £97 and you can reserve your space here: Links mentioned in this episode: Sign up for the programme: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/blogging-for-pet-businesses/ (Get Your Pet Business Found on Google) Find out more about Rosie: https://www.wufdesign.co.uk/ (www.wufdesign.co.uk/) Check out Jenny Harris's blog at the Great Catsby: http://www.thegreatcatsbycathotel.com/ (www.thegreatcatsbycathotel.com/) Check out Michelle from Scruffy Little Terrier's blog on Camber Sands: https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/lovely-dog-friendly-beach-pub-camber-east-sussex/ (Dog friendly beach at Camber Sands) Read Lottie from Cosy Canine Company's blog on Cockapoos: https://thecosycaninecompany.co.uk/blogs/news/10-things-cockapoo-owners-know-are-true (What Cockapoo owners know )
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you ever seen posts on social media about Awareness Days and National Days and thought you might like to create the same? There are days to mark all kinds of different things from fun days such as Dress Up Your Pet Day to more serious ones such as Breast Cancer Awareness Month. They’re used by PRs and social media managers to come up with campaigns and story ideas and you can use them in your content too. In this episode you will learn how Awareness and National Days work and how you can use them to promote your pet business, plus how to create one of your own. If you enjoy this episode and would like further support and a plan to follow to launch your own National or Awareness Day, I do have a class on this topic happening soon. The Awareness Day Masterclass for Pet Businesses is taking place on November 10th 2020 at 1pm UK time. It's just £27 to join and you'll learn everything you need to know to use awareness days and create one of your own and you can sign up here: Fancy joining us? https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/masterclasses/ (Reserve your space for just £27 here). Key timings in this episode: 0.27 - Intro on Facebook group and Friday 15 minute drop in sessions 1.42 - Intro to awareness days and national days 3.22 - The difference between awareness days and national days 7.49 - How to find out about awareness days and national days 10.04 - Why use awareness days and national days? 10.36 - Some ideas you can used for an awareness day or national day 12.46 - Examples of pet business owners who have used them to reach up to 100,000 people on a blog and millions in newspaper articles 14.24 - Using awareness days and national days for media pitches 18.56 - Creating your own awareness days and national days 23.05 - Details of the masterclass on awareness days and national days Links mentioned in this episode: Join the Awareness Days class for Pet Businesses: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/masterclasses/ (Reserve your space for just £27 here). Kerry Jordan interview on National Dog Photography Day, a day to celebrate our dogs. Read or listen to her interview on her awareness day here: https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/news/kerry-jordan-on-founding-national-dog-photography-day (How to raise your profile with an Awareness Day) Caroline Wilkinson from BarketPlace blog post: https://barketplace.uk/the-importance-of-rest-days-for-dogs/ (The importance of rest days for your dog) Karen Boyce's story on National Dog Photography Day: https://www.leaderlive.co.uk/news/18616697.celebration-dogs-across-north-wales-national-dog-photography-day/ (Celebration of dogs across North Wales for National Dog Photography Day) PitPat article: https://www.thesun.co.uk/money/12897245/paws-and-claws-fur-ball-cat/ (Round hounds abound - Dog uses tracker to lose weight) Jude Davison's blog: https://www.parklifehoniton.com/post/the-deadly-and-dangerous-dog-obesity-disaster (The dog obesity disaster) Mahmood Reza's landing page for his day: https://www.proactiveresolutions.com/love-my-accountant-day-august-25th-2020 (Love My Accountant Day) Websites that are free to use that list Awareness Days and National Days. http://awarenessdays.com/ (AwarenessDays.com) https://my.captivate.fm/www.holidayscalendar.com/ (http://www.holidayscalendar.com/) Janet Murray's media diary also lists key dates - order one here https://www.janetmurray.co.uk/shop/2021-social-media-diary-planner-pre-order/ref/39/?campaign=MediaDiary (Janet Murray's 2021 Media Diary*)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of joining Janet Murray’s Build Your Online Audience membership programme? Would you like to learn how to get more eyes on your business on social media platforms and online? Perhaps you’re thinking of launching a blog or podcast or YouTube channel and you want to create a buzz before you get started? If the answer is yes, then the Build Your Online Audience programme is a way of increasing your visibility and following. PLEASE NOTE: I am an affiliate for the programme and if you read this post and decide to join via my link, I will be paid a commission. This doesn’t affect the price you pay and this is an honest review of my personal experience of the Build Your Online Audience programme. First, a little background.... Two years ago, I was flailing around as a freelance journalist, being told there was 'no budget' for my ideas and being offered tiny fees for stories that took weeks to put together. I didn't know if I could carry on freelancing and needed another way of making a living, and I tuned into Janet Murray's podcast. Jan was a former Guardian journalist who had started an online PR coaching business and at the time, I thought she might be a bit posh and snooty as she worked for a broadsheet - I was writing mostly for tabloids. Several episodes in, in episode 300, she talked about being in the same position as a journalist herself, being told there was ‘no budget’ and being paid paltry fees for stories she’d spent weeks working on. I pulled over to the side of the road and sent her a message on Twitter. Then I signed up for her membership, and, after a month as a private coaching client. I invested a lot, over £3000, but I knew something had to change and I needed someone who had walked the path before me to help me. Janet has helped me to build my online business, giving me the steps to follow but most of all the confidence to put myself out there. That's the background to how I came to Build Your Online Audience, and in this episode, I run through what's involved in the programme. The aim is that if you're thinking of joining, listening will help you decide whether it's right for you. If you have any questions, please feel free to drop me a line on my website here on my https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/contact/ (contact form) Key timings in this episode: 0.20 - Background and why I'm talking about the programme 6.02 - What is the Build Your Online Audience Programme and how the membership works. 9.31 - What do you learn on the Build Your Online Audience Programme? 11.30 - Examples of sessions in the programme. 14.22 - Why do you need to build an audience? 15.32 - What else is included in Build Your Online Audience Programme? 18.00 - What does the Build Your Online Audience Programme cost? 19.17 - How much time do you need to allocate to the Build Your Online Audience Programme? 22.58 - Get it done sessions 23.01 - Why I signed up in the first place and why you should follow someone who has walked the path you want to go with your business before you. Links mentioned in this episode: Find out more about Janet Murray's Build Your Online Audience: https://my.captivate.fm/Build%20your%20online%20audience (Build your online audience) Check out the Janet Murray Media Diary: https://www.janetmurray.co.uk/shop/2021-social-media-diary-planner-pre-order/ref/39/?campaign=MediaDiary (Media Diary 2021) Learn about Janet Murray's event: https://www.janetmurray.co.uk/2021sorted/ref/39/ (2021 Sorted) Listen to the Janet Murray Podcast: https://www.janetmurray.co.uk/category/podcast/ (The Janet Murray Show)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you found your way into the pet industry as a second, third or fourth career? Did you once dream of escaping your old job to follow your passion? Karen Maher, a dog trainer and behaviourist and founder of Maher and Hound, felt the same. After 20 years working in London in fashion PR, Karen ditched the City for country life and now works as a successful dog trainer, specialising in rescue dogs. She featured in the Telegraph earlier this year sharing the story behind her career change. In this episode she shares insights to her fashion PR background, including meeting actress Jane Horrocks who played Bubble in Ab Fab - the iconic show about publicist Edina Monsoon, played by Jennifer Saunders. Plus how her own rescue dogs inspired her business Maher and Hounds. And how with social media and the need for so much online content, there has never been a better time to raise awareness of your pet business. Key timings in this episode: 1.25: About Karen Maher 1.47: Karen shares her rescue dog stories 2.22: Karen’s fashion PR background 3.48: How Karen's first dog ended up in the press 4.33: Leaving London for the countryside and adopting rescue dogs 5.18: How her Aunt's terminal diagnosis made her realise life is too short 7.00: Taking her pet business full time 7.10: Background of Tiggy her reactive rescue terrier who had been used for ratting and hunting 9.00: Getting Fred her dog who inspired the business 10.30: Karen’s Telegraph interview talking about Tiggy the Jack Russell 11.37: Working in fashion and Ab Fab’s Bubble’s appearance in her office 12.30: Working with Alexandra McQueen and the fashion business now 13.25: Setting up Maher and Hound 15.55: What life is like now compared to living in London 18.33: Working with street dogs and rescue dogs - giving them their life back 21.00: How Karen builds up clients confidence and help them with their dog through being kind and compassionate 23.18: How using PR skills and social media helped Karen’s business 27.00: If you don't have anything nice don’t say anything at all 28.00: Sharing her own dogs as case studies and how her Hunting hound learnt to recall 31.00: How social media helps boost her pet business 34.00: Being featured in the Telegraph and how it helped build her profile 36.39: Understanding pet parents and being kind to clients 38.29: Karen’s PR wish list for her business, including local press 41.20: How there’s so many media opportunities out there for pet business owners Links mentioned in this episode: Karen in the Telegraph: https://www.telegraph.co.uk/women/life/quit-career-follow-heart-never-looked-back/ (I quit my career to follow my heart and I’ve never looked back ) Karen's website: https://www.maherandhounddogtraining.com/ (Maher and Hound) Follow Karen on Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/maherandhounddogtraining/ (Maher and Hound) If you found this episode helpful, you might like https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/ (How to write a press release for your pet business) or https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/media-stories-pet-business/ (How to find stories in your pet business.)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
If you’re thinking of raising awareness of your pet business in the media then the first thing you need is a story. Remember journalists aren't sitting waiting to write about people's businesses. They're looking for stories, for news. They need to keep their readers, listeners, viewers or followers informed, educated and entertained. If your story idea doesn’t do any of those things, then it’s likely to end up in the trash folder. This weekend I did a talk at Virtual Pet Index, a trade show set up by the Pet Industry Federation about how to find stories in your pet business. This podcast is based on the presentation and if you'd like the worksheet that goes with this episode, https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/Challenge-PitchWorksheet.pdf (click here )to download it. These are the key timings for this episode: 2.01 - What to do if you want to get press coverage and understand PR but aren't ready to hire a PR company or consultant 2.35 - What makes a story 3.50 - Why most press releases end up in the bin - research by Ginger Comms found 63 pitches a day were sent but only 23% were of interest - https://www.gingercomms.com/2020/07/09/heres-the-biggest-pitching-mistake-that-prs-can-make/ (link to poll ) 5.00 - Why your pitch might be ignored - four reasons 8.20 - Why your press release might be ignored - four reasons 12.00 - How can we give journalists what they want - real life, business, news stories 17.00 - Prompts for story ideas and examples 18.45 - Case study Kim O'Donnell 24.10 - Key takeaways - it's not about you, it's the reader. Is it going to create an emotional response? Are you making the journalist's life easier? 26.25 - How to keep in touch @rachelspenceruk on all social media platforms. 26.50 - How to join in the https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/coaching-programme/ (membership programme.) Links mentioned in this episode: Ginger Comms research: https://www.gingercomms.com/2020/07/09/heres-the-biggest-pitching-mistake-that-prs-can-make/ (Mistakes PRs make) Story ideas worksheet: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/2020/09/Challenge-PitchWorksheet.pdf (Story ideas for your pet business) Suzanne Gould in the https://www.telegraph.co.uk/food-and-drink/in-depth/crisis-can-bring-best-us-meet-small-businesses-creating-hope/ (Telegraph talking about her Facebook Group for Edinburgh Dogs in Lockdown). Janey Lowes - https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/meets/janey-lowes-why-im-saving-sri-lankas-street-dogs/ (Meet the vet saving Sri Lanka's dogs) Sally Cousins from Woofers Walkies in her local paper talking about https://www.suffolknews.co.uk/haverhill/news/a-milestone-year-for-dog-walking-business-9120616/ (five years in business). Carla Finzel - https://www.thesun.co.uk/money/12837734/paws-and-claws-zoned-out-pooch/ (Meet the vet nurse helping pets in their homes) Conor's story - https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/brits-take-labrador-cruelly-used-13816545 (Meet the Zante Stray who is now living in a nursing home) Karen Rhodes - https://www.eadt.co.uk/business/coddenham-dog-owner-launches-luxury-dog-hamper-business-1-6392876 (Suffolk pet business owner launches canine luxury dog hampers) Kim O'Donnell stories: https://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-7821419/Ex-School-nurse-sees-dog-accessories-modelled-Boris-Johnsons-dog-Dilyn.html (Her collar and bandana being worn by the Prime Minister’s dog Dilyn.) https://www.pressreader.com/uk/the-daily-telegraph-saturday/20200111/281625307243064 (Her Labrador Leo going to a doggy boot camp.) https://www.express.co.uk/news/uk/1222039/Labrador-Britain-favourite-dog-breed (Leo being a ‘lifesaver’ and helping her cope with her health condition.) Think you have a story and need some support? Book in for a Power Hour here: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/power-hour/ (Power Hour )
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable
How do you feel about content planning? Do you love it? Or find it overwhelming, like feeding a beast that is permanently hungry? If you’re in the latter group then you will love this episode with Janet Murray, a content marketing expert. Janet - aka the Content Queen - has spoken all over the world about content creation AND is a former Guardian journalist and editor. Her social media posts, blogs and podcasts have reached millions of people and she knows what content will engage people - and what will flop. In this episode she shares how pet business owners can create content with ease. Janet spent nearly two decades working as a journalist for national newspapers, focusing on politics and education. She was Education editor at the Guardian before moving into PR, then content marketing and launched The Janet Murray Show in 2015. Janet’s podcast started out focusing on how small business owners could win press coverage. Soon she realised people needed a wider understanding of marketing rather than just press and PR. Now her focus is on building online audiences and her flagship programme is called Build Your Online Audience. It covers branding, social media, content and e mail marketing equipping business owners from all kinds of background with the skills they need to stand out online. Find out more about the https://www.janetmurray.co.uk/build-your-online-audience-new/ref/39/?campaign=BuildYourOnlineAudience (Build Your Online Audience programme here.)* How to create engaging social media posts It can be hard to know what to post on social media and disheartening when you share content and get little or no response. Janet says she has experimented with lots of different styles of posts and she has whittled the most successful ones down to four different types. They are ‘I need to know this,’ ‘I know about this,’ ‘This is what I think,’ and ‘I know how that feels.’ Each post can be adapted to show empathy and understanding with your pet business clients and Janet shares examples in the episode. Why having a pet business is ‘social media gold’ Janet works with business owners from all kinds of backgrounds and says pet business owners are at an advantage because they work with animals. This means there is an endless supply of adorable photos and cute anecdotes, it’s simply a case of trying and testing different styles of posts to see what works. Janet says: “There’s just so much opportunity to create really engaging content that people connect with because people really love their pets. “So I always get really excited if I get a client that does anything pet related, it’s just brilliant.” Key timings and points covered in this episode: 1.02: Janet’s background 3.03: The power of content that makes people stop in their tracks 4.23: What is content? Defining the different mediums of content in 2020 6.13: The challenges of creating content as a business owner 6.45: The importance of timing 7.08: Why people need to ‘care’ about your content 10.42: Where people go wrong on social media 13.15: Calling in favours to get your content seen from family, friends and colleagues 16.32: Understanding the topics your followers or clients are interested in 18.20: Remember people will be watching your content so keep showing up! 20.30: How cornering a niche can help your content be more successful (and your business) 23.08: How to use your Facebook page as a signpost to your Facebook group 24.45: Janet’s four types of posts 25.02: I need to know this content 26.47: I know about that content 28.20: I know how that feels content 32.55: This is what I think content 36.00: Case study - cat hotel post ideas 37.56: Case study - pet product maker ideas 39.45: Case study - pet business service providers 41.59: Lead magnet ideas for pet business owners 42.15: Considering the problems your clients have for content ideas 44.32: Lots of ideas around poo! 46.02:...
In March 2020 the world was turned upside when the devastation of Coronavirus hit the UK. As well as the confusion as to what the virus was and what it was capable of, we feared for our health and that of our families and loved ones. Then on March 23rd full lockdown hit. We were told to ‘Stay at home, protect the NHS, save lives.’ For many working in the pet industry, their businesses skidding to a halt overnight as they were no longer able to go out and walk dogs or care for animals. At the Pet Industry Federation, Nigel Baker, Chief Executive Officer and Alexandra Baker, Chief Operating officer had to make sense of the new restrictions. In the days and weeks that followed, they lobbied ministers on a number of issues such as whether pet shops and groomers could operate, whether dog walkers were providing a key service and campaigned for financial support across the industry, particularly for catteries and kennels who were left devastated when the travel industry shut down. In this episode they share their views on the impact of COVID 19 on the Pet Industry and what the future holds. We talk about their second Pet Index event, a free trade show taking place on October 11th and 12th 2020 and how pet business owners can get involved. Plus how they can upskill at the event and come back from the Coronavirus crisis stronger. Register for https://vpi.vfairs.com/ (Virtual Pet Index here). Key timings in this episode: 2.00: Introduction to Nigel and Alexandra and the background of the Pet Industry Federation. 3.30: What the PIF has been doing to support members since lockdown was announced in March. 4.30: Working with the Government, DEFRA and the Canine and Feline Sector Group and processing the ‘see-saw of information’ for their members. 7.30: How pet shops selling small animals were hit and the steps that needed to be put in place to ensure thousands of baby animals survived. 8.54: Campaigning for groomers to be allowed to continue to operate. 12.34: Using social media to communicate in the crisis to keep members informed. 14.45: Alexandra shares her plans to be more involved with government legislation in the future around pets post COVID. 19.51: Nigel and Alexandra talk about licensing for dog walkers and the rise of the volunteer dog walker in lockdown. 25.11: The benefits of using a professional dog walker. 26.44: Launching the UK’s first Virtual Pet Industry Trade show, Virtual Pet Index in June 2020. 27.03: Welcoming 1700 visitors from all over the world, and how some trade stands reported having MORE sales than at a physical event. 31.33: The global reach of VPI and how it attracted visitors from Canada, America, South America, right across Europe, down to South Africa, China, and Asia. 34.14: Tips on how to make the most of having a stand at VPI to attract global clients. 36.05: The positive side of Coronavirus, being creative, putting on a virtual show and reaching an audience they never would have imagined would come to a UK trade show. 39.02: What’s happening at VPI in October 2020. 40.09: What’s lined up, from taking awesome smartphone photos to packaging to the transport of animals, pet bereavement and American industry experts reflecting on what the next big thing is to hit the UK. 45.00: How to register for the event and take part. 46.50: How the pet industry has adapted and made business owners look inwards, reflect and adapt to serve what’s happening in the world today. 48.43: Can COVID be a positive for the pet industry? 49.15: The puppy boom and concerns about where puppies are coming from. 52.29: How life slowing down has inspired people to have pets and how lockdown has lifted barriers to pet ownership. 54.12: How pet business owners can move and evolve and emerge stronger from the crisis by diversifying. 54.56: Why it’s vital that petpreneurs find a route to communicate with new pet owners to encourage them to use your business. 55.36: What to expect from
Are you thinking of pitching to the media but you're worried about being ignored. Or worst, your story being rejected? Being knocked back is hard and it can often stand in the way of people pitching to journalists. In this episode I share the five reasons why your pitch or press release might be ignored. Plus what you can do to improve your story, and bring back to life an idea you didn't think would land. Key timings in this episode: 1.08 - How the fear of rejection can stand in our way of pitching - myself included 2.30 - Why you shouldn't feel demoralised if your pitch or press release isn't picked up and how you can turn things round. 4.16 - Reasons why your pitch may not be picked up. 4.20 - Because it's not suitable for the publication 6.17 - Because the topic isn't of interest to their readers 7.16 - Because it's not a strong enough story either for that title or if working with a freelance, for them to sell in 8.00 - Using the 'why would anyone care' test. 10.45 - Because the reporter isn't working there at the moment 11.50 - Because they've already covered a similar story recently 12.30 - Case study Kerry Lawson in the Express 14.10 - The next steps if a pitch is ignored 14.30 - Follow up with the journalist by sending one or two e mails 15.20 - Why journalists don't like being phoned 16.25 - Look for another hook or angle 18.55 - Trying a different publication 20.01 - Just because it's not right, right now, doesn't mean it's a no forever 21.03 - Why you should try not to let it get you down or take it personally 23:00 - Using your idea as content for your own website, social media or newsletter. 24.00 - Recap on the points covered Links mentioned in this episode: Claire's Coronavirus advice for pet owners: https://3sts.co.uk/blog/how-to-cope-with-coronovirus-and-self-isolation-if-youre-a-dog-owner/ (Coronavirus and self isolation) Sherry and her marathon on two legs: https://dogs4rescue.co.uk/donate/sherrys-marathon/ (Two legged dog runs Marathon) Dog friendly offices post lockdown: https://www.express.co.uk/news/uk/1320546/Dogs-at-work-dogs-in-offices-UK-offices (Tips on making an office dog friendly from Kerry Lawson) Join the Facebook community: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses/ (Publicity Tips for Pet Businesses Facebook Group) Download my free press release template: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/ (How to write a press release for your pet business)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Petpreneur Julie Maxted started out as a PR in the 1970s and 1980s before setting up her pet care business, Pets, Homes and Gardens. Julie now runs a franchise business with 25 franchisees all over the country caring for animals. She'd had plenty of press coverage but when she came to launch a product, https://www.dog-g8.com/ (Dog-G8), she wanted to learn more about how to reach as many people as possible. Julie was one of the pet businesses who took part in the February Publicity for Pet Businesses Course that led into the membership. She followed the steps in the programme and secured 12 pieces of national coverage in just six months. In this episode Julie shares how she did it, what has changed in the PR world since she left it and her tips for petpreneurs who would like to do the same. Key timings in this episode: 2.15 - Julie's background with Pets Homes and Gardens and starting up DogG8. 3.10 - How having children and getting married led Julie to leave the PR world and join the pet industry. 4.00 - How her lightbulb moment came from when she had to farm several pets out to different places and inspired her pet sitting business so all the animals could be in one place. 5.28 - The Dog-G8 and how feedback from her franchisees inspired her to develop the gate. 6.30 - Testing the Dog-G8 ahead of the launch in September 2019. 7.20 - Her biggest challenge with the new product. 9.00 - Working with influencers to launch and gaining social proof before she focused on her PR. 13.04 - Researching PR options for national and local press. 13.40 - The benefits of working as a team each week and doing tasks. 16.00 - Landing full page articles in pet magazines on her product and how this exceeded her expectations. 18.00 - How Julie had six pieces of press in three months. 20.35 - Networking and follow up and how this landed Julie a piece in Edition Dog magazine. 22.30 - Pitching to caravan magazines - Julie landed five pieces of coverage in these magazines read by her ideal customer. 23.21 - Being mentioned in Woman's Own in a real life story. 23.45 - Using competitions to get coverage - https://player.captivate.fm/episode/5f1d14f3-3e45-40c4-93bd-c44c5af5db28 (listen to the podcast on this here.) 25.45 - Why it's vital to personalise your pitches. 26.30 - PR in the 80s compared to PR now. 27.03 - Leather clad men, boozy lunches and fax machines and how things were Ab Fab in the 1980s and 1990s. 28.20 - Julie's advice to people who would like to work on their own publicity. 30.20 - How it can help if you offer products for journalists to try out. 31.02 - Where to find out more about Julie. Links mentioned in this episode: Julie's Dog Gate website: https://www.dog-g8.com/ (www.dog-g8.com) Using competitions to get coverage: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-make-the-most-out-of-being-featured-in-a-competition/ (Competition blog post) Learn more about The Publicity for Pet Businesses membership: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/publicitymembership/ (How the membership works blog post ) Join the Publicity for Pet Businesses membership programme: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityProgramme (Membership Programme sign up )
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you been using Facebook groups to connect with journalists who might be interested in your story? Or perhaps you would love a journalist to use you as an expert to comment on one of their articles? Maybe you're already in a Facebook group and you've been plugging away with your story but it hasn't been picked up yet. If that's the case then you will love this podcast episode with Jill Foster, a journalist and co-founder of Feature Me. It's a Facebook group connecting journalists and people who want to share their story in the media. It could be about a specific cause or a personal story, or to talk about their business. Jill shares the best way to go about this, and how to become a go-to person for journalists. Plus how NOT to behave in Facebook groups. Key timings for this episode: 0.00 - Facebook groups and what's happening in the PR challenge. 3.02 - Jill's background as a journalist. 5.50 - How the FeatureMe group came about. 6.20 - What inspired Jill to set up the group. 10.15 - How the FeatureMe group works and why Jill only allows trusted journalists to share requests. 11.55 - Why it's really important to protect case studies who are considering appearing in the media. 12.50 - Some examples of the case study requests in FeatureMe. 18.40 - Examples of the pet requests in the group. 25.30 - How the media has changed and how people don’t need to hire a fancy PR to connect with journalists anymore. 32.00 - Best practice in the group to ensure you make the most of the opportunities there. 36.15 - How people can find out more and join FeatureMe. Links mentioned in this episode: Sign up for the PR challenge: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster (PR challenge) Feature Me on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/groups/166398616795827/ (Feature Me Group) You can follow Feature Me on Twitter here: https://twitter.com/FeatureMeUK (FeatureMe on Twitter) Jill's Website: https://www.jillfoster.co.uk/ (Jill Foster website) Follow Jill on Twitter: https://twitter.com/JournalistJill (Jill Foster on Twitter) Meno-paws feature in the Daily Mail: https://www.dailymail.co.uk/femail/article-7687089/Dogs-secret-weapon-dealing-menopause-say-four-women.html (Are dogs the secret weapon in the menopause?)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Would you love to get media coverage for your pet service business but feel unsure where to start? If you're a service provider like a dog walker, groomer, trainer or pet sitter, then it's vital people who live nearby know about what it is that you have to offer. Having media coverage can elevate your status and make you the star pet business and the go-to person in your town or village. But where do you start when it comes to pitching? Last week I did a Twitter Q and A for #PetworkingHour and this was where people seemed to get stuck. So in this episode I explore the different types of places you can pitch to. Plus there's plenty of examples from pet business owners who have pitched successfully and have become the name on the tip of everyone's tongue. Key timings in this episode: 1.21 - The Publicity for Pet Businesses challenge and how it works. 2.25 - Why it's important for pet service providers to be reaching publications covering news in their local community. 4.47 - Coverage in local newspapers and how you can find different sections to pitch to. 7.00 - How Karen Boyce has become the go-to puppy trainer in Wales and how she has built fantastic relationships with her local newspaper. 9.55 - Using local magazines to get coverage and how this can help your pet business. 11.40 - Jude from Parklife Honiton and how she secured a double page spread in a local magazine featuring Magnus, one of her doggy clients. 14.27 - Pitching to local radio stations. 15.07 - How Kerry Lawson featured on her local radio talking about pets and anxiety to promote her Happy Dog Project. 15.37 - How Becky Baker featured on BBC Radio Leeds talking about her K9CleanUp litter cleaning project. 17.00 - How to find community websites to pitch to - they can often have a larger reach than print newspapers when it comes to online and social media. 20.00 - Working with bloggers. If a blogger covers your area and has a large, targeted audience, consider working with them too. 22.14 - Case study - Gabby Kuehn from PAAW House and why she pitched to The Dogvine to highlight her campaign about pet friendly landlords. 23.30 - Case study - Katie Guastapaglia from Dogwood on my pet blog talking about canine hoopers. 24.00 - How to take part in the PR challenge. Links mentioned in this episode: Sign up for the challenge via e mail here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster (publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster) PR Challenge - https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/prchallenge/ (everything you need to know to take part.) Petworking hour on Twitter - every Tuesday at 6-7pm UK time - here is the PetworkingHour Account - https://twitter.com/PetworkingHour (https://twitter.com/PetworkingHour) The Bella Vasta Podcast – https://jumpconsulting.net/bellas-podcasts/ (only be in competition with yourself.) Karen Boyce - https://www.bordercountiesadvertizer.co.uk/news/18223650.puppy-trainer-karen-enjoys-wales-popular/ (The most popular dog trainer in Wales) Karen Boyce - https://www.leaderlive.co.uk/news/18225923.llangollen-dog-trainer-celebrates-milestone-achievement-beastly-thoughts-professional-dog-service/ (Wales' top puppy trainer) PAAW House on the Dogvine - https://thedogvine.com/how-paaw-house-is-helping-wild-at-heart-foundation-and-streetvet/ (How PAAW House is helping the Wild at Heart foundation and StreetVet) Canine Hoopers - https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/fun-stuff/what-is-canine-hoopers-and-how-can-it-help-your-dog/ (What is canine hoopers and how can it help my dog?)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you had an idea for a story or press release and then Googled it only to realise it's just been done? Or pitched to a journalist and had a reply saying they had JUST done the same story. All is not lost - and in this episode I explain what you to salvage your story. In this episode are real examples of when this has happened with stories I've worked on and other journalists, and how the person in the story turned it round. Key timings in this episode: 0.00 - Intro and details for the PR challenge taking place from 14-18th September. 2.15 - Why your story isn't dead in the water if it's just been covered. 4.14 - What to do if your pitch is linked to an awareness day. 5.40 - How Kerry Jordan has coverage all year round for her National Dog Photography Day. 6.44 - Case Study - How Emma Stewart got coverage for Brain Injury Awareness week a year later. 9.02 - How to use similar awareness days throughout the years - there will be others! 9.26 - What to do if your pitch is based on a study or survey. 11.16 - Case Study - How Greg Buchanen from Bitsol Solutions had his Pet-ernity leave case study reproduced all over the world! 12.02 - How Pawshake got three pieces of national coverage after contacting me about a story I'd just written. 13.26 - Seasonal pitches - remember that journalists cover the same stories each year so get in early. 17.03 - What to do if you've missed being in a product round up. 20.29 - How you can change your angle if your story has already been covered and freshen it up. 21.20 - Case study - Kerry Lawson changed her angle on post lockdown separation anxiety and led to a full page in the Sunday Express and on the radio. 25.02 - What's the worst that can happen? The journalist deletes your e mail and it's forgotten! 26.45 - Information on the free PR challenge. Links mentioned in this episode: Free PR Challenge sign up page: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster (PR challenge September 2020) Kerry's https://www.express.co.uk/news/uk/1320546/Dogs-at-work-dogs-in-offices-UK-offices (dog friendly office advice in the Sunday Express.) https://www.facebook.com/groups/lightbulbhangout/ (Lightbulb Facebook Group) Pet Models story: https://www.thesun.co.uk/news/12168652/instagram-dogs-getting-paid-500-a-day/ (Meet the Instagram famous dogs)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Do you ever struggled to come up with ideas to promote your pet business? With so many plates spinning, plus doing your actual job of caring for animals or making products for them, talking about what you do can be the last thing on the list. But consistently sharing how to support your clients can help you retain existing ones and win new ones too. The Top Answer In My Free Facebook Group When I Ask What People Find Challenging Is Coming Up With Ideas. So I thought I would create a free download with 27 ideas on it. In this episode I talk about my own resistance to writing about myself and how I got over it. Plus it explains each idea and how to use it with examples from pet business owners on what worked for them, These are the key timings in this episode: 0.00 - Intro to why I created the download 3.12 - How I felt uncomfortable putting my own stories and tips out there 4.15 - Working with SEO company 360 Spin and how Malcolm Maybury persuaded me to stop being silly! 8.35 - How the ideas aren't all about social media 10.00 - The 27 ideas explained one by one 25.37 - How to get in touch if you use the ideas Links mentioned in this episode: Get the ideas download: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/27ideas (27 ideas for pet businesses) Lorraine Kelly talking about how her https://www.goodhousekeeping.com/uk/lifestyle/a33445984/lorraine-kelly-dog-lockdown/ (Border Terrier Angus helped her cope in lockdown). How to write a press release for your pet business – tune in to https://player.captivate.fm/episode/2d6610ce-59fc-48d4-98b3-d99777d042d1 (this podcast) for more support. How to find journalists to pitch to – tune in to https://player.captivate.fm/episode/57ecdb3b-254e-4cf6-9d03-a8c3eeea5030 (this podcast) for more tips. How to be the expert – tune in to https://player.captivate.fm/episode/6b3d32cd-fef1-4466-8460-47ea07bc346c (this podcast) for more tips. Stephanie from https://scrubadugdugayrshire.co.uk/ (Scrub a Dug Dug) Ayrshire who had a doggy disco. Groomer Anna from https://www.thedoghouseleicester.co.uk/ (The Dog House Leicester) who had a Canine Coffee morning with walkers How to get publicity from a competition – listen to http://www.apple.com/uk (this podcast) for more information. How to run a challenge for pet owners from Alex from https://rovepets.com/ (Rove Pet Services) The Bella Vasta Podcast – https://jumpconsulting.net/bellas-podcasts/ (only be in competition with yourself.)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
When Suzanne Gould set up her dog walking company in 2017, she knew being visible would mean more clients. She started out with a Facebook page, then focused more on marketing and writing her own content. First came newsletters, then e mails, then blogs, and in 2019, she decided she wanted to get some media coverage. She read my book, Publicity Tips for Pet Businesses, and had some press releases featured in her local paper in Edinburgh. Suzanne wanted to feel confident writing, so took part in my first Create Content With Confidence programme and her blog took off. Next, she decided she wanted more publicity, so did the programme that started in February which is now a membership. Then.... Lockdown hit. Suzanne couldn't go out and walk or train dogs and was stuck at home with her Old English Sheepdogs, Erick and Ally. But she didn't wallow. She set up a Facebook group, Edinburgh Dogs in Lockdown and attracted hundreds of owners. Then she started pitching stories about her group to the media. She featured in the Telegraph, the Scotsman, and even gave tips to Loose Woman star Kaye Adams on BBC Radio Scotland. AND she wrote a book! The Rescue Dog Ranger's Road Map - a step by step guide new pet parents can follow to transform their rescue dog into a calm, confident canine. In this episode, Suzanne talks about leaving behind a career in fashion to set up a pet business. And she breaks down the steps she followed to get publicity in top publications. Here are the key timings and topics covered in this episode: 3.01 - How Suzanne started out as a fashion designer before being made redundant from her job and starting a dog walking business. 5.06 - Being terrified setting up her new business and how she walked dogs with Flash and Nora by her side. 6.54 - The struggles she had at the beginning finding clients and how she kept going. 9.17 - Hiring business coach Dominic Hodgson and how she went from being terrified to full and needing to hire staff in just a year! 11.40 - Starting dog training classes in February 2019 using the knowledge she'd built up working with her own dogs. 12.00 - Training Flash to be a therapy dog and blood donor and how this inspired her to be a dog training. 12.56 - What it was like for her at training classes with Flash when he was the naughty dog in the room. 18.00 - How she felt about writing when she first started and building her confidence. 20.32 - How letting go of her fear of not writing formally helped her business. 23.01 - Niching to working with rescue dogs and learning they needed confidence training to help them cope with life. 29.00 - Using publicity to make more people aware of her business. 29.20 - How Suzanne's Facebook group supporting dog owners was featured in the Telegraph, then the Scotsman, then BBC Radio Scotland. 31.04 - What it was like speaking to Kaye Adams and teaching her how to train her Cockapoo Bea. 34.00 - How lockdown gave her confidence to do Facebook lives. Suzanne did lives nearly every day in lockdown in her group. 35.20 - Finding the confidence to write a book in lockdown and how Suzanne wrote 46,000 words about rescue dogs in lockdown. 37.35 - How writing the book has given her confidence as a trainer and a walker knowing she will be helping rescue dogs and their owners. 39.00 - Suzanne's message - whatever you do to help your dog is perfect enough. 40.32 - The biggest lesson - That I'm brilliant enough just as I am and believing in herself. 42.48 - Suzanne's advise to people starting out. Start with your own self belief and self worth and look at the clients that you have. 44.12 - Suffering with Imposter Syndrome and how looking at the changes she made to people's lives to build her self belief. 45.35 - Where to find out more about Suzanne and her awesome new book! Links mentioned in this episode: Suzanne's website: https://edinburghholisticdogs.co.uk/blog/ (www.edinburghholisticdogs.co.uk ) Suzanne's Facebook...
Are you thinking of pitching a story about your pet business to the media and you're unsure as to whether you need a pitch or a press release? Well the good news is you might need to do less work than you thought. Often a pitch or even a quick message on social media is all you need to secure fantastic coverage in newspapers and magazines. In this episode you will learn the difference between a pitch and a press release, what you need for each one, and what to send alongside your pitch or press release. Here are the key timings and topics covered in this episode: 0.31 - Intro - PR challenge is taking place from 15th to 19th September 2020. This is an opportunity to learn how to get free publicity for your pet business. 2.50 - How you don't have to go to the lengthy process of writing a press release to get media coverage. 3.30 - Facebook groups where you can get publicity - Feature Me and Lightbulb. 5.23 - Using Twitter and the Journorequest hashtag to get media opportunities. 6.30 - Breaking down what you need to put in your pitch and covering the 'when, where, why, what, who and how.' 8.10 - Case study Becky Baker and her two month road trip to find the UK's most dog friendly place. 10.20 - What else to include in your pitch. How it's vital to include relevant photos, phone number and a short bio. 12.10 - What is a press release? There is a full episode on writing press releases which you can listen to https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/ (here. ) 13.20 - What makes a story, something new, charity event, news story, lightbulb moment or inspiring animal. 14.50 - Writing an e mail heading for your press release to catch attention. 15.10 - Why you should keep it simple in the language you use and not use jargon. 16.30 - Case study Claire Lawrence and her barking dog tour. 17.10 - What details to include in your press release. 18.20 - How to format your press release in the e mail. Don't use attachments! 19.10 - Using download links to send over photos rather than large files. 20.20 - How to get involved with the FREE PR challenge in September. Links mentioned in this episode: September PR Challenge - this is FREE challenge to help you get press coverage and you can sign up here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster (PR taster) Facebook groups: https://www.facebook.com/groups/lightbulbhangout/ (Lightbulb ) https://www.facebook.com/groups/166398616795827/ (Feature Me) https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/animal-lover-cockapoo-begin-hunt-14995545 (Becky Baker story about her Pawsontour K9Nation tour: ) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/ (How to write a press release for your pet business) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-use-twitter-to-get-press-coverage/ (How to use Twitter to get press coverage)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Is getting more engagement on social media something you want to achieve in your pet business? The more people we can reach online, the better, and standing out on social media can lead to publicity opportunities. This week I’m speaking to Helen Motteram, a dog behaviourist from Social Paws, who regularly receives hundreds of shares on her social media posts. I first discovered her on social media two years ago and her posts stood out because as the former owner of an anxious dog, they had so much warmth and empathy. I felt she understood what I’d been through. Helen spoke to me about how to make your pet business stand out on social media, and how to build powerful connections with pet owners. Here are the key timings and topics covered in this episode: 1.46 - Helen’s background as dog behaviourist and business coach based in Cheltenham in Gloucestershire. She started her career as a pet professional working in rescues. 3.39 - How Helen started working with anxious dogs. 5.41 - Going against the grain on social media. How empathising with owners rather than making them feel guilty helped Helen stand out. 7.45 - Starting out ten years ago on Facebook and how Helen learned to create posts that built an emotional connection. 9.35 - Finding the right words and phrases that resonated with owners - like ‘my dog’s friendly’ and ‘your dog is not a monster.’ 11.18 - Helen’s advice on making the owner the hero of the story rather than the villain and making posts that are relatable. 12.42 - Helen’s advice to owners of anxious dogs on how they can support them, 15.12 - Why it’s important to create a range of posts so your feed is a mix of education, inspiration, success stories and relatable content. 16.02 - Why you should have you face on your Facebook profile photo. 18.50 - How Helen tries to walk in the shoes of her ideal client or dog owner. 19.05 - Why you should avoid jargon and keep it simple. 22.30 - Coming up with ideas for social media posts. 25.02 - Helen’s mentors. Helen works with business coach Robin Waite and recommends following Dan Meredith. She also does Jon Buchan’s Charm Offensive programme. 29.12 - How pet business owners can sell without feeling uncomfortable and her advice on creating social media posts to show how you help people can help overcome that awkward feeling. 31.20 - How standing out on social media has helped Helen. It’s led to media opportunities, speaking opportunities, and lots of word of mouth referrals for her dog training and walking business. 33.14 - Starting out again with her marketing after hiring husband Tristan to work alongside her at Social Paws. 35.24 - How Helen ended up on the This Morning sofa after sharing her story about Russell Crowe the Rook. 37.01 - How Helen is now on the books as an expert with radio and TV companies and what this has done for her profile. 38.07 - Advice on niching as a pet business owner. 41.28 - How we shouldn’t be scared to be ourselves online and that it can be easier to share our own stories than generic posts. 43.10 - About Pet Professional Network and how Helen’s business support community works. 45.44 - Details on Helen’s online event taking place in September. 46.12 - How to find out more about Helen and connect on social media - see links below. Links mentioned in this episode: Follow Helen’s Social Paws page on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/socialpawscheltenham/ (https://www.facebook.com/socialpawscheltenham/) Pet Professional Network on Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/petpronetwork/ (https://www.facebook.com/petpronetwork/) Pet Professional Network free group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/592717694264410/ (https://www.facebook.com/groups/592717694264410/) Pet Professional Network website: https://www.petpronetwork.com/ (https://www.petpronetwork.com/) Robin Waite website: https://www.robinwaite.com/ (https://www.robinwaite.com/) Jon Buchan website:...
Taking part in media competitions and giveaways can help you raise the profile of your pet business. It can make thousands and potentially millions of people who didn’t know your brand aware of what it is you do. Competitions regularly appear in newspapers, magazines, online publications, blogs, podcasts, on the radio and TV and whether your brand is big or small you can take part. This episode shares all you need to know about taking part in a competition on how to maximize the opportunity when it comes to promoting your pet business. Here are the key timings and topics covered in this episode: 3.10 - Why take part in a competition? 4.24 - Working out what you want from the competition. 5.51 - Choosing the right publication for your competition. 6.24 - What do you need to take part in the competition? 7.49 - How much do you need to give away? 8.30 - What you need for your competition pitch. 9.00 - Finding publications to pitch to and finding journalist's contact details. (Check https://player.captivate.fm/episode/57ecdb3b-254e-4cf6-9d03-a8c3eeea5030 (this episode) for more information on finding journalist's contact details) 9.22 - Finding competition opportunities on social media. 9.57 - Finding competition opportunities in the publications. 10.46 - Building up a buzz before the competition. 11.48 - Learning about the comper community on Money Saving Expert. 13.01 - Ways of sharing the competition on the day to make sure you reach as many people as possible. 14.20 - How to turn compers into customers after the competition. 16.03 - What to do when the winners have been chosen. 19.42 - Gathering data after the competition to see the impact on your brand. 21.00 - Creating competitions of your own on social media. 24.05 - Managing expectations around your competition. Links mentioned in this episode: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-find-the-right-journalist-to-contact-with-your-press-release/ (How to find journalist's contact details) Janet Murray podcast about running your own competition https://www.scruffylittleterrier.com/product/birthday-boy-dog-bandana/ (Scruffy Little Terrier Birthday Boy page) https://forums.moneysavingexpert.com/categories/competitions-time (Money Saving Expert forums)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Who doesn't love looking at adorable animal photos? Big or small, old or young, a fabulous animal photo is always scroll stopping! Later this month, on July 26th, it's National Dog Photography Day, Kerry plans to flood the internet with dog photos. Kerry founded the awareness day three years ago and last year trended on Twitter at number 1. In this episode she shares her top tips on using photography to build a buzz around your pet business. She also shares actionable steps you can follow to get better photos of your dog (they can be applied to any animal though!) Do please join in on National Dog Photography Day too! Here are the key timings and topics covered in this episode: 0.30 - Kerry's background and how she became a pet photographer. 2.24 - What it's like living with her five Whippets - Kerry's dogs Scout, Boo, Shadow, Bertie and Jasper feature in many of her projects if clients need a dog model or five! 4.04 - The variety of brands Kerry works with from accessories to sofa toppers to protect furniture from dog hair! 5.36 - How Kerry's imagery has led to brands featuring in the Sunday Times Style. 8.03 - What pet brands struggle with when it comes to creating their own images. 9.53 - Planning your photoshoot and looking for inspiration for your images. 11.31 - Kerry's advice on the stock shots pet product makers should have when it comes to photography. 13.21 - What to do if you don't want to be in the picture yourself. 14.31 - Kerry's advice on the images to have if you have a service based pet business, for example a groomer, walker or pet sitter. 17.01 - Finding the right photographer to capture your pet business. 18.30 - What to look for when you're looking at their portfolio - Kerry says it's important to have an emotional connection to the images. 22.31 - National Dog Photography Day - how Kerry came to launch it. You can listen to her Awareness Day episode here: https://player.captivate.fm/episode/2ab5f803-d5e0-4aa4-8d93-55f85147d7a3/ (How launching an awareness day can help your pet business) 25.01 - Kerry's first year on National Dog Photography Day and how she hit the headlines. 25.30 - Trending at Number 1 on Twitter in 2019, Snoop Dog, GMTV, Churchill and other celebs getting involved. 27.44 - Kerry's tips on how to take better photos for National Dog Photography Day. Prepare your image beforehand. Make sure your image is consistent with your brand. Advice on lighting. The best time of day and place to capture your pet. Keeping the background clean and clear. 33.14 - Tips on when to share your image - it's early! 35.14 - Details on Kerry's Facebook Live for my Publicity for Pet Businesses group where she will show you how to take photos. (opt in for e mail updates here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/OptIn (Opt in form)) Links mentioned in this episode: Kerry's website: https://www.furandfables.com/ (www.furandfables.com) Awareness Day Podcast: https://player.captivate.fm/episode/2ab5f803-d5e0-4aa4-8d93-55f85147d7a3/ (How launching an awareness day can help your pet business) Kerry's Furdography course: https://www.furandfables.com/furdography-for-beginners/ (https://www.furandfables.com/furdography-for-beginners/) Karen from Luxury Dog Hampers and how her Tweet on Election Day made the Metro: https://metro.co.uk/2019/12/12/dogs-polling-stations-back-cutest-part-general-election-11771556/ (Dogs at polling stations) Ppt in for e mail updates so you know when Kerry is doing her Facebook live here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/OptIn (Opt in form)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of pitching a story around your pet business or products and not sure how soon you should get in touch? This month is http://www.christmasinjuly.co/power-pitching.php (Christmas in July), an annual event where brands large and small showcase Christmas offerings. It’s a reminder that if you’re thinking of pitching anything related to Christmas you need to start thinking about promoting it now. And whatever story it is you’re thinking of contacting the media about, how successful you will be does depend on your planning. How early you need to pitch depends on a lot of different factors but the key message is… You can never pitch too early! Here are the key timings and topics covered in this episode: 1.26 - Why journalists are thinking about Christmas now. 2.30 - How an article I pitched in January to the Puppy Post has only been published this week. 5.20 - How Roz landed a piece in Puppy Post from my PR challenge. 6.02 - What to do if you are pitching a news story. 7.13 - Bournemouth beach example. 9.02 - What do do if you're pitching a business story. 9.40 - How early to pitch for a product round up story. 11.40 - How Kim from Leo, Charley and Me landed a piece in a Spring product round up in January. 12.40 - How early should you pitch for a charity event. 12.50 - Case study Dominic Hodgson's Tour De Rescue. 14.50 - How early to pitch for a launch of a new product or service and ideas to make your launch more appealing. 17.31 - How soon should I pitch a story around an awareness day? 17.51 - Case study Kerry Jordan - National Dog Photography Day. 19.16 - How it's never too soon to pitch with feedback from journalists Matilda Bourne and Jenny Stallard, founder of Freelance Feels. 20.00 - Information on my free PR challenge starting in September 2020. Links mentioned in this episode: The Puppy Post online magazine: https://www.puppypost.co.uk/ (www.puppypost.co.uk). Download the latest magazine: https://issuu.com/info-puppypost.co/docs/issue_4_-_july_aug (Issue 4 - July and August) Sign up for the next PR challenge in September here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster (PR challenge) Learn about Kim from Leo, Charley and Me. https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/ (Leo, Charley and Me) Learn about the Tour De Rescue story at https://www.chroniclelive.co.uk/news/north-east-news/dog-lover-cycle-200-mile-16876950 (Dominic Hodgson on the Tour De Rescue.) Learn about National Dog Photography Day founder Kerry at https://www.furandfables.com/ (www.furandfables.com). Learn about Jenny Stallard and Freelance Feels: https://www.freelancefeels.com/ Planning ahead? You can download my free https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (Press Release Template) here. Other resources you may find helpful: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-find-the-right-journalist-to-contact-with-your-press-release/ (How to find the right journalist to contact ) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-write-a-press-release-for-your-pet-business/ (How to write a press release for your pet business) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/seven-easy-ways-to-approach-a-journalist/ (Seven easy ways to approach a journalist)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
This time a year ago, Kim O’Donnell, founder of Leo, Charley and Me pet accessories, wanted to learn to get visible. She had a business making pretty collars and products for pet owners inspired by her rescue Cocker Spaniel Charley. But having spent her career working as a school nurse, when it came to standing out online and reaching new customers, she felt totally overwhelmed. Now, a year on, Kim has a global business, her website traffic has increased by nearly 700 per cent and she's had to bring in her daughter to help cope with demand. In this episode Kim shares how she did it and her tips on getting publicity for your pet business. Here are the key timings and topics covered in this episode: 1.02 - Kim's background as a school nurse. 2.30 - How her Spaniel Charley being mistaken as a boy inspired her to create her products 3.24 - When Kim realised she needed to be visible online 4.02 - How Kim struggled to get people to her website 7.30 - Boris Johnson's dog Dilyn wearing her product on election day 9.01 - How Kim's website traffic grew 11.21 - Feeling scared about blowing her own trumpet 13.00 - Being part of a community and how that boosted Kim's confidence 16.46 - Pitching to local publications 17.46 - How this led to Kim being in the Daily Mail 20.19 - Pitching stories about her personal life including Leo going to a doggy boot camp which appeared in the Telegraph and Lifesaving Labradors in the Express 21.54 - How using Twitter has helped Kim's pet business 24.09 - Making masks to match her accessories in lockdown 24.56 - How her business has helped Kim cope with shielding in lockdown by making NHS scrubs and masks 29.30 - Making 250 masks and being on the first page of Google for hand made face masks! 32.22 - How her website visits went up from 210 in three months to 1000 a month 34.00 - Kim's increase in confidence 36.01 - How Kim is now concentrating on social media 38.02 - The Daily Mail comments section and Kim's advice on how to cope! 39.00 - Charley's background, how she was nearly put to sleep and why 15% of all sales go to Spaniel Aid 42.19 - Taking her craft fairs from real life to online 45.01 - Kim's advice for anyone starting out Links and resources mentioned in this episode: Leo, Charley and Me: https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/blogs/blog/why-i-set-up-leo-charley-me-dog-accessories (https://leocharleyandme.co.uk) Kim in the Daily Mail: https://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-7821419/Ex-School-nurse-sees-dog-accessories-modelled-Boris-Johnsons-dog-Dilyn.html (The Dilyn Effect) Kim on The Paw Post: https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/fun-stuff/how-to-dress-your-dog-like-dilyn/ (How to dress your dog like Dilyn) Birmingham Mail: https://www.birminghammail.co.uk/news/uk-news/meet-staffordshire-woman-responsible-dressing-17466807 (Meet the woman who dressed the Prime Minister's Dog!) Stoke Sentinel: https://www.stokesentinel.co.uk/news/stoke-on-trent-news/dilyn-effect-meet-staffordshire-woman-3675606 (The Dilyn Effect) Sunday Express: https://www.express.co.uk/news/uk/1222039/Labrador-Britain-favourite-dog-breed (Lifesaving Ladbradors) Telegraph: https://www.pressreader.com/uk/the-daily-telegraph-saturday/20200111/281625307243064 (We took our anxious dog to a boot camp) Blog on why Kim set up Leo, Charley and Me: https://leocharleyandme.co.uk/blogs/blog/why-i-set-up-leo-charley-me-dog-accessories (Our Background) Membership programme: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityProgramme (Publicity for Pet Businesses Membership.) Download the press release series: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (Press Release Template)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Does your pet business website have a blog section? Have you thought about writing one but never quite got round to it? Or maybe you’ve started one and life has got in the way. You’ve heard about the benefits when it comes to SEO and people being about to discover your products and services. If this is sounding familiar and you’re thinking about getting started the podcast this week is all about blogging. It’s a recording from a workshop I did at the Pet Industry Federation Virtual Pet Index event on Sunday June 14th. All the recordings of the webinars from Virtual Pet Index are available until July 14th. If you’d like access, you can set up an account here: https://vpetindex.vfairs.com/en/login (https://vpetindex.vfairs.com/en/login) Here are the key timings and topics covered in this episode: 2.12 - My background and why I started blogging 4.41 - What is blogging 5.30 - Why start a pet business blog 6.30 - Standing out in a crowded market 7.12 - Showing how you solve your clients' problems in your blog 8.30 - Why blogging is great because it's free! 8.45 - Showing off your products on your blog 9.12 - How blogging can help you get to the top of Google 9.20 - Matching the needs of searchers with websites that meet those needs 10.50 - What do you want to be known for? 11.45 - Getting started with your pet business blog 12.13 - Add the blog to your site 12.40 - How often are you going to post 13.01 - How being accountable can help 13.20 - Ideas for your first five blog posts 16.50 - Essentials for each post like headlines, images, sub headings, call to action, meta description. 20.23 - Promoting your blog post 22.01 - Remember everyone starts at zero 23.01 - Your reasons for blogging and how they can keep you consistent 23.30 - Jude Davidson from Park Life Honiton 24.20 - Alex Graves from Rove Pet Services in Essex 25.00 - Lottie Clements from the Cosy Canine Company 27.04 - Recommended reading 28 - The Kick Start Your Pet Business Blog online programme Links mentioned in this episode: If you'd like to check out the pet businesses I mentioned, here are their websites. Jude Davidson - Park Life Honiton. Read her blogs here: https://www.parklifehoniton.com/ (www.parklifehoniton.com/) Alex Graves - Rove Pet Services. Learn more: https://rovepets.com/blog/ (www.rovepets.com) Lottie Clements - Cosy Canine Company. Read her blog: https://thecosycaninecompany.co.uk/ (www.thecosycaninecompany.co.uk/) Kick Start Your Pet Business Blog programme Easy to follow blog post template. Five ideas for product and service businesses. How to explainer videos. How to repurpose a blog post in 20 ways! A 30 minute one to one call. This course is usually £127 but use PIF30 at checkout and it’s just £97. Sign up: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/tLm6zesR (Kick Start Pet Business Blog) Other resources: Natasha Courtenay Smith - The Million Dollar Blog https://amzn.to/2YHx9or (on Amazon) (Affiliate Link) Tim Kitchen-Cameron - How to get to the top of Google https://amzn.to/2YHx9or (on Amazon) (Affiliate Link)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Want to learn how to create FOMO around your pet business? This week I'm chatting to the Queen of FOMO - May King Tsang! She has created FOMO all over the world and shares her tips in this episode. Getting a buzz and excitement around your products and services can work alongside your PR efforts. And it can help you attract media interest and win press coverage. May King shares all you need to know to get started with FOMO and how it transformed her life and business. Here are the key timings and topics covered in this episode: 3:00 - How May King became a FOMO creator. 5:50 - What is FOMO? 8:44 - How publicity works on social media. 15.00 - What holds people back from creating FOMO. 19:04 - How to promote yourself without cringing. 20:00 - What holds people back from promoting themselves. 26.45 - Opportunities May King and her clients have enjoyed thanks to creating FOMO. 34:03 - How can pet business owners use FOMO to their advantage? 38.46 - Different ways to create FOMO including lives, photos, social media and on your website. 43.32 - May King’s class inside the Publicity for Pet Businesses membership. 47:00 - How to find out more about May King and FOMO. Links mentioned in this episode: Interested in signing up for the Membership Programme? It’s £57 a month or £627 for the year and you can do so here: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/coaching-programme/ (Publicity for Pet Businesses Membership. ) If you’d like to find out more about May King, you can visit her website here: http://fomocreator.com/ (http://fomocreator.com/) Follow her on social media: Twitter: https://twitter.com/maykingtea (https://twitter.com/maykingtea) Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/maykingt (https://www.facebook.com/maykingt) Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/maykingtea/ (https://www.instagram.com/maykingtea/) LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/maykingtsang/ (https://www.linkedin.com/in/maykingtsang/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of pitching a story about your pet business to the media and need to write a press release? A press release is simply a document written in a certain format that means it contains all the vital information the journalist needs to write an article. In this episode I’m going to explain everything you need to know so you can write a press release for your pet business to boost your chance of success when you pitch to the media. Here are the key timings and topics covered in this episode: 1.40 - Shout out to Becky from https://k9nation.uk/ (K9Nation) and Lottie from the https://thecosycaninecompany.co.uk/ (Cosy Canine Company) to thank them for their reviews. 3.20 - What is a press release and definitions of a press release. 4.05 - What journalists are looking for in a story. 4.32 - Ideas on what makes a story. 6.00 - Sherry runs a marathon story from Dogs4Rescue. 6.11 - Why you need to write a press release. 8.10 - What to do if you don't have a press release. 8.21 - Why you don't have to have someone write it for you. 9.16 - Power Hour sessions. 9.30 - Press Release package. 9.42 - Photos to go with your press release. 10.49 - Where do I send my press release? 11.20 - How your local paper is a great place for you to start building relationships with journalists and if you do this well, can lead to a steady stream of coverage. 12.28 - Pitching yourself as an expert 12.36 - How journalists will always Google your name and want to see other articles, so blogs, news pieces, podcasts, book listings if you have a book, reassuring them you are an expert. 14.00 - How do I write my press release? Using the template. 14.30 - Choosing a title. 15.43 - Writing your headline. 16.10 - Your intro. 16.36 - Key things a press release should cover. 18.21 - Quotes - what's going to evoke an emotional response? 19.29 - Further information on what the story is about. 20.30 - Example from Julie at the https://www.dog-g8.com/ (DogG8 company). 21.41 - Summarising your story. 22.40 - Notes to the editor section. 23.00 - How to send high resolution images without clogging up inboxes! 23.30 - Notes to the editor. 23.45 - Essentials to have on your website. 24.40 - How to get the template and more information on my Membership programme. Links mentioned in this episode: Sherry runs a marathon story: https://www.manchestereveningnews.co.uk/news/greater-manchester-news/paralysed-dog-running-marathon-raise-16787797 (Paralysed dog runs marathon) Tour De Rescue story: https://www.chroniclelive.co.uk/news/north-east-news/dog-lover-cycle-200-mile-16876950 (Dog lover on epic Tour De Rescue cycle ride to help rehome dogs in need) Membership programme: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PublicityProgramme (Publicity for Pet Businesses Membership.) Download the press release series: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (Press Release Template) Book in a Power Hour: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/power-hour/ (Power Hour) Book in for the Press Release writing service: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/press-release-service/ (Press Release Writing)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you heard about amazing things people have achieved through Facebook ads but ended up frustrated when you’ve tried it for yourself? Whether you have a pet product or service business, no doubt there’s been a time where you’ve attempted setting up an ad and got stuck. This week I’m speaking to Facebook ads expert and dog mum of two Jo Francis to demystify the ‘dark art of Facebook ads’. Jo specialises in Facebook ads and e mail marketing and lives in Kent with her two children and dogs Bob and Bear. She helps business owners understand advertising on the social media network through training and done-for-you services. Here is a summary of the episode with the timings of the key points covered: 2.24 - Retargeting and how Jo couldn't resist buying the 'calming bed' for her two dogs Bob and Bear. 6.22 - How Facebook ads work and the journey we go on as pet owner when it comes to being targeted for products and service. 8.25 - Where to start with setting up an ad in Ads Manager. 10.20 - Planning your ad and deciding on your objectives. 12.38 - Why it's not the best use of your money to boost a post and what happens when a post is boosted. 16.00 - How to create an ad from a post that is getting lots of engagement. 16.44 - The Facebook pixel and why your ads will be far more effective if you have it installed on your website. 21.38 - Using the Facebook pixel and different audiences to inspire people to buy your product or service by 'warming them up.' 23.32 - Why pet business owners have an advantage with Facebook ads because people have such an emotional connection to their pets. 25.24 - Making audiences from people on your e mail list. 28.52 - Why it's best to create a series of ads with different copy and images and push your budget to the ones that perform best. 32.02 - Using the right image and how you should leave your ego at the door and use one that tells a story. 33.10 - Running continuous or long term campaigns and how to avoid 'ad fatigue.' 37.07 - How you can run a 'Likes' campaign for your Facebook page for as little as £1 a day. 39.00 - The content you can create to build a connection from your 'likes' campaign so pet owners book you post lockdown. 42.11 - Dogs will be used to more walks and people being at home so this is a chance to snap up more business. 43.30 - Find the positives, hold the belief that the work you have done during lockdown will pay off. 45.04 - What to do if you've rebranded - building your new brand with a cold audience. How to do an 'I've changed' ad. 48.30 - What to do when your ads stop working and why it's important to use the pixel to track what has happened. 50.26 - How having the pixel will help if you've have press coverage. 50.40 - Installing the pixel through Facebook, Wordpress Plug Ins and through your web developer. 52 - Jo's 50 per cent offer for her Facebook ads course. Links mentioned in this episode: Jo's blog post: How to install the Facebook Pixel Jo's Facebook Ads course - use the code RS50 at checkout for 50 per cent off: https://jofrancis.biz/getting-started-with-facebook-ads/ (Getting Started with Facebook Ads) Visit her Facebook page: https://www.facebook.com/JoFrancisMarketingImplementation/ (www.facebook.com/JoFrancisMarketingImplementation/) And on LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/jofrancisbiz/ (www.linkedin.com/in/jofrancisbiz/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you ever wondered about how people find out about your pet business? Do they discover you on social media, through your website, or word of mouth? While so many of us spend such a long time on social media, there are people who don’t use it at all. And they have pets that need looking after, so need to reach people to support them. In this episode I look at different ways you can reach people who might not be on social media. Plus I share examples from pet businesses who have had success in the most unusual of places. Here is a summary of the episode with the timings of the key points covered: 5.12 - Internet use figures for people in the UK from Ofcom for 2019. 5.45 - In the UK, nearly 45 million use Facebook, 17.75 use Twitter making it fourth top country for Twitter use and 24 million use Instagram according to Statista. 7.08 - UK population is 68 million which means up a third aren't on Facebook. 8.15 - How to go about finding what clients aren't on social media so you can go and find more of them. 12.30 - The importance of word of mouth. 16.35 - Clare Turner-Tarr from Pawsch and her personalised services and branded vehicle. 17.00 - How recommendations from pet shops can help you reach more people. 18.30 - How handing out flyers helped Dominic launch a six figure dog adventure business. 19.05 - Advertising and being featured in local community magazines. 21.20 - Google search - when you put your name into Google what do you see? 23.15 - Content creation, how having lots of content around what you do will help your visibility on search engines. 24.10 - Google My Business - see blog below for tips from Rosie Robinson. Examples of what's worked for different people... Heather from https://www.pawsitivesquad.co.uk/ (Pawsitive Squad), says because her work is so niche many find her via Google search. Jess Kemp, a dog walker from https://www.hoof-paws.co.uk/reviews/ (Hoof and Paws) uses flyers and cards in pet shops and coffee shops and attends networking events. Rachel Cross, a former dog walker and founder of the https://www.thepetpreneurnetwork.com/ (Petpreneur Network), says that advertising in local magazines has been cost effective. Marie Yates from https://canine-perspective.com/ (Canine Perspective) says talking about her story in relevant magazines has helped as well as the https://lovelearningfromdogs.com/team-luna-pawdcast/ (Luna Pawdcast - Life Lessons from a Dog - it's awesome!) Alison Price from https://www.houseofhenry.uk/ (House of Henry) says vehicle graphics make an impression as do special touches like collar tags. Kirsty Skeates says applying for awards which leads to press coverage has put her https://www.fit4dogsuk.com/ (Fit4Dogs hydrotherapy centre) in Hull on the map. Links mentioned in this episode: https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/patchs-training/training-a-rescue-terrier-sue-mccabe-part1/ (Blog post on Sue McCabe on helping me train Patch) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/dominic-hodgson-handing-out-flyers-six-figure-business/ (Dominic Hodgson how flyers helped build a six figure business) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/what-happens-in-a-pet-business-blog-planning-session/ (What happens in a pet business blogging session?) https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/get-your-pet-business-to-rank-on-google-with-rosie-robinson/ (Getting your pet business to rank on Google with Rosie Robinson) https://www.wufdesign.co.uk/3-common-reasons-why-your-google-my-business-isnt-working-and-how-to-fix-them/ (Why your Google My Business Page isn't working with Rosie Robinson from Wuf Design)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
The Coronavirus crisis has meant many pet business owners have had to shut up shop completely for nearly two months. This week I'm speaking to Dominic Hodgson who runs Pack Leader Adventures and coaches petpreneurs about his five step recovery plan. Having been through a recession and tried and tested many things since setting up his dog adventure business in 2011, he shares his insights on how to bounce back. Dominic says there are five steps pet business owners should follow as we come out of lockdown. They are: Protect and Serve - like the LAPD! Practice self help Carry out a business audit and create a vision for the future Be premium Put an effective marketing system in place so you feel confident that should you encounter a crisis in future, your business would be safe. Here is a summary of the episode with the timings of the key points covered: 4.25 - Protect and serve - how to use the LAPD motto to protect your business. 5.01 - Why it's vital to keep showing up and reach out to your existing client base. LISTEN: https://player.captivate.fm/episode/d6deea8c-e885-48ea-aff3-0456f988cda9/ (How to keep in touch with your pet business clients in lockdown.) 8.22 - How Dominic felt burnt out at the start of lockdown and now urges people to practice self help and take care of themselves. 9.14 - Take a break from social media if you feel like you're being affected by screen fatigue and a negative space. 10.57 - The lockdown 'hangover' and how it will impact on our wellbeing and mental health. 14.02 - Carry out a business audit and paint a picture of how you want your business to look. 15.02 - Build your business around this vision. 16.22 - How you can use lockdown to stop doing the things in the business that make you miserable. 18.25 - Having a premium business and how this will improve your life and bank balance after lockdown. 22.31 - Why people shouldn't be worried about being undercut on prices, volunteer dog walkers and things like BorrowmyDoggy.com wrecking their business. 26.22 - How lockdown has seen a rise in pet ownership - Dogs Trust rehomed 25% more dogs in the week before lockdown. 27.00 - How people aren't going to give up their dogs, spend less money on them and want to continue to care for them. 27.32 - Why pet business owners should feel reassured because the pet industry is recession proof. From May 28th, Dominic is hosting an online event for pet business owners, Inspire. It's eight days of seminars covering pet business marketing, video, how writing a book can boost your pet business and how to get media coverage. It’s to provide people with the skills they need to protect their pet businesses against unforeseen events like COVID-19 in the future. Speakers at Inspire Amy Smith - founder of the http://www.puppypre-school.com.au/about (Soundproof Puppy App) - How to build an online pet business Alex Wardle - https://artifactmedia.co.uk/about-artifact/ (Artifact Media) - How to get confident on video Vicky Fraser - https://moxiebooks.co.uk/about/ (Moxie Books) - How to write a book to change your pet business forever Colin Taylor - https://colintaylorgrooming.com/ (Colin Taylor Grooming Academy) - Expert tips for groomers Dominic will be talking about marketing and I will be doing a class on https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-press-coverage-can-help-your-pet-business/ (how to get media coverage for your pet business.) If you’d like to come along, tickets are £34 and this includes access to the live classes and recordings. You also receive a PDF of the Ultimate Pet Business Plan and The Lockdown Survival Pet Business Plan. Find out more at: https://ik335.isrefer.com/go/INSPLP/RS/ (https://www.growyourpetbusinessfast.com/inspire/*) Denotes an affiliate link which means I will receive a commission if you click through and purchase a ticket. This does not affect the price you pay.
This podcast uses the following third-party services for...
Has setting up an e mail list for your pet business been on the to-do list for ages? I know it’s the case for many pet business owners which is why I’ve spoken to VA and Mailchimp expert Catherine Gladwyn. Catherine had helped hundreds of small business owners get their heads around e mail marketing and taken away the overwhelm. She works as a virtual assistant, coaches other virtual assistants, has written a book, How to Be A Virtual Assistant and has another book due out this autumn. Catherine shares lots of practical advice on the steps to follow to start and grow your e mail list whether you have a product or service business. Her easy to follow advice will take away the overwhelm and help you get started having conversations in your inbox. Here is a summary of the episode with the timings of the key points covered: 00:45 - Background 2:44 - What is an email list and why is it important 5:58 - What puts people off creating newsletters 8:06 - How to get people on to your list 9:39 - Lead magnets and how to get people to sign up to your email list or newsletter 12:45 - Ideas for getting people to sign up 13:50 - What can you send to people when they are signed up 14:00 - How often to send your newsletter 14:58 - Ideas for pet business to use for service and product business 16:28 - Contacting people who have bought a product or service previously 16:55 - Reaching out for reviews 17:10 - Sharing press coverage 18:35 - How long should a newsletter be? 19:28 - Quality over quantity 21:21 - What system to use 22:31 - How to deal with unsubscribers 26:00 - Design of newsletter 26:19 - Template for newsletter 26:42 - Catherine's webinars 28:00 - Plugin information for websites 28:30 - Using social media for sign ups 30:00 - Publications Catherine has appeared in and press coverage 31:30 - Media email list 33:00 - Publicity 34 - Options if you feel overwhelmed by starting 35:00 - Webinar information Catherine has kindly offered a half price deal on her How to Use Mailchimp With Confidence webinars where she shares all you need to know to get started for £15. This is valid until the end of May 2020. Enter the coupon code Woof at checkout here: https://delegateva.co.uk/product/how-to-use-mailchimp-with-confidence/ (https://delegateva.co.uk/product/how-to-use-mailchimp-with-confidence/) Links mentioned in this episode If you'd like to find out more about Catherine you can do so on her website: https://delegateva.co.uk (https://delegateva.co.uk) Learn more about Catherine's new book, The 20% Rule which is out later this year: https://delegateva.co.uk/the-20-rule/ (https://delegateva.co.uk/the-20-rule/) Catherine's How To Be A VA on Amazon: https://amzn.to/2YBJjRu (How to be a Virtual Assistant by Catherine Gladwyn)* (Affiliate link) Follow Catherine on social media: Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/DelegateVA (https://www.facebook.com/DelegateVA) Twitter: https://twitter.com/DelegateVA (https://twitter.com/DelegateVA) LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/delegateva/ (https://www.linkedin.com/in/delegateva/)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking about investing in an online course or membership programme? In this episode I go through the questions you should ask yourself before signing up to an online course or membership. At the beginning I share details on a Publicity for Pet Businesses Taster I'm running next week which you can sign up for on the link here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster) Here is a summary of the episode with the timings of the key points covered: 4.28 - What do people who complete the course go on to do? 6.22 - Do you have access to the person running the course? 10.15 - Will you study in your own time or work through the material live? 13.25 - Will I be learning as part of a group? 14.45 - Are there any additional costs associated with the course or membership? 16.55 - What if you want to leave the membership? 21.50 - Where will the learning materials be stored? 23.45 - Is there a replay of the classes? 24.38 - Does the course come with any one to one support? 26.20 - Is it good value for money? 30.00 - Do I have the time to do the work? 31.06 - Is the person running the course qualified to teach it? 32.25 - Will what I learn work for my business? 34.13 - Will it be easy for me to implement? I hope you find it helpful and if you are thinking of joining a membership. It's a big decision and what you learn could be a game changer. Links mentioned in this episode: I'm holding a free taster of my Publicity for Pet Businesses programme which has now turned into a membership. It's taking place over five days next week, May 4th-8th 2020 and you can sign up here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster (publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster) To be on the waitlist for when my membership opens you can pop your details here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/ProgrammeWaitlist (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/ProgrammeWaitlist) Join my Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you ever wondered where Awareness Days come from? Or maybe considered setting one up that relates to what you do in your business? Three years ago dog photographer Kerry Jordan did the same and decided she was going to set one up herself. She had the brainwave to create National Dog Photography Day and it takes place every year on July 26th. For the last two years it has trended on Twitter with organisations all over the world taking part, from celebrities to football clubs. In this episode, Kerry shares what you need to know if you're thinking of doing the same. Here is a summary of the episode with the timings of the key points covered: 1.40 - What it's like living with FIVE whippets! 3.09 - Working with different pet product brands. 5.10 - Coming up with the idea for National Dog Photography Day. 6.20 - Kerry's advice on how to create a day that resonates with your ideal customer. 7.30 - Registering her Awareness Day. 8.20 - Tips on reaching as many people as possible on the day. 10.00 - Trending on Twitter. 11.20 - How Snoop Dogg got involved. 15.00 - Speaking about her Awareness Day at https://www.janetmurray.co.uk/2021sorted/ (2020 Sorted with Janet Murray). 16.00 - How to get involved with National Dog Photography Day 2021. 17.10 - Kerry's tips for people who want to set up an awareness day. Links mentioned in this episode: If you're thinking of setting up an awareness day, you can register it at: https://www.yearahead.com/ (www.yearahead.com/) If you'd like to find out more about Kerry, visit: https://www.furandfables.com/ (www.furandfables.com/) where you can find all her social media channels. If you are thinking of pitching to the media and you have time on your side, I have a free press release template that comes with a series of e mails to support you. You can download the template here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release) If you've heard about my Publicity for Pet Businesses programme and are interested in taking part in a free taster I'm holding over five days this summer you can sign up here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster (publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster) Join my Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you pitched to a journalist and had a positive response? Or are you thinking of pitching but feel unsure of the next step to take? If you haven't been interviewed by a journalist before, the prospect can be a little bit daunting. With the Coronavirus pandemic taking place now more business owners are finding opportunities to share their experiences in the media. And being prepared means they can maximise this so here are ten tips on how to prepare for an interview. Here is a summary of the episode with the timings of the key points covered: 2.10 - Study the publication, consider their political leaning and the demographic of their audience. 4.04 - Look at other stories they have covered on your topic or area of expertise. Case study: Jade Statt and StreetVet. 6.20 - Why journalists love including stats and figures in a story and how you can have these prepared for your interview. Case study: Dominic Hodgson and Worry Free Walks. 9.40 - Be friendly and don't waffle. Remember journalists are people too! 11.02 - Be ready to answer questions as best you can and keep a natural conversation flowing. 12.20 - Why you shouldn't hold back your age or other personal details - especially if the interview is promoting your business! 15.00 - Avoid getting over excited and talking over the journalist (I am trying to stop doing this too!) 16.02 - Keep it simple - remember you are speaking to the man on the street and they won't have the knowledge you do. The job of the journalist is to make the informations as easy to understand as possible. 18.50 - Have your key messages to hand and try to keep the conversation going back to them. This means it is more likely that they will see this as the most important part of the story. Case Study - https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/sick-dogs-living-homeless-saved-12317804 (Jade Statt - Mirror Online.) 21.00 - Have 3-5 tips handy. Case Study - https://www.facebook.com/rachelspencer76/videos/10156822902616809/ (Kerry Jordan on BBC Radio Kent. ) 23.10 - E mail links to your website, images and resources. 25.22 - Say thank you and always leave your phone number on your e mail. Links mentioned in this episode: Jade Statt - homeless pets and Coronavirus in the Independent. https://inews.co.uk/news/coronavirus-uk-latest-homeless-rough-sleepers-hotels-dogs-pets-2523747 (https://inews.co.uk/news/coronavirus-uk-latest-homeless-rough-sleepers-hotels-dogs-pets-2523747) Dominic Hodgson - Worry Free Walks in the Sunday Mirror: https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/dog-owners-who-pets-become-13669919 (https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/dog-owners-who-pets-become-13669919) Sam Barnes - Art with Sam - The Telegraph: https://www.telegraph.co.uk/food-and-drink/features/baking-classes-yoga-meet-small-businesses-helping-fight-lockdown/ (https://www.telegraph.co.uk/food-and-drink/features/baking-classes-yoga-meet-small-businesses-helping-fight-lockdown/) Sam Barnes - Art with Sam - East Anglian Daily Press: https://www.eadt.co.uk/news/samantha-barnes-woodbridge-suffolk-online-art-classes-1-6607333 (https://www.eadt.co.uk/news/samantha-barnes-woodbridge-suffolk-online-art-classes-1-6607333) If you are thinking of pitching to the media and you have time on your side, I have a free press release template that comes with a series of e mails to support you. You can download the template here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release) If you've heard about my Publicity for Pet Businesses programme and are interested in taking part in a free taster I'm holding over five days this summer you can sign up here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster (publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster) Join my Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses)
This podcast uses the following third-party...
Do you have a niche in your pet business? Maybe you've thought of focusing on one breed of animal or one type of behaviour. If this is something you've considered but you're not sure whether it would work, or maybe you've had friends and family members tell you that you're narrowing your potential clients base then you will LOVE listening to Kellie's experience. Kellie is a former police officer and it was two years ago when she adopted a Beagle named Daisy and fell in love with the breed that she decided she wanted to understand their behaviour. She became so transfixed that she took redundancy from her job in the police and set up a business as a dog trainer. Kellie soon realised she wanted to work solely with Beagles and now supports owners all over the world. Here is a summary of the episode with the timings of the key points Kellie and I cover: 1:15 - How having cumulative PTSD from working as a police officer led Kellie to adopt Beagle Daisy. 2:30 - How Kellie fell in love with Daisy but soon learned her behaviour was 'awful' and it was when she struggled to find a trainer who understood Beagles that she decided to learn herself on YouTube. 3:25 - Studying dog behaviour and psychology and how it transformed Daisy in just six months. 4:10 - How Kellie started out as a dog trainer for 'every breed' around her job as a police officer. 4.45 - Niching down in June 2019 to only working with Beagles and how it was the best decision she ever made. 6.20 - Why every breed needs its own specific trainer and understanding Beagles. 10.40 - How Daisy now helps Kellie as she trains other dogs. 11.30 - How it took guts to turn away work when she decided only to work with Beagles. 12.02 - Building her business on social media and the negativity she encountered. 14.40 - Continually topping up her learning. 15.30 - How Kellie works with Beagles all over the world. 16.30 - How rewarding it is to see how positive training has helped her second Beagle Billy. 18.00 - Kellie's Beagle Community has 4,000 members and this has helped her grow and reach people in Australia, Canada, America, India and Morocco. 21.00 - Working with Beagles in America and supporting new puppy owners in Texas. 22.00 - Meghan Markle and what it must have been like for her to leave her Beagle Guy. 24.30 - Supporting Beagle Welfare - Beagles are one of the most rehomed breeds in the UK. 25.20 - How rehomed dogs can suffer PTSD. 27.30 - Kellie's advice to those who are considering a niche. 30.00 - What's next for Kellie? It is so fascinating listening to Kellie and I hope you like this episode. You can find out more about her work on the links below. Links mentioned in this episode: Beagle Welfare: You can find out about Kellie on the following channels: Website: http://thebeaglelady.com/ (http://thebeaglelady.com/) Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/pg/thebeaglelady101 (https://www.facebook.com/pg/thebeaglelady101) YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCDqU0rlufX3rMgHLwQrlj-w (https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCDqU0rlufX3rMgHLwQrlj-w) Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/thebeaglelady101/ (https://www.instagram.com/thebeaglelady101/) Twitter: https://twitter.com/thebeaglelady (https://twitter.com/thebeaglelady) If you are thinking of pitching to the media and you have time on your side, I have a free press release template that comes with a series of e mails to support you. You can download the template here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release) If you've heard about my Publicity for Pet Businesses programme and are interested in taking part in a free taster I'm holding over five days this summer you can sign up here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster (publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/PRTaster)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
This episode looks at the four different types of content pet business owners can be creating while they can't physically serve their customers while on lockdown during the Coronavirus pandemic. How do you stay in touch with your clients for the next 11 weeks and give value so your business can bounce back when the restrictions are lifted? We keep hearing we need to keep showing up on social media and be present. But sometimes it can be hard to know what to say. This is something that is causing a lot of worry and overwhelm which is why I created this episode and also a supporting programme I'm offering right now. In it I cover the different stages and types of content you can be creating to keep in touch with clients over the coming weeks and months. They are: Relate, Reflect, Respond, Prepare 4.52 - How to keep in touch without being insensitive or annoying. 5.30 - The financial situation self employed pet business owners in the UK are in right now. 7.05 - How the media wants to hear about feel good community stories. 9.30 - The impact of lockdown on dog friendly travel. 11.20 - The first stage - Relating to clients and showing empathy. 13.53 - The next stage - Reflecting on the implications of lockdown. 17.33 - The third stage - Responding to what your clients need and providing solutions to support them. 24.00 - The four stage or type of content - Preparing for the future. Try to look ahead to three months time to what you will be facing and your clients. About the Coronavirus Support Programme This is a four week coaching programme helping pet businesses owners create content with confidence on lockdown. It includes my Kick Start Your Pet Business blog course (Usually £127) and a 30 minute one to one (Usually £99) This programme is £33 a month for three months so a total investment of £99. You can sign up here: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/offers/B7FFzJx2 (Coronavirus Support programme) Links mentioned in this episode: How to pitch to the media about your pet business and Coronavirus. https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-to-pitch-to-journalists-about-coronavirus/ (Coronavirus pitching guide) Suzanne Gould from Edinburgh Holistic Dogs in the Telegraph https://www.telegraph.co.uk/food-and-drink/in-depth/crisis-can-bring-best-us-meet-small-businesses-creating-hope/ (A crisis can bring out the best in us) Suzanne Gould from Edinburgh Holistic Dogs in The Scotsman https://www.edinburghnews.scotsman.com/health/coronavirus/leith-dog-trainer-starts-online-group-help-dogs-and-their-owners-survive-coronavirus-lockdown-2520781 (Dog trainer starts online group to help pets in lockdown) Anna Pollard from The Dog House https://www.facebook.com/groups/2765380270184544/ (Lockdown Grooming Challenge)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
How do you stand out from the crowd when there are so many pet businesses popping up everywhere? For Claire Lawrence, a dog trainer from Buxton in Derbyshire, writing a book is what has set her out from the competition. In this episode Claire shares how she went from being a fed up chef to a dog walker before becoming a trainer. And how a terrifying episode with her own dog Titan which culminated in a man having his finger bitten off inspired her to work with reactive dogs. Now Claire helps dog owners all over the world cope with their barking dogs and this year plans a UK tour. Here is a breakdown of what Claire had to say: 1.32 - How her German Shepherd Titon and puppy Skye prompted her to ditch her job and start a dog walking business - in the same day back in 2010. 2.44 - How she worked as a one to one dog walker, chef and at boarding kennel at the beginning to keep her head above water. 4.00 - Claire explains how she focused on solo dog walks working with dogs who struggled being on a group walk and how this helped build her confidence. 6.00 - How she became the go-to person for owners with difficult dogs who pulled, jumped and lunged and put her own training into practice while walking them which evolved into her reward based training. 7.45 - Claire says it was in 2017 when more dog walkers were popping up in her area when she realised she needed to put value on her training walks and start charging. 8.55 - Now 85% of her clients are barking dogs. 11.30 - Claire decided to put her methods into a book, You'd be barking mad not to! 12.57 - How the book has helped raise Claire's profile. 13.47 - How the book led to a podcast, membership and UK tour and messages from people all over the world. 14.53 - Taking part in my free PR challenge helped open her eyes on how publicity could help her. 15.29 - Being in Your Dog inspired local vets to contact her to talk about supporting their clients. 18.00 - Her UK tour and the demos that people can look forward to with Claire and her feisty Border Terrier Digger. Websites and links mentioned in this episode you may find helpful: Find out more about Claire on her website where you can order her book: https://3sts.co.uk/ (https://3sts.co.uk/) Claire in Companion Life: http://www.companionlife.co.uk/how-good-dogs-can-turn-bad-titons-story/ (http://www.companionlife.co.uk/how-good-dogs-can-turn-bad-titons-story/) Claire in Your Dog: https://www.yourdog.co.uk/store/back-issues/your-dog/your-dog-magazine-january-2020 (https://www.yourdog.co.uk/store/back-issues/your-dog/your-dog-magazine-january-2020) Claire's interview with me on my pet blog about the book: https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/health/how-to-help-your-barking-dog-with-claire-lawrence/ (https://www.thepawpost.co.uk/health/how-to-help-your-barking-dog-with-claire-lawrence/) Free Press Release Template: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release) Join my Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Have you tried pitching a story idea and got Radio Silence? If you have, don't worry, it happens to most people when they start pitching to the media, including journalists who have been in the industry for decades. In this episode I talk about Five Journalists you can pitch to with your pet business story who are more likely to say 'yes.' Here are the notes for this episode, and at the end you'll find links to the articles and resources I've mentioned. Shownotes: 0.30 - Where we are at in the Coronavirus crisis. (March 2020) 2.30 - Why you should always pitch to a specific journalist - not a generic e mail like News@ or editor@ 4.00 - Why would anyone care? The question you need to ask each time you think of pitching a story. Breakdown of the five journalists. 4.31 - The journalist who covers your patch. 6.30 - The journalist who covers your specialist area. 8.40 - The journalist with an interest in your business. 10.30 - The journalist who is crying out for ideas. 13.50 - The journalist you've already built a relationship with. 18.20 - Don't run out of steam once you're written your press release - be sure to get in front of the right person and nurture relationships. Websites and links mentioned in this episode you may find helpful: Claire Lawrence talks dogs Coronavirus on the radio: https://podcasts.apple.com/gb/podcast/episode-40-coping-with-coronavirus/id1469102378?i=1000468962896 (Radio Nottingham) Dominic Hodgson coverage for Tour De Rescue: https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/dog-trainer-cycle-300-miles-19792708 (https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/dog-trainer-cycle-300-miles-19792708) Press Release Template and e mail series: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release) Join my Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
In this episode I talk about seven easy ways to approach a journalist if you have a story about your pet business. Often business owners can put off approaching the media as they think they need to have a PR company, or an expensive press pack, or a perfectly crafted press release. But the reality is that all journalists are interested in is great ideas to entertain their readers. Here are the key points if you'd like to skip forward: 1.30 - Follow the #journorequest hashtag on Twitter or in the US, #helpareporterout or #HARO 4.30 - The Facebook groups where journalists are hanging out looking for case studies and experts. I would recommend https://www.facebook.com/groups/166398616795827/ (Feature Me) (free) and https://www.facebook.com/groups/lightbulbhangout/ (Lightbulb) (£5 per month). 7.31 - Look out for 'come ons' in the actual publication. These are short articles inside the newspaper or magazine where they ask readers to get in touch and provide an e mail address or phone number. 8.50 - How networking events can potentially connect you will journalists. Personal connections are powerful so ask how you can help them so they remember you. 10.45 - Have an elevator pitch ready - journalists like you to be succinct. 12.00 - Use connections with friends and family members who may know a journalist and can introduce you. You'll be one step ahead. 13.41 - Look at the regular pages and features in the publication and see where you fit in. Can you pitch to the business section or lifestyle pullout? 15.22 - What makes a great press release and how to put one together. 17.15 - Using the Press Release template and supporting e mails. 18.00 - Be creative and make sure you're giving journalists something of value, research the writer and what they cover, don't do the 'spray and pray' and your press release will stand a far better chance of landing. Websites and links mentioned in this episode you may find helpful: Sue McCabe in the Telegraph: https://www.telegraph.co.uk/family/life/gets-dog-rise-celebrity-pet-nup/ (https://www.telegraph.co.uk/family/life/gets-dog-rise-celebrity-pet-nup/) Press Release Template and e mail series: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release) Join my Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
In this introductory episode I explain what publicity is and how it can help your pet business. I explain the following: What publicity is. The different places you can get publicity. How you can go about getting publicity. Success stories from pet entrepreneurs who have have media coverage and how it has helped their businesses. Here is a breakdown of the areas covered: 1.37 - Introduction to me and my experience as a journalist for national media in the UK and a pet blogger at https://www.thepawpost.co.uk (www.thepawpost.co.uk) 2.25 - How getting media coverage for your pet business isn't out of your reach. There is a HUGE market for stories about pets. 3.45 - Pitching to the media isn't something you have to do every day, but fits perfectly into your marketing mix. 5.07 - How publicity will increase your visibility. 10.42 - How media coverage can position you as an expert. 14.00 - What happens when you're one of several recommendations and you're the one with media coverage. 15.10 - Standing out from the crowd. 17.14 - How publicity works for your business 24/7. 20.00 - Building credibility in you and your brand offline. 23.00 - Putting yourself forward for media coverage is being vulnerable and can be scary but once you have done it once it will build your confidence. If you found this podcast helpful you can also read it as a blog post here: https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-press-coverage-can-help-your-pet-business/ (https://www.publicityforpetbusinesses.co.uk/how-press-coverage-can-help-your-pet-business/) Further reading and resources mentioned in this episode: Kim O'Donnell in the Daily Mail: https://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-7821419/Ex-School-nurse-sees-dog-accessories-modelled-Boris-Johnsons-dog-Dilyn.html (https://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-7821419/Ex-School-nurse-sees-dog-accessories-modelled-Boris-Johnsons-dog-Dilyn.html) Karen Boyce as the most popular puppy trainer in Wales: https://www.leaderlive.co.uk/news/18225923.llangollen-dog-trainer-celebrates-milestone-achievement-beastly-thoughts-professional-dog-service/ (https://www.leaderlive.co.uk/news/18225923.llangollen-dog-trainer-celebrates-milestone-achievement-beastly-thoughts-professional-dog-service/) Dominic Hodgson's Worry Free Walks book: https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/dog-owners-who-pets-become-13669919 (https://www.mirror.co.uk/news/uk-news/dog-owners-who-pets-become-13669919) Free Press Release Template: https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release (https://publicityforpetbusinesses.mykajabi.com/Press-Release) Join my Facebook group: https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses (https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy
Are you thinking of pitching to your local media about what you're doing in your pet business about Coronavirus? It's a scary time for everyone and journalists are looking to hear from businesses on what they are doing about Coronavirus. This episode gives you advice on what to do if you'd like to pitch a story to a local news outlet, so that could be a newspaper, website or TV or radio show. I share real life examples of businesses who have already been successful in doing this. The episode covers: How to find local publications who are writing about what is happening with CV. How to find journalists contact details. How to write a quick pitch about what you're doing. It is a fast track version of my regular PR My Pet Biz challenge in response to the current crisis. People need to know what support is out there for their pets and you can follow these tips to share information. If you would like more advice, join my Free Facebook Group, https://www.facebook.com/groups/publicitytipsforpetbusinesses/ (Publicity Tips for Pet Businesses.)
This podcast uses the following third-party services for analysis:
Chartable - https://chartable.com/privacy